Abap Material ENRICH IT

SAP: - System Applications and Products in Data Processing
ABAP: - Advanced Business Application Programming language

ABAP isnt case sensitive.
Role of an ABAPer in real time:-

R I C E F W
Reports Interfaces Conversions Enhancement Forms Work flow
In SAP ABAP each task is called one object.

Report: - Based on the given input well fetch [read or get] data from data base and display in a
predefined format.
Types of Reports:-
1. Classical Reports
2. Interactive Reports
3. ALV Reports
Classical Reports: - Its nothing but to display the entire information in a single list.
EX:-
Interactive Reports: - Its nothing but to display the summarized information in the basic list and
detailed information in further lists.
EX:-
ALV Reports: - This is used to display the data with additional futures i.e. Borders, colors, shades, lines
etc.
The real time reports are internal purpose.
Interfaces: - Interfaces are used to connecting from SAP to SAP as well as SAP to non-SAP.
Interfaces are ALE/IDOCS, BAPI
By Mr.Sunil
[email protected] Page 1
Conversion: - Conversion programs are used to transverse the data
from file to SAP system.
Conversion programs are BDC,ISMW
Enhancements: - Enhancements are used to adding some additional

functionality to the standard functionality with out disturbing the
standard functionality.
Enhancements are BADI, user exists, customer exits enhancement frame work, enhancement spot
Forms: - Forms are used to design the business documents such

as offer letters, experience letters, pay bills etc.
Forms are SAP Script, SMART forms.
Work flow: - Work flow is used to automate the exist business

process & used to identify the work load of
employee as well as performance of the employee.
Types of project:-
1. Implementation project
2. Up gradation project
3. Maintenance / Support project
4. Roll out project
Implementation project: - When ever we want to develop the SAP from fundamental on wards then
we go for implementation project. Implementation project take 1 year to 3 years.
Phases of implementation project:-

1. Project preparation phase
2. Business Blue Print phase
3. Realization phase
4. Post preparation phase
5. Go-live & support phase
In the implementation project the ABAPer must start from Realization phase.
Up gradation project: - When ever the version is changed if you want to implement the new
technologies into existing system then you go for up gradation project. Up gradation project takes 30 days
to 3 months.
Maintenance / Support project: - After go level support phase each and every company requires
24*7 supports. Then they go for support project.
By Mr.Sunil
Roll out project: - whenever we purchase a new company if you want to extend the same SAP to new
company, then we go for roll out project.
If you want to implement the new module in the existing SAP system then we go for roll out
project.
Real time system landscape:-
The source code of an ABAP

consists of either a statement
or comment.
A statement is the collection of operators, operands, variables and keywords.
Operators: - In ABAP weve 3 types of operators.
Mathematical Operator:-
Operator Description Example
+ Addition 3+2=5
- Subtraction 32=1
* Multiplication 3*2=6
** Exponent ional 3 * * 3 = 32 = 9
/ Division 4/2=2
Mod Reminder of division 5 mod 2 = 1
Of two numbers
Comparative Operator:-
< or LT Less than a < b or a LT b
<= or LE Less than or equal a <= b or a LE b
> or GT Grater than a > b or a GT b
>= or GE Grater than or equal a >= b or a GE b
= or EQ Equal a = b or a EQ b
<> or NE Not equal a <> b or a NE b
Relational or Logical Operator:-

And AND a < b and a < c
Or OR a < b or a < c
Not NOT -----------
Operands: - Operands are the variables which
we need to perform the particular operation.
Ex: -
Variables: - Variable is the name given to the

memory location.
Keywords: - Keywords are used to identify the
By Mr.Sunil
type of the statement. Keywords are (C2D3EO).
1. Calling keyword
2. Controlling keyword
3. Declaration keyword
4. Definition keyword
5. Data base keyword
6. Event keyword
7. Operational keyword
Declaration keyword: - This keyword is used to declare the variables in ABAP. Some of the
declarative keywords are Data, Parameters, Tables, and Types etc.
Comment: - Comments are non executable statements. These are used to improve the readability of the
program. If you want to comment the entire line then you must place * in first column of the line.
Ex: - * a b c ---
If you want to comment the part of the line then you must place in (double quotations) from
double quotation onwards it treats as a comment.
Data types
Numeric Data types Character data types
Integer I char C
Float F numeric char N
Packed Decimal P Date D
Time T
Note: - Char is alpha numeric. That means it accept the integer and character.
Note: - Here Integer, Float, Date and Time are fixed length data types & rest of the data types are
variable length data types.
Syntax of Integer (I):-

Data <variable name> type I.
Ex: - data A type I.
The initial / default value of integer is 0.
Syntax of Float (F):-
Data <variable name> type F.
Ex: - data A type F.
The initial value of integer is .00.
Syntax of Packed Decimal (P):-
Data <variable name> (<length>) type P decimals <no>.
Ex: - data A(10) type P decimal 3.
The initial value of packed decimal is .000 (number of decimals)
Syntax of Char (C):-
Data <variable name> (<length>) type C.
Ex: - data A(5) type C.
The initial value of char is space / empty.
By Mr.Sunil
Syntax of Date (D):-
Data <variable name> type D.
Ex: - data A type D.
The initial format is YYYYMMDD. (20140425)
Syntax of Numeric Char (N):-
Data <variable name> (<length>) type N.
Ex: - data A(10) type N.
The initial value of Numeric Char is 000. (Based on length)
Syntax of Time (T):-

Data <variable name> type T.
Ex: - data A type T.
The initial value of time is 000000. format is HHMMSS
In ABAP each statement ends with dot (.). WRITE is the operational keyword to display the output in
ABAP.
If more than one variable having the same keyword list of same keyword every time, we use chain
operators & variables are separated by camas (,). And statements end with dot (.).
Data: A type I, B type I, C type I.
A = 10.
B = 20.
C = A + B.
Write c.
Technical requirements to create the program
1. Name of the program
In ABAP the name of the program must be starts with y or z because ax reserved for SAP.
2. Provide the place / folder where we save the program. The place / folder is called development class up
to 4.6c version. Now its calling as package.
Note: - $TMP is the default package which is provided by SAP. The latest version is ECC6.0
(Enterprise Central Component).
Steps to up the server in our own PC: -

Double click on SAP management consol on desktop. Select the server. Right click all tasks start.
Provide the password india123. Click on As ABAP WP Table. Continuously click on refresh button
until the statistics wait. Minimize that one.
Steps to log on to SAP:-
By Mr.Sunil
Double click on SAP logon on the desktop. Select server click on logon. Provide client is 800. User is
sapuser. Password is india123 and click on enter.
Steps to create the program: -
Execute SE38 (ABAP editor). Provide the program name. Click on create. Provide title. Select type is
executable program. Click on save. Click on local object.
Note: - Click on local object means our program will be saved on $TMP package.
Steps to execute the program:-
Save the program CTRL + S.
Check the program CTRL + F2.
Active the program CTRL + F3.
Execute the program F8.
Parameter is the keyword which accepts the input at runtime.
Note: - Default is the keyword to provide the default value to the input variable.
Syntax: -
Parameter <name> type <data type> default <value>
Ex: - parameter A type I default 10.
A 10
Note: - Obligatory is the keyword to provide input field is as mandatory.

Syntax: - parameter <name> type <data type> obligatory.
Ex: - parameter A type I obligatory.
Note: - Parameter cant accept float data type. Only it accept packet decimal.
SQL is the database dependent & SAP is the database independent. So SAP doesnt support SQL.
Open SQL support SAP, because open SQL is the database independent.
Open SQL doesnt support DDL. So we cant create the tables by using simple statements like oracle.
Open SQL support DDIC (Data Dictionary) which is used to create or alter the tables.
By Mr.Sunil
By Mr.Sunil
DATA DISTIONARY
Data dictionary is the central source of the database management system. The main functionality of the
DDIC is to create or alter the tables.
Creating the db table by using DDIC in two ways: -

1. Direct method / Pre defined method / Built in method
2. Data element method.
Technical requirement to create the table: -
1. Name of the table starts with y or z because ax reserved for SAP.
2. Provide list of fields, data types and lengths.
3. Provide the delivery class.
4. Provide the Technical settings.
Delivery class: - It defines the owner of the table as well as it controls the transport of the data from one
table to another table.
Technical setting is nothing but combination of DATA CLASS & SIZE OF THE CATAGERY.
Data class: - Data class defines the physical area of the database in where our table is logically stored.
Some of the important data classes are
APPL 0 Master data class

APPL 1 Transaction data class
APPL 2 Organization data class
Master data class: - Master data class is the data, which data we can access frequently as well as
update rarely.
Ex: - customer master data, employee master data
Transactional data: - Its the data, which data we can access frequently as well as updated frequently.
Ex: - Sales order data, purchase order data
Technical data is dependent data.
Organizational data: - Its the data, which data we can access frequently & updated rarely.
Organizational data is created at the time system configures.
Ex: - Company data, branches data
Size category: - It determines the space require for the table.
Each table must have at least one field as primary field that
should be the character data type that should be in the first field
in the table.
Steps to create the table by using direct method: -

Execute SE11 in command prompt. Select the data base table. Provide the table name. Click on
create. Provide short description name. Provide delivery class A. Select the display / maintenance
By Mr.Sunil
allowed. Click on fields tag. Click on predefined type button. Provide the field names, data types, lengths
and short description.
Field Key Data type Length Short Description
Eid CHAR 10 Employee ID

Ename CHAR 25 Name of the employee
Eadd CHAR 35 Address of employee
Save the table (CTRL + S). Check the table (CTRL + F2). Click on technical settings. Select the data class
as APPL 0 & size category as zero. Save the technical settings. Click on back. Then activate table (CTRL
+ F3).
Steps to provide the data to the table directly: -

In the menu bar click on utilities table contents provide the data. Click on save. Repeat same steps
for all employees.
Steps to display the data from table: -
In the menu bar click on utilities Table contents display. Click on execute.
Create the following table by using direct method
Note: - In the real time, we never create the data base table by using
direct method or predefined type. Because, if you want to establish the
relation between any two tables, then you must maintain the same
domain name in both the tables. In direct method there is no domain
concept. So we go for data element method.
Field Key Init Data Element

Sid
Domain: - Domain is the collection of data types & lengths.

Data Element: - Data element is the collection of domain with short description
By Mr.Sunil
Create the employee table by using data element type bottom up approach.
Steps to create the domain: - Execute SE11. Select the radio button domain. Provide the domain
name by click on create. Provide short description. Provide the data type & length. Save the domain.
Check the domain. Activate the domain. Repeat the same steps for all domains.
Steps to create the data element: - Execute the SE11. Select the radio button data type. Provide
the data element name. Click on create. Click on enter. Provide short description. Provide domain which is
already created. Save the data element. Check the data element. Activate the data element. Repeat the
same steps for all the data elements.
Steps to create the table by using data element type (bottom up approach): - Execute
SE11. Select the radio button database table. Provide the table name. Click on create. Provide short
description. Provide delivery class is A. Select Display / Maintenance allowed. Click on filed tab.
Provide the field name, data elements.
Field Key Data Element
Eid zskr_9_eid
Ename zskr_9_ename
Eadd zskr_9_eadd
Save the table. Check the table. Before activate, click on technical settings. Select the data class, size
category. Save the technical settings. Click on back. Activate the table.
Create the following employee table by using bottom up approach.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - If you get the warning message enhancement category for table missing then in menu bar click
on extras enhancement category enter select the radio button can be enhancement (char type or
numeric) enter.
Note: - If you want to provide the data directly to the table then you must select the display maintenance
allowed.
Note: - If you select the display maintenance allow with restrictions, then display only possible. Create
records not possible.
Note: - If you select the display maintenance not allowed then display & create integer not possible.
Create the following employee table by using top down approach.
By Mr.Sunil
Steps to create the table by using top down approach: -
Execute SE11. Select the radio button Data base table. Provide the table name. Click on create. Provide
short description. Provide delivery class is A. Select the display maintenance allowed. Click on fields
tab. Provide the field name data element which is not created. Double click on data element. Click on yes.
Click on local object. Enter. Click on yes. Provide short description. Provide domain name which isnt
created. Double click on it. Click on yes. Click on local object. Create the domain. Click on yes. Provide
short description, data type, length. Save, check, activate the domain. Click on back. Save, check, activate
data element. Click on back. Repeat the same steps for all the other things. Save the table. Check the table.
Click on technical settings. Select the data class, size category. Save the technical settings. Click on back.
Activate the table.
Note: - If you want to display the particular field information, click on utilities on menu bar. Select the
table contents, display. In the menu bar click on settings format list choose list. Select our required
field check box. Enter. Execute.
Foreign key: -
Foreign key is a field in one table. This is connected to another table via foreign key relationship. The
purpose is to validate the data being entered in one table (foreign key table) by checking against list of
possible values in another table.
Technical requirement to establish the foreign key relationship: -
1. The domain of the both fields in both the tables must be the same.
2. The check table field must be the primary.
Establish the foreign key relation between employee & salary tables.
Steps to establish the foreign key relation: -

Execute SE11. Select the radio button Data base object. Provide the foreign key table name. Click on
change. Select the fields for which field we want establish the foreign key relation. Click on foreign key
icon under fields tab. Provide the check table name. Click on generate proposal. Then the system
automatically provides the relation between these two tables. Enter. Save, check, activate the table.
Working with reference fields: -
In the real time when ever we are working with amount field then you must provide reference as currency
field.
By Mr.Sunil
In real time when ever we are working with quantity field then you must provide reference as unit
of measurement field.
Field Data type

Amount CURR
Currency CUKY
Quantity QUAN
Units UNIT
Create the following material table.
In the real time when ever we create the data base table then you must provide the MANDT client field.
The table contains MANDT fields then the table is client dependent. That is the data in the table can not
reflected to all other clients in the same server. If the table doesnt contain MANDT filed then the table is
client independent that is the data in data base table automatically reflected to all other clients in the same
server.
Steps to provide the reference fields: -

Select the quantity field. Click on currency / quantity fields tab. Provide the reference table and reference
field.
Field Data element Data type Reference table Reference field

MQTY ZSKR_9_MQTY QUAN ZSKR_9_MAT MUOM
Select the amount / price field. Click as currency / quantity fields tab. Provide the reference table,
reference field.
Field Data element Data type Reference table Reference field

Mprice ZSKR_9_Mprice CURR ZSKR_9_MAT MCUKY
Note: - T006 is the standard data base table which contains all the unit of measurements.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - In the real time when ever we are working with unit of measurement field then we must
establish the foreign key relations with T006 as a check table. If you want to establish the foreign key
relation then you must maintain the SAP domain MEINS into our field domain.
Steps to establish the foreign key relation: -

Select the unit of measurement in our table. Click on foreign key icon under the fields tab. Then the
system will give a proposal with values table T006 as check table. Then click on yes. Enter. Save, check,
activate the table.
Note: - TCURC is the standard data base table which contains all the currencies.
In the real time when ever we are working with currency field then we must establish the foreign key
relation with TCURC as check table. If you want to establish the foreign key relation then we must
maintain the SAP domain WAERS into our table field domain.
Select the currency field in our table. Click on foreign key icon under the fields tab. Then the system
automatically gives a proposal with TCURC as check table. Click on yes. Enter. Save, check, activate the
table.
By Mr.Sunil
Types of tables: -
1. Transparent tables
2. Cluster tables
3. Pool tables
Transparent tables: - Transparent tables are one to one relationship. That is if you create one
transparent table in the data dictionary, then itll store like only one data base table in the data base.
DDIC Data base

Cluster table: - This tables are many one relationship. That is if you create the many clustered tables
in DDIC then they will form like a table cluster & store in the data base.
DDIC Data base

Buffering isnt possible for clustered table. From this reason only fetching the data from clustered table
take more time.
Clustered table is suitable when you fetch the fewer amounts of data from more fields.
Pooled table: -
Pooled tables are many one relationship. That means if you create many pooled tables in DDIC, then
they will form like a table pool & stored in the data base.
Pooled tables are suitable when we fetch the large amount of data from fewer fields.
Note: - Joins arent possible for Clustered & Pooled tables
Create the table pool. Create pooled table & attached to the table pool.
Steps to create table pool: -
By Mr.Sunil
Execute SE11. In the menu bar click on utilities other dictionary objects. Select the radio button table
pool. Provide the table pool name. Click on create. Select the radio button table pool. Enter. Provide short
description. Click on save. In the menu bar click on go to technical settings. Select the size category.
Save. Back. Check & activate the table pool.
Steps to create pooled table: -
Execute SE11. Select the radio button data base table. Provide the pooled table name. Click on create.
Provide short description. Provide delivery class is A. Click on fields tab. Provide the field names, data
element. Save the table. In the menu bar, click on extras change table category. Select the radio button
pooled table. Enter. Click on delivery & maintenance tab. Provide the table pool. Save, check the table.
Click on technical settings. Select the data class size category. Save the technical settings. Click on back.
Activate the table.
Create the table cluster. Create clustered table & attached to the table clustered.
When ever we create the clustered table then we must maintain the primary fields in the table
clustered. When ever we create the clustered table then we must maintain at least one non primary
key.
Steps to create table cluster: -
Execute SE11. In the menu bar click on utilities other dictionary objects. Select the radio button table
pool / cluster. Provide the table cluster. Click on create. Select the radio button table cluster. Enter.
Provide short description. Click on save. Select the VARKEY & click on minus. Click on + button.
Provide the mandatory field of clustered table.
Field name key Data type Length

MANDT CLNT 3
LIFNR CHAR 10
Click on save. Click on go to on menu bar technical settings. Click on back. Check, activate.
Steps to create clustered table: -
Execute SE11. Select the radio button data base table. Provide the table name. Click on create. Provide
short description. Provide deliver class is A. Click on field tab. Provide field names, data element.
Field Key Initial Data element
MANDT MANDT
LIFNR LIFNR
NAME1 NAME1
Click on save. In the menu bar click on extras change category. Select the radio button clustered table.
Enter. Click on delivery & maintenance tab. Provide the table clustered. Save, check the table. Click on
technical settings. Provide data class, size category, save the technical settings. Click on back. Activate the
table.
Note: - In the real time we never create cluster & pool tables. Only we can create transparent tables.
Note: - In the real time when ever were altering the table we get the error structure change of field
error. Then we must adjust the data base.
Steps to adjust the data base: -

Click on utilities in menu bar data base object data base utility. Click on activate & adjust data base.
Click on yes. Now the table is activated.
By Mr.Sunil
Index: -
Indexes are used to improve the performance of the select query. There are two types of indexes.
1. Primary index
2. Secondary index
Primary index: - Primary index is the primary fields. Without a primary index we cant create the data
base table. We can place up to 16 primary indexes per table. We can create the primary index only for
custom tables. Not for standard tables.
Secondary index: -Secondary index is possible for other than primary fields. Without a secondary
index we can create the data base table. We can create up to 9 secondary indexes per a table. We can
create secondary index for both standard & custom tables.
Note: -We cant delete the domain which is already assigned to data element. We cant delete the data
element which is already assigned to data base table. We can create the data base table with out a data
element by using direct method or predefined type.
Steps to create secondary index: -

Execute SE11. Select the radio button data base table. Provide the table name for which table we want to
display. Click on display. Click on index beside technical settings. Click on create index. Provide the
index name. Enter. Provide short description. Click on table fields. Select our require fields. Enter. Save,
check, activate.
Some of filed names in T001:

BUKRS Company code
BUTXT Company name
ORT01 City
LAND1 Country
Some of field names in

KNA1: -
KUNNR Customer number
NAME1 Name
ORT01 City
LAND1 Country
SPRAS Language
Some of the field names in

LFA1 : -
LIFNR Vendor number
NAME1 Name
ORT01 City
LAND1 Country
SPRAS Language
Differences between data base table and structure
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - Adding the following fields to the custom tables ZSKR_9_EMP1 and ZSKR_9_STU by using
include structure.
ORT01 City
LAND1 Country
SPRAS Language
If you want to add block of fields or set of fields into more than one custom table instead of maintaining
those fields in each and every table its better to create one structure with those fields & later we include
the same structure in all structures.
ZSKR_9_EMP ZSKR_9_STU
Eid Sid
Ename Sname
Eadd Sadd
ORT01 ORT01
LAND1 LAND1
SPRAS SPRAS
In this object or task we must create one structure with ORT01, LAND1, SPRAS & later we include this
structure in the ZSKR_9_EMP & ZSKR_9_STU custom data base tables.
Note:
/O is used to opens a new session without terminating the current session.
/N is used to opens a new session with terminating the current session.
Steps to create the structure: -

Execute SE11. Select the radio button data type. Provide the structure name. Click on create. Select the
radio button structure. Enter. Provide short description. Provide component, component type.
Component Component type
ORT01 ORT01
LAND1 LAND1
SPRAS SPRAS
Save the structure, check, execute the structure.
By Mr.Sunil
Steps to include the same structure in any number of custom tables: -
Execute SE11. Select the radio button data base table. Provide the table name. Click on change. Place the
cursor where you want to include the structure. Provide the field name .include. Provide the data
element as structure name. Enter. Save, check, activate the table.
Steps to create our own package: -

Execute SE80. Click on edit object. Select development coordination. Click on package radio button.
Write your package name. Press F5 button or click on create. Provide short description. Click on enter or
Save. Click on enter.
Note: In the real time packages are created by BASIS people. Based on the module or based on the object
category & request number is created by ABAPer.
Add the CMM level field which is CHAR & length 1 to the T001 data base table through
APPEND structure.
Steps to add some additional fields to the standard data base table: -
Execute SE11. Select the radio button data base table. Provide the table name for which table we want to
add some additional fields. Click on display. Click on append structure on application tool bar. Click on
create append. Provide the append structure name. Enter. Provide short description. Provide component,
component type, double click on component type or data element. Click on yes. Click on yes. Save our
package. Enter. Enter. Provide short description. Provide the domain which isnt created. Double click on
domain. Click on yes. Save in our own package. Enter. Click on yes. Provide the short description.
Provide data type, size. Save, check, activate domain. Click on back. Save, check, activate the data
element. Repeat the same steps for all components. Save the structure, check, activate.
Note: In the real time when ever we develop any task then we must save in our own package & request
number not in $TMP.
Syntax of declaring the structure / table in ABAP editor: -
Data : Begin of <structure / table>,

-------
------- List of fields
-------
End of <structure / table>.
Ex: -
Data: Begin of emp,
Eid(10) type c,
Ename(25) type c, Work area
Eadd(35) type c,
End of emp.
Work area always holds only one record at a time. So we go for internal tables.
Internal table: -
1. Internal table is the collection of records.
By Mr.Sunil
2. Internal tables are temporary tables. That means the data in internal table wont save any where in
SAP.
3. Internal tables are dynamic memory location. That means we no need to provide the size of the
internal table.
4. The scope of the internal table is up to that program.
5. Placing the data to the internal table as well as getting the data from internal table is always record
by record.
Backend picture of SAP ABAP: -
By Mr.Sunil
Differences between data base table & internal tables: -
Data base table Internal table
1. Data base tables are permanent storage 1. Internal tables are temporary storage
location. location.
2. We can access the data base table from any 2. We can access the internal table with in the
where in SAP. program only.
3. We must provide the size of the data base 3. Internal tables are dynamic. So we no need to
tables. provide the size.
Syntax of declaring the internal table : -
Data <internal table> like table of <work area>.
Syntax of accessing the fields from work area :-
<work area name> - <file name>

Ex: WA Eid.
Note: - Append is the key word to transfer the data from work area to internal table.
Data: Begin of WA,

Eid(10) type c, IT
Ename(25) type c, Eid Ename Ename
Eadd(35) type c,
End of WA. 1 Vidya Bharat Nagar
Data IT like table of WA.
WA-Eid = '1'. 2 Satish Kukatpalli
WA-Ename = 'Vidya'.
WA-Eadd = 'Bharat Nagar'.
Append WA to IT.
WA-Eid = '2'.
WA-Ename = 'Satish'.
WA-Eadd = 'Kukatpalli'.
Append WA to IT.
Loop at IT into WA.
Write: / WA-Eid, WA-Ename, WA-Eadd.
Endloop.
T001 (company codes) KNA1 (customer master table)

ORT01 City KUNNR Customer number
LAND1 Country NAME1 Name
BUKRS Company code SPRAS Language
BUTXT Company name
Syntax to select query: -
Select <filed1> <filed2> . from <data base table> into table <internal table> where <condition>
Display the company codes company names & cities
By Mr.Sunil
Data: Begin of WA,
BUKRS(4) type C,
BUTXT(25) type C,
ORT01(25) type C,
End of WA.
Select BUKRS BUTXT ORT01 from T001 into table IT.
Loop at IT into WA.
Write:/ WA-BUKRS, WA-BUTXT, WA-ORT01.
Endloop.
Display the customer numbers, customer names, cities & countries.

Data: Begin of WA,
KUNR(10) type C,
NAME1(35) type C,
ORT01(35) type C,
LAND1(3) type C,
END of WA.
Select KUNNR NAME1 ORT01 LAND1 from KNA1 into table IT.
Loop at IT into WA.
Write:/ WA-KUNR, WA-NAME1, WA-ORT01, WA-LAND1.
Endloop.
Syntax of declaring the field: -

Data <filed name>(<length>) type <data type>
(OR)
Data <filed name> type <data elements>
(OR)
Data <filed name> type <data base table> - <field name>
Ex: - Data BUKRS(4) type C.
(OR)
Data BUKRS type BUKRS
(OR)
Data Bukrs type T001-Bukrs
Display the company codes, company names & cities.
Data: Begin of WA,
BUKRS type T001-BUKRS,
BUTXT type T001-BUTXT,
ORT01 type T001-ORT01,
End of WA.
Select BUKRS BUTXT ORT01 from T001 into table IT.
Loop at IT into WA.
Write:/ WA-BUKRS, WA-BUTXT, WA-ORT01.
Endloop.
By Mr.Sunil
Select-options is the keyword which accepts the single value, multiple single values, single range &
multiple ranges.
Syntax of select-options: -
Select-options <name of the select-options> for <variable name>.
Ex: -
Data v1 type T001-BUKRS.
Select-options S_BUKRS for v1.
S_BUKRS to
(c,4)
Data v1 type KNA1-KUNNR.
Select-options S_KUNNR for v1.
Syntax of select-options in select query: -
Select <filed1> <filed2> ---- from <database table> into table <Internal Table> where <filed> in
<select-options>.
Based on given company codes, display the company codes, company names & cities.
Data v1 type T001-Bukrs.
Select-options S_BUKRS for v1.
Data: Begin of WA_T001,
ORT01 type T001-ORT01,
End of WA_T001.
Data IT_T001 like table of WA_T001.
Select BUKRS BUTXT ORT01 from T001 into table IT_T001 where BUKRS in
S_BUKRS.
Loop at IT_T001 into WA_T001.
Write: / WA_T001-BUKRS, WA_T001-BUTXT, WA_T001-ORT01.
Endloop.
Based on given country display the customer numbers, customer names & countries.
Data v1 type KNA1-LAND1.
Select-options S_LAND1 for v1.
Data: Begin of WA_KNA1,
KUNNR type KNA1-KUNNR,
NAME1 type KNA1-NAME1,
LAND1 type KNA1-LAND1,
End of WA_KNA1.
Data IT_KNA1 like table of WA_KNA1.
Select KUNNR NAME1 LAND1 from KNA1 into table IT_KNA1 where LAND1 in
S_LAND1.
Loop at IT_KNA1 into WA_KNA1.
Write: / WA_KNA1-KUNNR, WA_KNA1-NAME1, WA_KNA1-LAND1.
Endloop.
Syntax:-
By Mr.Sunil
Parameter <name of the parameter> type <data type>
Ex: - parameter P_BUKRS type T001-BUKRS.
P_BUKRS
Syntax of parameter in select query: -
Select <filed1> <filed2> ---- from <database table> into table <Internal Table> where filed = <parameter>
Ex: -
Select BUKRS BUTXT LAND1 from T001 into table IT_T001 where BUKRS = P_BUKRS.
Differences between parameter & select-options: -
Types of Internal Table: -

Standard
1 Indexed
Sorted
2 Hashed
Standard Internal Table: -
1. It accepts the duplicate records.
2. Here all fields are non-unique.
3. Passing data from work area to internal table is
always through Append keyword.
4. Searching of a record is linear search.
Syntax: -
Data <Internal Table> like standard table of <work area>.
Sorted Internal Table: -

1. It may or maynt accept the duplicate.
2. Here, we must specify at least one filed as unique \ non-unique.
3. Pushing data from work area to internal table is always through Insert keyword.
4. Searching of a record is Binary search
Syntax: -
Data <Internal Table> like sorted table of <work area> with unique / non-unique key <filed> ---- .
Ex: - data IT like sorted table of WA with unique key Eid.
Hashed internal table: -
1. It wont accept the duplicate records
2. Here we must specify at least one filed as unique
3. Pushing data from work area to internal table is always through Collect keyword.
4. Searching of a record is by using Hash algorithm.
Syntax: -
Data <internal table> like Hashed table of <work area> with unique / non-unique key <field1> <field2> --.
By Mr.Sunil
In the real time most of the times we use standard internal table because we are working with data of data
base table. In the data base there is no duplicate data. Some times we use Hashed internal tables.
Kind is the keyword which returns the type of internal table. If the internal table type is standard then writes
T. Sorted writes S. Hashed writes H. Lines is the keyword which returns the number of records in internal
table.
Syntax: -
Describe table <internal table> KIND <variable1> lines <variable2>

Optional Optional
By default variable is the character data type & length is 1.
Data v1.
Data v2 type i.
Data: Begin of WA_KNA1,
ORT01 type KNA1-ORT01,
End of WA_KNA1.
Data IT_KNA1 like table of WA_KNA1.
Select KUNNR NAME1 ORT01 from KNA1 into table IT_KNA1.
Describe table IT_KNA1 KIND v1 LINES v2.
Write: / v1, v2.
By default internal table is standard internal table.

MARA (Material Master table)
MATNR Material number
MTART Material type
MATKL Material group
MEINS Unit of measurement
Types of declaring Internal tables:-
1. Declaring the internal table with some of the fields from any one of the
database table:-
Syntax:-
Data: begin of <work area>,
------------
------------
By Mr.Sunil
End of <work area>.
Data <IT> like table of <work area>.
Ex: -
Data: Begin of wa_t001,
Bukrs type t001-bukrs,
Ort01 type t001-ort01,
end of wa_t001.
Data IT like table of wa_t001.
2. Declaring the internal table with all fields from any one of data base tables:
Syntax: -
Data begin of <work area>.
Include structure <data base table>.
Data end of <work area>.
Ex:-
Data begin of wa_t001.
Include structure t001.
Data end of wa_t001.
3. Declaring the internal table by referring database table: -
Syntax: -
Data <work area> like <data base table>.
Data <Internal Table> like table of <work area / database table>
Ex:-
Data wa like t001.
Data IT like table of wa.
(OR)
Data IT like table of t001.
Data wa like line of IT.
Note: - Type is used to refer the data types, data elements, fields in the table & types. Where as like is
used to refer the variable or fields in the table.
4. Declaring the internal tables by using types keyword: -

Syntax:-
Types: Begin of <type name>,
----------
----------
By Mr.Sunil
----------
End of <type name>.
Data <wa> type <table name / type name>.
(or)
Data <internal table> type table of <type name>.
Ex: -
Types: begin of ty_t001,
End of ty_t001.
Data wa_t001 type ty_t001.
Data IT type table of ty_t001.
(Or)
Note: - If you want to comment the multiple lines then select the all lines. Click on CTRL + Less
than. If you want to uncomment then select all lines, click on CTRL + Grater than.
Display the all companies & their entire fields information

* Data wa_t001 like t001.
* Data IT_t001 like table of wa_t001.
-------------------------------------------------
* Data IT_t001 like table of t001.
* Data wa_t001 like line of IT_t001.
-------------------------------------------------
Types begin of ty_t001.
Include structure t001.
Types end of ty_t001.
Data wa_t001 type ty_t001.
Data IT_t001 type table of ty_t001.
Select * from t001 into table it_t001.
Loop at IT_t001 into wa_t001.
Write: / wa_t001-bukrs, wa_t001-butxt.
Endloop.
Internal table with header line: -
By default with header line creates one work area with the name of internal table. That means the name of
the work area as well as name of the internal table as similarly.
Declaring the IT with header by using occurs keyword: -

Syntax: -
Data: begin of <internal table> occurs 0,
-------------------
------------------
------------------
By Mr.Sunil
End of <internal table>.
Ex: -
Data: begin of IT_t001 occurs 0,
End of IT_t001.
Here occurs 0 by default allocates 8 kb of memory for the internal table. If the data in the internal table
exceeds 8 kb, then itll provide one more 8 kb of memory up to 2 GB.
Occurs n: - By default it allocates n records of memory for internal table. If the data in the internal
table exceeds 10 records. Then itll be allocates one more n records of memory ---- up to 2 GB.
Declaring the internal table with header by using types keyword: -

Types: begin of <type name>.
--------
-------
End of <type name>.
Data <internal table> type table of <type name> with header line.
Ex:
End of ty_t001.
Data it_t001 type table of ty_t001 with header line.
Note: - By default tables keyword creates one work area with the name of database table name and
also it contains all the fields of data base table.
Syntax: -
Tables<database table name>.
Tables t001.
1 Append IT_t001 to t001.
2. Loop at it_t001 into t001.
Initializing techniques: -
1. Clear
2. Refresh
3. Free
Clear: - clear clears the contents of the work area & also clear is used to clear the contents of the
internal table.
By Mr.Sunil
Syntax: -
Clear <work area>
Clear <internal table>
Ex:-
Clear WA_t001.
Clear IT_t001.
If we are working with internal table with header line then the name of the
work area as well as name of the internal table is similar name. In this
case also clear clears the contents of the work area only. If you want to
clear the contents of internal table then we place open & close ([ ]) brackets to the internal table.
Ex:-
Data A type I.
Data B(5) type C.
A = 10.
B = 20.
Clear: A, B.
Write:/ A, B.
Refresh:-
Refresh always clears the contents at the internal table only.
Syntax: -
Refresh <internal table>.
Ex: - Refresh IT_t001.
Note: - If youre working with internal table with header line also refresh always clear the content of the
internal table.
Free: -
Free acts like refresh.
1. Refresh clears the contents of internal table only. Not the memory which is allocated for that.
2. Free clears the contents of the internal table as well as memory which is allocated for that.
Syntax: - Free <internal table>.
Ex: - Free IT_t001.

By Mr.Sunil
Operations on Internal Table: -
1. Pushing data from work area to internal table by using
a. Append Standard table
b. Insert Sorted table
c. Collect Hashed table
2. Reading the data from internal table
Single Record Multiple Records (Loop at)

3. Modify the data in an internal table by using modify keyword.
4. Delete the data in an internal table by using delete keyword.
5. Sort the data in an internal table by using sort keyword.
Append: - Append is the keyword to transfer the data from work area to at the last record of internal
table.
Syntax: -
Append <work area> to <internal table>.
Ex: - Append WA_t001 to IT_t001.

Insert: - Insert is the keyword to transfer the data from work area to internal table based on the key
field.
Syntax: -
Insert <work area> into table <internal table>.
Ex: -
Insert WA into table IT.
Note: - If we use insert keyword to standard internal table then it acts like append.
Collect: - Collect checks the internal table whether the record is available or not based on the key field.
If not it acts like append (record adds first). Other wise it adds the numeric fields from work area to
number field in the internal table.
Syntax: -
Collect <WA> into <IT>.
Ex: - Collect WA into IT.

Whether we are working with collect keyword then we
must declare other than numeric (data types) files are unique.
By Mr.Sunil
Reading a single record from internal table based on index
Syntax: -
Read table <internal table> into <work area> index <no>.
Ex: -
Read table IT into WA index 2.
We never use 1st condition in real time.
Reading a single record for the internal table based on condition
Syntax: -
Read table <internal table> into <work area> with key condition.
Ex: -
Read table IT into WA with key BUKRS = 2000.
OP: - 1000 IBM Chennai
Reading multiple records from the internal table based on index.
Syntax: -
Loop at <internal table> into <work area> from <index no> to <index no>.
-------
------- optional
-------
Endloop.
Ex: -
Loop at IT into WA from 2 to 3.
Write: / WA_t001-BUKRS, WA_t001-BUTXT, WA_t001-ORT01.
Endloop.
OP: - 200 IBM Chennai
300 HCL Hyderabad
Reading multiple records from the internal table based on condition
Syntax: -
Loop at <internal table> into <work area> where <condition>.
--------
--------
--------
Endloop.
Ex: -
Loop at IT_t001 into WA_t001 where ORT01 = Hyderabad.
Write: / WA_t001-BUKRS, WA_t001-BUTXT, WA_t001-ORT01.
Endloop.
OP: - 100 TCS Hyderabad
300 HCL Hyderabad
Modify the data in internal table by using modify keyword

This is 2 step procedure.
1. Fill the latest information into the work area.
By Mr.Sunil
2. Modify the index table based on work area.
Syntax:-
Modify <internal table> from <work area> transporting <field1> <field2> where <condition>.
Ex: -
WA_t001-ORT01 = BAN.
Modify IT_t001 from WA_t001 transporting ORT01 where BUKRS = 2000.
If we are maintaining all the fields information in the work area (key field)
Syntax: - Modify <internal table> from <work area>.
Delete the data from internal table by using delete keyword

Based on index: -
Syntax: -
Delete <internal table> index <index no>.
Ex: -
Delete IT_t001 index 3.
Based on condition: -
Syntax: -
Delete <internal table> where <condition>.
Ex: -
Delete IT_t001 where ORT01 = Hyderabad.
Sort the data in an internal table
Syntax: -
Sort <internal table> by <field1> <field2>.
Ex: -
Sort IT_t001 by BUKRS.
OP: -
By default sort is ascending order. If you want to descending order
Syntax: - Sort <internal table> by <field 1> descending.
Ex:- Sort IT_t001 by BUKRS descending.
Note: - Before using the delete, to delete duplicates we must sort the table based on comparing fields.
Syntax of delete adjacent duplicates: -
Delete adjacent duplicates from <internal table> comparing <filed 1> <filed 2>.
Ex: - Delete adjacent duplicates from IT comparing BUKRS.
100 TCS Hyderabad 200 IBM Chennai

100 TCS Hyderabad 100 TCS Hyderabad
100 TCS Hyderabad 300 HCL Hyderabad
200 IBM Chennai 400 HP Mumbai
After sorted 100 TCS Hyderabad
By Mr.Sunil
[email protected] 400 HP Mumbai Page 32
100 TCS Hyderabad
200 IBM Chennai
200 IBM Chennai
300 HCL Hyderabad
400 HP Mumbai
400 HP Mumbai
Transferring the data from internal table to another table which are similar structure
If the second internal table is empty
Syntax: -
<internal table 2> = <internal table 1>.
Ex: -
IT = IT_t001.
If the second internal table have data

Syntax: -
Append lines of <internal table 1> to <internal table 2>.
Ex: -
Append lines of IT_t001 to IT.
Syntax: -
Insert lines of <internal table 1> into table <internal table 2>.
Ex: -
Insert lines of IT_t001 into table IT.
Data: begin of WA,

Eid(10) type C,
Esal type I,
End of WA.
Data IT like hashed table of WA with unique key Eid.
WA-Eid = '1'.
WA-Esal = '10000'.
Collect WA into IT.
WA-Eid = '2'.
WA-Esal = '30000'.
Collect WA into IT.
WA-Eid = '4'.
WA-Esal = '60000'.
Collect WA into IT.
Loop at IT into WA.

Write: / WA-Eid, WA-Esal.
Endloop.
Uline.
WA-Eid = '3'.
By Mr.Sunil
WA-Esal = '30000'.
Collect WA into IT.
Loop at IT into Wa.

Write: / WA-Eid, WA-Esal.
Endloop.
Types: begin of ty,

Eid(10) type C,
Ename(25) type C,
End of ty.
Data WA type ty.
Data IT like sorted table of WA with unique key Eid.
WA-Eid = '1'.
WA-Ename = 'Vidya'.
WA-Eid = '3'.
WA-Ename = 'Latha'.
Loop at IT into WA.
Write : / WA-Eid, WA-Ename.
Endloop.
Uline.
WA-Eid = '2'.
WA-Ename = 'Satiah'.
Loop at IT into WA.
Write: / WA-Eid, WA-Ename.
Endloop.
Based on the employee, salary internal table data display the Eid, Ename and Esal.
Data: begin of WA_Emp,
Eid(10) type C,
Ename(25) type C,
End of WA_Emp.
Data IT_Emp like table of WA_Emp.

Data: begin of WA_Sal,
Eid(10) type C,
Esal(10) type C,
End of WA_Sal.
Data IT_Sal like table of WA_sal.
Data: begin of WA,

Eid(10) type C,
Ename(25) type C,
Esal(10) type C,
End of WA.
By Mr.Sunil
* filling the employee information
WA_Emp-Eid = '1'.
WA_Emp-Ename = 'Vidya'.
Append WA_Emp to IT_Emp.
WA_Emp-Eid = '2'.
WA_Emp-Ename = 'Satish'.
WA_Emp-Eid = '3'.
WA_Emp-Ename = 'Latha'.
WA_Emp-Eid = '4'.
WA_Emp-Ename = 'Sanjay'.
Loop at IT_Emp into WA_Emp.

Write: / WA_Emp-Eid, WA_Emp-Ename.
Endloop.
Uline.
* Filling the data salary internal table
WA_Sal-Eid = '2'.
WA_Sal-Esal = '20000'.
Append WA_Sal to IT_Sal.
WA_Sal-Eid = '3'.
WA_Sal-Eid = '4'.
WA_Sal-Eid = '1'.
Loop at IT_Sal into WA_Sal.

Write: / WA_Sal-Eid, WA_Sal-Esal.
Endloop.
Uline.
* Based on emp and salary table fill the final table
Loop at IT_Emp into WA_Emp.
WA-Eid = WA_Emp-Eid.
WA-Ename = WA_Emp-Ename.
Read table IT_Sal into WA_Sal with key Eid = WA_Emp-Eid.
WA-Esal = WA_Sal-Esal.
Append WA to IT.
Clear WA.
Endloop.
By Mr.Sunil
Loop at IT into WA.
Write: / WA-Eid, WA-Ename, WA-Esal.
Endloop.
Update the rank field in the student internal table based on rank internal table
data.
Data: begin of WA_Stu,
Sid(5) type C,
Sname(25) type C,
Srank(5) type C,
End of WA_Stu.
Data IT_Stu like table of WA_Stu.
Data: begin of WA_rank,
Sid(5) type C,
Srank(5) type C,
End of WA_rank.
Data IT_rank like table of WA_rank.
* Filling the student internal table
WA_Stu-Sid = '1'.
WA_Stu-Sname = 'Vidya'.
Append WA_Stu to IT_Stu.
WA_Stu-Sid = '2'.
WA_Stu-Sname = 'Satish'.
WA_Stu-Sid = '3'.
WA_Stu-Sname = 'Latha'.
WA_Stu-Sid = '4'.
WA_Stu-Sname = 'Sharadha'.
Loop at IT_Stu into WA_Stu.

Write: / WA_Stu-Sid, WA_Stu-Sname, WA_Stu-Srank.
Endloop.
Uline.
* Filing the rank internal table
WA_rank-Sid = '4'.
WA_rank-Srank = '3'.
Append WA_rank to IT_rank.
WA_rank-Sid = '3'.
WA_rank-Sid = '1'.
WA_rank-Sid = '2'.
By Mr.Sunil
Loop at IT_rank into WA_rank.
Write: / WA_rank-Sid, WA_rank-Srank.
Endloop.
Uline.
* Modify student rank with rank internal table data.

Read table IT_rank into WA_rank with key
Sid = WA_Stu-Sid.
WA_Stu-Srank = WA_rank-Srank.
Modify IT_Stu from WA_Stu.
Endloop.
* Display
Write: / WA_Stu-Sid, WA_Stu-Sname, WA_Stu-Srank.
Endloop.
Search Help: -
Search help is used to provide the list of possible values to the input variable. There are two types
of search helps. 1. Elementary search help 2. Collective search help.
This is two step procedure.
1. Create the search help
2. Attach the search help to data element.
Create the elementary search help to identify the company code based on the company name.
Steps to create elementary search help: -
Execute SE11. Select the radio button search help. Provide the search help name (zsashi1). Click on
create. Click on enter. Provide short description. Provide the selection method is table name (T001).
Provide the hot key as any name. Enter. Provide search help parameter.
Search help parameter IMP EXP LPOS SPOS
BUKRS 1 1
BUTXT 2 2
Save, check, activate the search help.
Steps to attach the search help to data elementary: -
Execute SE11. Select the radio button data type. Provide the data element name (ZENT_9_BUKRS).
Click on create. Enter. Provide short description. Provide domain name [(zbukrs) (4, char)]. Click on
further characteristics tab. Provide the search help name (zsashi1), parameter (BUKRS). Save, check,
activate.
Execute SE38.
Parameter P_BUKRS type ZENT_9_BUKRS.
Save, check, activate, execute.
LFB1 (Vendors under company): -

BUKRS Company code
LIFNR Vendor number
AKONT Recon Account.
Collective search help: - Collective search help is the collection of elementary search help.
By Mr.Sunil
Create the collective search help to identify the company code based on company name &
identify the company code based on vendor number.
Execute SE11. Select the radio button search help. Provide the collective search help name (zsashi3).
Click on create. Select the radio button collective search help. Enter. Provide short description. Provide
the search help parameter (BUKRS) & data element (BUKRS). Import, export, click on include search
help tab. Provide the all the elementary search helps. Select the each element search help. Click on
parameter assignment. Click on yes. Enter. Save, check, activate the collective search help.
Steps to create data element for collective search help: -
Execute SE11. Select the radio button data type. Provide the data element name. Click on create. Enter.
Provide short description. Provide the domain name. Click on characteristic tab. Provide the collective
search help name, parameter. Save, check, activate.
Execute /OSE38.
Parameter P_BUKRS type ZENT_9_BUKRS.
Hot key: -
The Hot key permits the user to select an elementary search help from the collective search help directly
in the input field with the short notation.
After executing the program we provide the input as equal to hot key (=A) & click on F4. Then we
get the elementary search help, which contains the specified hot key as default.
Letters & digits are allowed as a hot key.
Lock Objects: -
Lock object is used to avoid the concurrent access of multiple users on the same data base. When ever we
create & activate the lock object it generates two function modules. 1. Enqueue (locking) 2. Dequeue
(unlock). The lock object name must be start with EZ or EY.
Steps to create lock object: -

Execute SE11. Select the radio button lock object. Provide the lock object name. Click on create. Provide
short description. Click on tables tab. Provide the table name (T001). Select the lock mode as read lock.
Save, check, activate. In the menu bar click on go to lock modules. Identify the functional modules.
(ENQUEUE lock object name, DEQUEUE Lock object name).
Types of lock modules: -

Write lock (or) exclusive lock: -
The locked data can be read or processed by one user only.
Read lock (or) shared lock: -
Several users can read the same data at the same time but only one user can edit the data.
Exclusive not cumulative lock: -
Several users can access the same data as well as update the same data.
By Mr.Sunil
Buffering: -
Buffering is the temporary place in the application server. When ever we execute any object then the
system goes to application server and check the required data is available or not in buffer area. If the data
is available then it gets from buffer area & displays it. If the data isnt available in the buffer area then it
goes to data base & picks the data from data base server & placed into buffer area & displays it.
Note: - Buffering is always available in the technical setting of a table.
Types of buffering: -
Single record buffering: -
In this kind of buffering the selected data will be stored into buffered area.
Generic area buffering: -
In this kind of buffering the key information stored in the buffered area.
Fully buffered: -
In this type of buffering the entire data of database is load into the buffering.
Note: - If you want to display the data in a single line then you must provide the
line-size.
Ex: - Report <Report name> Line-size 1023.
MAKT (Material Description table)

SPRAS Language
MAKTX Material Description
EKKO (Purchasing document number table): -

EBELN Purchasing document number
BEDAT Document date
LIFNR Vendor number
BUKRS Company code
BSART Document type.
T001 (Plant description table): -
By Mr.Sunil
WERKS Plant number
NAME1 Plant name
EKPO (Purchasing document item table): -

EBELP Item number
MENGE Quantity
MEINS Unit of measurement
NETPR Net price
MARC (Material & Plant table): -

MATNR Material umber
WERKS Plant number
MARD (Material, Plant storage location): -

WERKS Plant number
LGORT Storage location
T001L (Storage location description table): -

WERKS Plant number
LGORT Storage location
LGOBE Storage location description
By Mr.Sunil
By Mr.Sunil
TMG (Table Maintaince Generator)
Table Maintaince Generator is used to insert, update and delete the data of data base table with out any
code (with out DML Commands). Table Maintaince Generator is only possible for custom tables. The
transaction code for TMG is SM30.
Steps to create Table Maintaince Generator: -

Execute SE11. Select the radio button data base table. Provide the data base table name for which table we
want to create the TMG. Click on change. In the menu bar click on utilities Table Maintaince
Generator. Select the authorization group which is provided by BASIS people. Provide the function group
as table name. Select the Maintaince type is one step or two step.
Provide the screen number (any number). Click on create. Save in our own package. Click on save, back,
active.
Steps to maintain the data by using TMG: -

Execute SM30. Provide table or view name as our table name (ZHAI11). Click on maintain. Enter. And
perform the operations of the data (insert, update, delete).
Steps to create transaction code for the table or TMG: -

Execute SE93. Provide the transaction code as same table name. Click on create. Provide short
description. Select the radio button transaction with parameter. Provide transaction (SM30). Select the
check box skip initial screen. Select the GUI check boxes. Provide the default values.
Name of the screen field value

Update X
Click on save.
Now we execute this table name as a transaction code then we get the screen and perform the operations.
There are two types of Maintaince. One step and two step.
One Step Maintaince: -

It means both maintaining the data and display the data in a single screen.
Two step Maintaince: -

It means maintain the data in one screen and display the data in some other screen.
Some of the events in TMG

1. Before saving the data in the data base
2. After saving the data in the data base.
3. Before deleting the data display
4. After deleting the data display.
5. Creating a new entry
Steps to implement the events in TMG: -

Execute SE11. Open the table in change mode. In the menu bar click on utilities Table Maintaince
Generator. In the menu bar click on environment modification events. Enter. Click on new entries in
the application tool bar. Select the event. Provide the form name. click on save. Click on editor. Enter.
Implement the code in between form end form. Save, check, activate. Back, save, back.
By Mr.Sunil
Table type: - Table type is the collection of structure records or structure fields by using table type we
declare the internal table in the ABAP editor. Creation table type is two step procedures. 1. Create the
structure, 2. Create the table type based on the structure.
Create the table type with BUKRS BUTXT ORT01

Steps to create the structure: -
Execute SE11. Select the radio button data type. Provide the structure name. click on create. Select the
radio button structure. Enter. Provide short description. Provide the component, component type.
BUKRS BUKRS
BUTXT BUTXT
ORT01 ORT01
Save, check, activate.
Steps to create table type based on the structure: -

Execute SE11. Select the radio button data type. Provide the table type name. click on create. Select the
radio button table type. Enter. Provide short description. Provide line type as structure name. Enter. Save,
check, activate the table type.
Data it_t001 type zhai11.
Data wa_t001 like line of it_t001.
Select bukrs butxt ort01 from t001 into table it_t001.
Loop at it_t001 into wa_t001.
Write: / wa_t001-bukrs, wa_t001-butxt, wa_t001-ort01.
Endloop.
By Mr.Sunil
Views: -
Each application has its own data base tables. If you want to display the part of data from each table then
we pick the data from each table & merge the data & display the data. If its regular activity then its
better to create a view.
Views are logical databases. It doesnt contain the data permanently. At run time only view
contains the data.
There are 4 types of views.

1. Projection view
2. Data base view
3. Help view
4. Maintenance view
Projection view: -
If you want to display the part of data from single database table, if its a regular activity then its better to
create projection view.
Projection view is always involving single database table.
Steps to create projection view: -

Execute SE11. Select the radio button view. Provide the projection view name. Click on create. Select the
radio button projection view. Enter. Provide short description. Provide the basis table. Click on table fields
button. Select the required fields check box. Enter. Save, check, activate.
Ex: -
Select BUKRS BUTXT ORT01 from ZENT_9AM_PV into table IT_T001.
Note: - Fetching the data from view is faster than fetching the data from database table.
Data base view: -

If you want to display the data from more than one table then we pick the data from each table & merge it
& display it. If its a regular activity, then its better to create database table. Database view is always
involved with more than one table.
Create the database view with BUKRS BUTXT LIFNR
Steps to create database view: -
By Mr.Sunil
Execute SE11. Select the radio button view. Provide the data base view name. Click on create. Enter.
Provide short description. Provide the related tables in left table. Select all tables. Click on relationships.
Select the check box. Enter. Click on view fields tab. Click on table fields button. Select the each table.
Click on choose. Select the required fields. Enter. Save, check, activate.
Ex: -
Select BUKRS BUTXT LIFNR from ZENT_9AM_DV into table IT_Final.
Database view picks the data from both the tables. If and only if there is one or more entries is available in
the right hand side table with corresponding left hand side table.
Help view: -
Help view pick the data from left hand side table. Even though there is no match in the right hand side
table.
Help view always involve in two
data base tables.
Note: - Data base view & help

views are used in selection method
of elementary search.
Steps to create the help

view: -
Execute SE11. Select the radio
button view. Provide the help view
name. Click on create. Select the
radio button help view. Enter.
Provide short description. Provide
the initial table. Click on
By Mr.Sunil
relationships button. Select the required table check box. Enter. Click on view fields tab. Click on
table fields. Select the each table. Click on choose. Select the required fields. Enter. Save, check,
activate.
Control break statement / event in internal table: -
Control break statements are work with in the loop at internal table. Before using the control break
statements. We must sort the internal table based on At new field. Control break statements are 1> At First
2> At New <field name> 3> At End of <field name> 4> At last
Each control break statement ends with Endat.
AT FIRST: -
This is an event which is triggered at the first record of internal table.
Advantage: - This is used to display the header information for internal table.
AT NEW <field name>: -
Its an event which is triggered at the first record of each block.
Advantage: - Its used to display the individual fields.
AT END OF <field name>: -
This is used to display at the last record of each block.
Advantage: -This is used to display the sub total.
AT LAST: -
This is an event which is triggered at the last record of internal table.
Advantage: - Its used to display the grand total.
Based on the given purchasing document numbers display the purchasing item details as shown in the
figure.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - When ever we are working with at new & at end of the right side fields of mention field values
display as stars if its a character data type & displayed as zeros if its a numeric data type.
DATA V1 TYPE EKKO-EBELN.
SELECT-OPTIONS S_EBELN FOR V1.
DATA: V2 TYPE EKPO-NETPR, V3 TYPE EKPO-NETPR.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_EKPO,
EBELN TYPE EKPO-EBELN,
EBELP TYPE EKPO-EBELP,
MENGE TYPE EKPO-MENGE,
MEINS TYPE EKPO-MEINS,
NETPR TYPE EKPO-NETPR,
END OF TY_EKPO.
DATA WA_EKPO TYPE TY_EKPO.
DATA IT_EKPO TYPE TABLE OF TY_EKPO.
DATA WA LIKE WA_EKPO.
SELECT EBELN EBELP MENGE MEINS NETPR FROM EKPO INTO TABLE IT_EKPO WHERE
EBELN IN S_EBELN.
SORT IT_EKPO BY EBELN.
LOOP AT IT_EKPO INTO WA_EKPO.
WA = WA_EKPO.
AT FIRST.
WRITE / 'THESE ARE PO DETAILS'.
ENDAT.
AT NEW EBELN.
WRITE: / WA_EKPO-EBELN, WA-EBELP, WA-MENGE.
ENDAT.
WRITE: / WA_EKPO-EBELP, WA_EKPO-MENGE, WA_EKPO-MEINS,
WA_EKPO-NETPR.
V2 = V2 + WA_EKPO-NETPR.
AT END OF EBELN.
WRITE: / 'SUB TOTAL', V2.
CLEAR V2.
ENDAT.
AT LAST.
WRITE:/ 'GRAND TOTAL', V3.
ENDAT.
ENDLOOP.
Working with ON CHANGE OF: -
Ex: -
Loop at IT_EKPO into WA_EKPO.
ON CHANGE OF WA_EKPO-EBELN.
By Mr.Sunil
Write:/ WA_EKPO-EBELN, WA_EKPO-EBELP, WA_EKPO-MENGE.
Endon.
Endloop.
Differences between AT NEW, ON CHANGE OF
Note: - Now a days ON CHANGE OF is out dated (Dont use).

If you want to remove the title in the output, then you must provide NO STANDARD PAGE
HEADING in the name of the report.
SY_ULINE is the system variable which is used to draw the horizontal line. SY_VLINE is the system
variable which is used to draw the vertical line.
DATA V1 TYPE T001-BUKRS.

SELECT-OPTIONS S_BUKRS FOR V1.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_T001,
BUKRS TYPE T001-BUKRS,
BUTXT TYPE T001-BUTXT,
ORT01 TYPE T001-ORT01,
END OF TY_T001.
DATA WA_T001 TYPE TY_T001.
DATA IT_T001 TYPE TABLE OF TY_T001.
SELECT BUKRS BUTXT ORT01 FROM T001 INTO TABLE IT_T001 WHERE BUKRS IN
S_BUKRS.
WRITE SY-ULINE(57).
WRITE: / SY-VLINE, 2 'COCD' COLOR 5, 6 SY-VLINE, 7 'COMPANY NAME'
COLOR 5, 32 SY-VLINE, 33 'COMPANY CITY' COLOR 5, 57 SY-VLINE.
WRITE / SY-ULINE(57).
LOOP AT IT_T001 INTO WA_T001.
WRITE: / SY-VLINE, 2 WA_T001-BUKRS, 6 SY-VLINE, 7 WA_T001-BUTXT,
32 SY-VLINE, 33 WA_T001-ORT01, 57 SY-VLINE.
WRITE / SY-ULINE(57).
ENDLOOP.
By Mr.Sunil
Continue: -
The continue statement only used in loops if its used the current loop pass is ended immediately & the
program flow is continues.
Based on the given purchasing document numbers, display the item numbers, quantity, units of
measurements & price if the amount is more than 20 by using continue statement.
Ex: -
If WA_EKPO-NETPR < 20.
Continue.
Endif.
Write:/ WA_EKPO-EBELN, WA_EKPO-EBELP, WA_EKPO-MENGE, WA_EKPO-MEINS,
WA_EKPO-NETPR.
Endloop.
Exit: -
Exit statement is used in within a loop. It leaves the loop by ending the current loop process.
By Mr.Sunil
Based on the given purchasing document numbers to display the first 5 item details by using exit
command
Select EBELN EBELP MENGE MEINS NETPR from EKPO into IT_EKPO where EBELN in
S_EBELN.
Write:/ WA_EKPO-EBELP, WA_EKPO-EBELN, WA_EKPO-MENGE, WA_EKPO-MEINS,
WA_EKPO-NETPR.
V2 = V2 + 1.
IF V2 = 5.
Exit.
Endif.
Endloop.
Check: -
Check statement is used to terminate the sub routine conditional.
Stop:-
This is used in at selection-screen & start-of-selection events. This is used to stop the process of these
event code.
Note: - Insert, update, modify a single record into the data base
table is always through work area & multiple records through
internal table.
Note: - When ever we are working with data base tables then we
must maintain the structure of the work area as well as structure of
the internal table must be the similar structure of data base table.
Data base tables Key fields

T001 BUKRS
KNA1 KUNNR
LFA1 LIFNR
KNB1 KUNNR, BUKRS
LFB1 LIFNR, BUKRS
MARA MATNR
MAKT MATNR, SPRAS
EKKO EBELN
EKPO EBELN, EBELP
MARC MATNR, WERKS
By Mr.Sunil
MARD MATNR, WERKS, LGORT
T001W WERKS
T001L WORKS, LGORT
VBAK VBELN
VBAP VBELN, POSNR
Insert (single record): -
Inset inserts a record into the data base table based on the key field if there is no match found in the data
base. Other wise it ignores the record.
Syntax: -
Insert <data base table> from <work area>.
Note: - SY-SUBRC is the system variable which contains zero with the above statement executed
successfully otherwise it contains non zero. Most of the times it contains 4.
Data wa_T001 like T001.
WA_T001-BUKRS = '0786'.
WA_T001-BUTXT = 'SATISH INFO'.
WA_T001-ORT01 = 'HYD'.
WA_T001-LAND1 = 'IN'.
Insert T001 from WA_T001.
If SY-SUBRC = 0.
Write 'Inserted'.
Else.
Write 'Not inserted'.
Endif.
Insert (Multiple records): -

Insert inserts multiple records from internal table to data base table if there is no match found in the data
base for all the records of internal table based on the key field. If at least one record is matched then it
simply ignores the all records of internal table as well as terminates the entire transaction.
Syntax: -
Insert <data base table> from table <internal table>.
Data: WA_T001 LIKE T001,

IT_T001 LIKE TABLE OF WA_T001.
WA_T001-BUKRS = '0888'.
WA_T001-BUTXT = 'SATISH TECH'.
WA_T001-ORT01 = 'HYD'.
Append WA_T001 to IT_T001.
Clear WA_T001.
WA_T001-BUKRS = '0999'.
WA_T001-BUTXT = 'DHAWAN TECH'.
WA_T001-ORT01 = 'CHE'.
Clear WA_T001.
WA_T001-BUKRS = '0777'.
WA_T001-BUTXT = 'DHAWAN INFO'.
WA_T001-ORT01 = 'BAN'.
By Mr.Sunil
Clear WA_T001.
Insert T001 from table IT_T001.
Here 0777 company already exists in the data base. So it ignores all other records in internal table as
well as it terminates the entire transaction.
If you want avoid the termination of the program then you must place accepting duplicate keys in
the syntax of inserting.
Syntax:-
Insert <data base table> from table <internal table> accepting duplicate keys.
The above syntax avoids the termination of the program as well as inserts the non duplicate
records & ignores the duplicate records.
Note: - SY-DBCNT is the system variable which contains the number of records as successfully
processed into the data base.
Ex: -
Insert T001 from table IT_T001 accepting duplicate keys.
Write SY-DBCNT.
Here 0888 & 0999 companies are inserted & 0777 is ignored.
Update (single record) / over write: -
Update updates a record into the data base table if there is a match found into the data base base on the
key field. Otherwise it ignores the record.
Syntax: -
Update <data base table> from <work area>.
Note: - when ever we are working with update then we must maintain change field information & also
non change field information. Other wise non change field information may be lost.
Ex: -
Data WA_T001 like T001.
WA_T001-BUKRS = '0777'.
WA_T001-BUTXT = 'SATISH INFO'.
Update T001 from WA_T001.
If SY-SUBRC = 0.
Write 'UPDATED'.
Else.
Write 'NOT UPDATED'.
Endif.
Update (Multiple records): -
This functionality is similar as update single record functionality.
Syntax:-
Update <data base table> from table <internal table>.
Update particular record: -
By Mr.Sunil
Syntax: -
Update <data base table> set <field 1> = <value 1> <field 2> = <value 2> .. where <condition>
Ex: -
Update T001 set ORT01 = 'MUM' LAND1 = 'IN' where BUKRS = '0777'.
If SY-SUBRC = 0.
Write 'updated'.
Else.
Write 'not updated'.
Endif.
Note: - Modify acts like update if there is a match found in data base based on the key field otherwise it
acts like insert. Modify never failed.
Syntax: -
Modify <data base table> from <work area>.
Modify <data base table> from table <internal table>.
Data: WA like T001,

IT like table of WA.
WA-BUKRS = '0786'.
WA-BUTXT = 'ENRICH TECH'.
WA-ORT01 = 'CHE'.
Append WA to IT.
Clear WA.
WA-BUKRS = '0787'.
WA-BUTXT = 'ENRICH INFO'.
WA-ORT01 = 'BAN'.
Append WA to IT.
Clear WA.
Modify T001 from table IT.
In this example 0786 company already exist in the data base. So it acts like update or over write &
0787 company details arent available in data base. So it acts as insert.
Delete: -
Delete deletes the data from data base based on condition.
Syntax: -
Delete from <data base table> where <condition>.
Ex: -
Delete from T001 where BUKRS = '0787'.
If SY-SUBRC = 0.
Write 'deleted'.
Else.
Write 'not deleted'.
Endif.
By Mr.Sunil
Commit work: -
This command is used to commit the data base changes.
Ex: -
Delete from T001 where BUKRS = 0786.
Commit work.
Rollback work: -
This command is used to reverse the data base changes.
Ex: -
Delete from T001 where BUKRS = 0787.
Rollback work.
By Mr.Sunil
Joins
Joins are used to fetch the data from more than one table. There are two types of joins.
1. Inner join
2. Left outer join
Inner join: -
Inner join pick the data from both the tables if & only if there is one or more than one entry is available in
the right hand side table with corresponding left hand side table.
Syntax: -
Select <data base table 1> ~ <field 1> <data base table 1> ~ <field 2> -------
<data base table 2> ~ <field 1> <data base table 2> ~ <field 2> --------
| |
| |
Where <condition>.
Note: - The link field must be primary fields in at least one data base table.
Display the company codes, company names & vendor numbers of the company details by using
inner join.
TYPES: Begin of TY_FINAL,

BUKRS Type T001-BUKRS, T001 LFB1
BUTXT Type T001-BUTXT, BUKRS BUKRS
LIFNR Type LFB1-LIFNR, BUTXT LIFNR
End of TY_FINAL.
DATA: WA_FINAL TYPE TY_FINAL,
IT_FINAL TYPE TABLE OF TY_FINAL.
Select T001~BUKRS T001~BUTXT LFB1~LIFNR
By Mr.Sunil
into table IT_FINAL
from T001 inner join LFB1
on T001~BUKRS = LFB1~BUKRS.
Sort IT_FINAL by BUKRS.
Loop at IT_FINAL into WA_FINAL.
Write:/ WA_FINAL-BUKRS, WA_FINAL-BUTXT, WA_FINAL-LIFNR.
ENDLOOP.
Based on the given purchasing document numbers display the purchasing document numbers,
document dates, vendor numbers, item numbers, quantity, unit of measurements & net price.
Data V1 type EKKO-EBELN. EKKO EKPO

Select-options S_ebeln for V1. EBELN EBELN
Types: Begin of ty_final, BEDAT EBELP
EBELN type EKKO-EBELN, LIFNR MENGE
BEDAT type EKKO-BEDAT, MEINS
LIFNR type EKKO-LIFNR, NETPR
EBELP type EKPO-EBELP,
MENGE type EKPO-MENGE,
MEINS type EKPO-MEINS,
NETPR type EKPO-NETPR,
End of ty_final.
Data: wa_final type ty_final,
it_final type table of ty_final.
Select EKKO~EBELN EKKO~BEDAT EKKO~LIFNR EKPO~EBELP EKPO~MENGE
EKPO~MEINS EKPO~NETPR into table it_final from EKKO inner join EKPO on
EKKO~EBELN = EKPO~EBELN where EKKO~EBELN in S_ebeln.
Loop at it_final into wa_final.
Write:/ wa_final-ebeln, wa_final-bedat, wa_final-lifnr, wa_final-
ebelp, wa_final-menge, wa_final-meins, wa_final-netpr.
Endloop.
Based on the given material numbers display the material numbers, material types, plant
numbers, plant names by using inner join.
Data V1 type MARA-MATNR.
Select-options s_matnr for V1.
Types: begin of ty_final,
MATNR type MARA-MATNR,
MTART type MARA-MTART,
WERKS type MARC-WERKS,
NAME1 type T001W-NAME1,
End of ty_final.
Select MARA~MATNR MARA~MTART MARC~WERKS T001W~NAME1 into table it_final
from MARA inner join MARC on MARA~MATNR = MARC~MATNR inner join T001W
on MARC~WERKS = T001W~WERKS where MARA~MATNR in S_matnr.
By Mr.Sunil
Write:/ wa_final-MATNR, wa_final-MTART, wa_final-WERKS, wa_final-
NAME1.
Endloop.
Based on the given customer numbers display the customer numbers, customer names,
sales document numbers, document date, item number, material number, material description,
quantity, unit of measurement, net price by using inner join.
Data V1 type KNA1-kunnr.
Select-options s_kunnr for V1.
Types: begin of ty_final,
VBELN type VBAK-VBELN,
AUDAT type VBAK-AUDAT,
POSNR type VBAP-POSNR,
MATNR type VBAP-MATNR,
MAKTX type MAKT-MAKTX,
KWMENG type VBAP-KWMENG,
MEINS type VBAP-MEINS,
NETWR TYPE VBAP-NETWR,
End of ty_final.
Select KNA1~KUNNR KNA1~NAME1 VBAK~VBELN VBAK~AUDAT VBAP~POSNR
VBAP~MATNR MAKT~MAKTX VBAP~KWMENG VBAP~MEINS VBAP~NETWR into table
it_final from KNA1 inner join VBAK on KNA1~KUNNR = VBAK~KUNNR inner
join VBAP on VBAK~VBELN = VBAP~VBELN inner join MAKT on VBAP~MATNR =
MAKT~MATNR where KNA1~KUNNR in s_kunnr.
Write:/ wa_final-KUNNR, wa_final-NAME1, wa_final-VBELN, wa_final-
AUDAT, wa_final-POSNR, wa_final-MATNR, wa_final-MAKTX, wa_final-KWMENG,
wa_final-MEINS, wa_final-NETWR.
Endloop.
Left outer join: -

Left outer join pick the data from left hand side table even
though there is no match found in right hand side table. Its
possible for only two data base tables.
In the inner join syntax instead of inner join we paste

the left outer join.
Based on the given company codes display the

company codes, company names & customer number based on left outer join.
TYPES : Begin of TY_FINAL,
BUKRS Type T001-BUKRS,
By Mr.Sunil
BUTXT Type T001-BUTXT,
KUNNR Type KNB1-KUNNR,
End of TY_FINAL.
Select T001~BUKRS T001~BUTXT KNB1~KUNNR
into table IT_FINAL
from T001 left outer join KNB1
on T001~BUKRS = KNB1~BUKRS.
Sort IT_FINAL by BUKRS.
Write:/ WA_FINAL-BUKRS, WA_FINAL-BUTXT, WA_FINAL-KUNNR.
Endloop.
After implementation
After no of years rotation time
10 days 5*6 20ms
1 year 10*200 2min
2 years 20*5000 4min
4 years 50*200000 6min
6 years 70*800000 11min
In the real time the maximum program execution time in four grounds [when you press F8 its called four
ground] 600 seconds are max time. In the program execution time exceeds 600 seconds then it goes to
dump [time up]. Some times more than two tables join leads to time out. So we go for for all entries.
For all entries pick the data based on the where condition first, next it based on on-condition.
At the time of implementing the SAP performance of the inner join & For all entries are same. Day by
day, day by day the data base sizes are increased then the performance of the inner join is decreased the
For all entries is same. So we go for For all entries.
Note: - Inner join isnt possible for pooled & clustered tables. Only possible for transparent tables.
Based on the given company codes display the company codes, company names & customers
under the company based on for all entries.
Data V1 type T001-BUKRS.
Select-options s_bukrs for V1.
Types : begin of ty_final,
By Mr.Sunil
KUNNR type KNB1-KUNNR,
End of ty_final.

End of ty_t001.
Data : wa_t001 type ty_t001,
it_t001 type table of ty_t001.
Types: begin of ty_knb1,
BUKRS type KNB1-BUKRS,
KUNNR type KNB1-KUNNR,
End of ty_knb1.
Data: wa_knb1 type ty_knb1,
it_knb1 type table of ty_knb1.
Select BUKRS BUTXT from T001 into table it_t001 where BUKRS in s_bukrs.
If not it_t001 is initial.
Select BUKRS KUNNR from KNB1 into table it_knb1 for all entries in
it_t001 where BUKRS = it_t001-BUKRS.
Endif.
Loop at it_knb1 into wa_knb1.

wa_final-BUKRS = wa_knb1-BUKRS.
wa_final-KUNNR = wa_knb1-KUNNR.
Read table it_t001 into wa_t001 with key BUKRS = wa_knb1-BUKRS.
wa_final-BUTXT = wa_t001-BUTXT.
Append wa_final to it_final.
Clear: wa_final, wa_t001, wa_knb1.
Endloop.
Sort it_final by BUKRS.

Write:/ wa_final-BUKRS, wa_final-BUTXT, wa_final-KUNNR.
Endloop.
Based on the given material numbers display the material numbers, material types, plant
numbers, and plant names by using for all entries.
Data V1 type MARA-MATNR.
Select-options S_MATNR for V1.
types: begin of ty_mara,
matnr type mara-matnr,
mtart type mara-mtart,
end of ty_mara.
data: wa_mara type ty_mara,
By Mr.Sunil
it_mara type table of ty_mara.
types: begin of ty_marc,
matnr type marc-matnr,
werks type marc-werks,
end of ty_marc.
data: wa_marc type ty_marc,
it_marc type table of ty_marc.
types: begin of ty_t001w,
werks type t001w-werks,
name1 type t001w-name1,
end of ty_t001w.
data: wa_t001w type ty_t001w,
it_t001w type table of ty_t001w.
types: begin of ty_final,
matnr type mara-matnr,
mtart type mara-mtart,
werks type marc-werks,
name1 type t001w-name1,
end of ty_final.
data: wa_final type ty_final,
Select MATNR MTART from MARA into table IT_MARA where MATNR in S_MATNR.
If not IT_MARA is initial.

Select MATNR WERKS from MARC into table IT_MARC for all entries in
IT_MARA where MATNR = IT_MARA-MATNR.
Endif.
If not IT_MARC is initial.

Select WERKS NAME1 from T001W into table IT_T001W for all entries in
IT_MARC where WERKS = IT_MARC-WERKS.
Endif.
Loop at IT_MARC into WA_MARC.
WA_FINAL-MATNR = WA_MARC-MATNR.
WA_FINAL-WERKS = WA_MARC-WERKS.
Read table IT_MARA into WA_MARA with key MATNR = WA_MARC-MATNR.

WA_FINAL-MTART = WA_MARA-MTART.
Read table IT_T001W INTO WA_T001W with key WERKS = WA_MARC-WERKS.
WA_FINAL-NAME1 = WA_T001W-NAME1.
Append WA_FINAL to IT_FINAL.

Clear: WA_FINAL, WA_MARA, WA_MARC, WA_T001W.
Endloop.
Write: / WA_FINAL-MATNR, WA_FINAL-MTART, WA_FINAL-WERKS, WA_FINAL-
NAME1.
Endloop.
By Mr.Sunil
Steps to work for all entries:-
1. Declare one final data internal table which data we want to display & also declare one work area &
internal table for each participated data base table.
2. Based on the given input we will fetch the data from data base & filled into data base internal
table.
3. Based on the data base internal table data we fill the final internal table data.
Procedure to fill the final internal table: -

First we identify the number of primary keys in each participated data base table. If the number of primary
keys are 1 that is read. If the number of primary keys is more than 1 that is loop. Loop the many
primary keys data base internal table & read the single primary key internal table & populate the final
internal table.
Note: - when ever we are working with for all entries then you must consider higher level internal table
having the data. Suppose if youre not consider & higher level internal table having no data. Then itll
pick the entire data from next level.
* if not IT_T001 is initial.

Select BUKRS KUNNR from KNB1 into table IT_KNB1 for all entries in IT_T001 where BUKRS =
IT_T001-BUKRS.
* endif.
Suppose IT_T001 internal table having no data then itll fetch entire data from KNB1 data base table &
placed into IT_KNB1.
Based on the given vendor numbers

display the vendor numbers vendor
names, purchasing document numbers,
document date, item number, quantity,
unit of measurement & net price by
using for all entries.
If not VBAP is initial.
Select MATNR MAKTX from MAKT
into table IT_MAKT for all entries in
IT_VBAP where MATNR = IT_VBAP-
MATNR and SPRAS = SY-LANGU.
By Mr.Sunil
Modularization techniques:
Modularization techniques are used to divide the business processing logic into reusable block of
statements. This is two steps procedure. 1. Define the reusable block, 2. Calling the reusable block.
2 types of modularization techniques
Source code modularizing technique Functionality modularizing technique
Include Macros Subroutine Function module
Include: -
We cant execute an include independently where as the same include program can be include to any
number of executable programs. Include programs are used to improve the readability of the program. In
the real time include programs are used to maintain the all declarations of the program.
---------
---------
---------
Steps to create include: -

Execute SE38. Provide the include program name. Click on create. Provide title. Select the type is
Include program. Click on save, local object.
Ex: -
Butxt type t001-butxt,
End of ty_t001.
Data: wa_t001 type ty_t001,
Save, check, Activate it.
Syntax of calling the include program: -
Include <include program name>.
Ex: -
Include ZWASTE101.
Write: wa_t001-bukrs, wa_t001-ort01, wa_t001-butxt.
Endloop.
Macros: -
By Mr.Sunil
Macros are used to perform the arithmetical operations. Macros can take up to 9 place holders. (&1, &2, --
- &9). If you want to maintain the same set of statements more than one location of the same program
instead of this we maintain those statements in macro definition later we call the same macro definition
from different locations of the same program.
Syntax of calling the macro: -
<macro name> <place holder1 value> <place holder 2 value>.
Note: - In macros definition should be the first and calling should be the next.
Perform the addition of two numbers by using macros.
Manually filling the internal table by using macros.

End of ty_t001.
Data: wa_t001 type ty_t001,
Define fill_tab.
wa_t001-bukrs = &1.
wa_t001-butxt = &2.
wa_t001-ort01 = &3.
Append wa_t001 to it_t001.
Clear wa_t001.
End-of-definition.
Fill_tab '1000' 'TCS' 'HYD'.
Fill_tab '2000' 'IBM' 'CHE'.
Endloop.
Note: - We cant next the definition of macro.

Subroutines: -
Subroutines are procedures. That we can define in any ABAP program & calling from the same or some
other ABAP program. Procedure is the collection of statements.
Syntax of defining the subroutine: -

Form <form name / subroutine name> using <IV 1> type <DT> <IV 2> type <DT> --- changing <OV 1>
type <DT> <OV 2> type <DT> -----
By Mr.Sunil
------
logic
------
Endform.
Syntax of calling the subroutine: -
Perform <form name> using <IP 1> <IP 2> ---- calling <OP 1> <OP 2>------
Note: - In subroutine calling is the first & definition is the next. In subroutines all the using parameters
are called input parameters. All the changing parameters are called as output parameters.
We cant place the any executable statement after the definition of the subroutine.
Perform the addition of two numbers by using subroutines.

Data R type I.
Parameter: P_input1 type I, P_input2 type I.
Perform add1 using P_input1 P_input2 changing R.
Write R.
Form add1 using A type I B type I changing C type I.
C = A + B.
Endform.
There are two types of subroutines.
1. Internal subroutines.
2. External subroutines.
Internal subroutines: -
Its nothing but the definition of the subroutine as well as calling of the subroutine must be in the same
program.
External subroutine: -
Its nothing but the definition of the subroutines taken from one program & the calling of the subroutine is
is taken from some other ABAP program.
Syntax of calling the external subroutine: -
Perform <form name> in program <program name> using <IP 1> <IP 2> ---- changing <OP 1> <OP2> ---
Differences between Macros & subroutines: -
By Mr.Sunil
Termination of subroutine: -
Subroutines are normally ends with endform. If you want to terminate the subroutine so earlier then we
use exit or check command. Exit command is used to terminate the subroutine unconditionally. Check
command is used to terminate the subroutine conditionally.
Perform spexit.
Form spexit. Working with central data:-
Write 'ENRICH Technologies'. Data A type i.
Write / 'SR Nagar'. A = 10.
Exit. Perform hai.
Write / 'HYD'. Write / A.
Endform. Form hai.
A = 20.
Write / A. 20
OP: - ENRICH Technologies
Endform.
SR Nagar
Data A type i.
A = 10.
Parameter P_BSART type EKKO-BSART.
Perform hello.
Perform spcheck using P_BSART.
Write A.
Form spcheck using A type EKKO-BSART.
Form hello.
Check A = DOM.
Local A.
------- A = 20.
------- Write A.
Endform. Endform.
Function module: -
Functional modules are reusable components that are defined in functional library.
Each function module must be attached to one function group. Each contains two include programs by
default. One is for global declaration another one is for common subroutines. All the function modules can
access the both the include programs.
When ever we are calling any one of the function module then all other function modules will be loaded
into the memory of calling program. So its better to group related function module into one function
group.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - SE37 is the transaction code for function builder.
Steps to create function group: -

Execute SE37. In the menu bar click on GO TO Function groups Create group. Provide the function
group name, short description. Save. Click on local object.
Steps to activate function group: -

In the menu bar click on environment inactive objects. Expand the function group under local objects.
Select the function group. Right click on it. Click active. Enter.
Components of function module: -

1. Attributes
2. Import
3. Export
4. Changing
5. Tables
6. Exceptions
7. Source code
Attributes: -
Attributes specify the type of function module whether its a normal or remote enable. If the function
module type is normal then we can access the function module within the server only. If the function
module type is remote enable then we can access the function module within the server as well as outside
the server also.
Import: -
Import acts like input parameters [using in the server].
Export: -
Export acts like output parameters [changing in the server].
Changing: -
Changing acts like both import & export.
Tables: -
Tables acts like both import & export only for internal tables.
Exceptions: -
These are used to handle the errors in function module.
Source code: -
It contains the logic related function module.
Develop a function module to display the all the purchasing order header details based on the given
purchasing document number.
By Mr.Sunil
Steps to create function module: -
Execute SE37. Provide the function module name. Click on create. Provide the function group name.
Provide the short note. Click on save. Enter. Click on import. Provide parameter name, type, associated
type. Click on export. Provide parameter name, type, associated type. Click on source code. Write source
code.
Ex: -
Select single * from EKKO into E_WA where EBELN = I_EBELN.
Endfunction.
Save, check, activate the function.
Note: - Function module writes single value & multiple values. So we need to maintain any display
statement (write) in the function module definition.
Note: - We can test the function module independently without calling the function module.
Function module definition Function module calling

Import -------------------------------------------- Export
Export -------------------------------------------- Import
Changing ---------------------------------------- Changing
Tables ------------------------------------------- Tables
Steps to call the function module: -
Place the cursor where you want to call the function module. Click on pattern in the application tool bar.
Provide the function module name.
Difference between subroutines & function module: -
By Mr.Sunil
Develop a function module to display the company codes company name & city based on the given
company.
If you want to declare the work area with some of the fields in function module then we must
create one structure with those fields in the data dictionary & later we refer the structure in the function
module [export tab].
In this object we must create the structure with bukrs, butxt, ort01.
Steps to create structure: -
Execute SE11. Select the radio button data type. Provide the structure name. Click on create. Select the
radio button structure. Enter. Provide the short description. Provide component, component type.
Bukrs bukrs
Butxt butxt
Ort01 ort01
Function module ZENT_930_FM1.
Import
Parameter name type associated type
i_bukrs type t001-bukrs
Export
parameter name type associated type
e_wa like ZENT_930_FS1.
Source code
Select single bukrs butxt ort01 from t001 into e_wa where bukrs = i_bukrs.
Endfunction.
Based on the given vendor number display the vendor number, purchasing document numbers,
document types by using function module.
If you want to declare the internal table with some of the fields in the function module then we must create
one structure with those fields & later we refer the structure in the tables tab of function module.
In this object we must create one structure with lifnr, ebeln, bsart after we refer the structure in the
tables tab of function module.
By Mr.Sunil
Structure ZENT_930_FS2

Lifnr elifnr
Ebeln ebeln
Bsart esart

Go to SE37 function module
Import
i_lifnr type ekko-lifnr
Tables
IT like ZENT_930_FS2
Exception
Exception Short note
NODATA invalid input
Source code
Select lifnr ebeln bsart from ekko into table IT where lifnr = i_lifnr.
Raise NODATA.
Endif.
Execute SE38.
Parameter p_lifnr type ekko-lifnr.
Data IT_ekko type ZENT_930_FS2.
Data wa_ekko like line of it_ekko.
Call function ZENT_930_FM3.
Exporting.
i_lifnr = p_lifnr.
Tables
IT = IT_ekko.
Exporting
NODATA = 1
OTHERS = 2.
If SY-SUBRC = 0.
Write: INVALID INPUT.
Else.
Loop at IT_ekko into wa_ekko.
Write: / wa_ekko-lifnr, wa_ekko-ebeln, wa_ekko-bsart.
Endloop.
Endif.
Note: - In the function module all parameters are either pass by value or pass by reference. By default
all parameters are pass by reference. Pass by reference means from calling to definition & definition to
By Mr.Sunil
calling all parameter values are passing along with the memory. Pass by value means from calling to
definition & definition to calling only parameters values are passed.
Note: - In the remote enable function module all parameters are pass by value only.
Select-options: -
The name of the select options acts like an internal table with header line that means the name of the work
area as well as the name of the internal table is the similar name of the select options.
Syntax: -
Select-options <select-options name> for <variable>.
Ex: -
Data v1 type t001-bukrs.
Select-options s_bukrs for v1.
Note: - If you want to declare the work area with the some of the fields in the function module then we
must create one structure with those fields in the data dictionary & later we refer the structure in the
import, export, changing tab.
Note: - If you want to declare the internal table with some of the fields in the function module then we
must create one structure with those fields & later we refer the structure in the tables tab (or) Create one
table type with those fields in the data dictionary later we refer the table type in the import, export or
changing tab.
Note: - If you want to declare the select-options in the function module then we must create one
structure with the following fields later we refer the structure in the tables tab of function module.
Components of select-options: -
1. Sign Include (I) / Exclude (E).
2. Option between (BE) / Not Between (NB) / Equals (EQ) .
3. Low The low value of the select-options.
4. High the high value of the select-options.
Sign = I
Option = BT
--------- 1000 --------- 4000 ----------
Sign = I
Options = NB.
--------- 1000 --------- 4000 ----------
Sign = E
By Mr.Sunil
Option = BE
--------- 1000 --------- 4000 ----------
Sign = E
Option = NB
--------- 1000 --------- 4000 ----------
Based on the given company code, display the company codes, names, cities by using function
module.
If you want to declare the select-option the function module then we must create one structure with the
following fields in the data dictionary & later we refer the structure in the tables tab.
Sign (C,1)
Option (C,2)
Low
High Depends of fields
In this object we must create two structures one is for input parameter (sign option low, high). One is for
output (bukrs, butxt, ort01) both structures are referred in tables tab only.
Steps to create structure select-options: -

Execute SE11. Select the radio button data type. Provide the structure name, click on create. Select the
radio button structure. Enter. Provide short description. Click on pre defined type.
Component data type length

SIGN CHAR 1
OPTION CHAR 2
LOW CHAR 4
HIGH CHAR 4
Save, check, activate the structure.
Function module: ZENT_930_fm4.

Tables
i_bukrs like ZENt_930_fs_so
e_it like ZENt_930_fs1
source code
select bukrs butxt ort01 from t001 into table e_it where bukrs in i_bukrs.
Endfunction.
Data v1 type t001-bukrs.

By Mr.Sunil
Data it_t001 like table of ZENt_930_fs1.
Data wa_t001 like line of it_t001.
Call function ZENt_930_fm4.
Tables
i_bukrs = s_bukrs
Endloop.
Based on the given vendor numbers display the vendor numbers, vendor names, purchasing
document numbers by using function module.
Structure ystr5
Lifnr lifnr char 10
Name1 name1 char 30
Ebeln ebeln char 10
Structure ystr6
Sign char 1
Option char 2
Low char 10
High char 10
Function module yfm5

Tables
Parameter name kind associated type
i_lifnr like ystr6
e_it like ystr5
Source code
Select LFA1~LIFNR LFA1~NAME1 LFA1~EBELN into table e_it from LFA1 inner join EKKO on
LFA1~LIFNR = EKKO~LIFNR where LFA1~LIFNR in i_lifnr.
Endfunction.
Report yprogram2
Data v1 type LFA1-LIFNR.
Select-options s_lifnr for v1.
Data it_final like table of ystr5.
Data wa_final like line of it_final.
Call function yfm5
Tables
i_lifnr = s_lifnr
e_it = it_final.

Write: / wa_final-lifnr, wa_final-name1, wa_final-ebeln.
Endloop.
Note: - When ever we are working with remote enable function module then we must select the all
parameters are pass by value.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - In the function module all parameters are either pass by reference or pass by value. By default
all parameters are pass by reference. Pass by reference means from calling to definition & definition to
calling all parameter values along with the memory is transfering. Pass by value means from calling to
definition & definition to calling parameter values only passing.
By Mr.Sunil
REPORTS
Report is the combination of given inputs to the selection-screen retrieving the data from data base based
on the given input & display the output in a predefined format.
Syntax of selection-screen: -
Selection-screen begin of block <block name> with frame title text-<no>.
Optional Optional
Selection screen
-------
------- S_BUJKRS to
------- Display
Selection-screen end of block Non display
<block name>.
Syntax of check box: -
Parameter <name of the check box> as check box.
Ex: -
Parameter P_DIS as checkbox.
P_DIS
Syntax of radio button: -
Parameter <name of the radio button> radiobutton group <group name>.
Ex: -
Parameter: Male radiobutton group g,
Female radiobutton group g.
Design the following selection-screen.
data v1 type kna1-kunnr.

selection-screen begin of block a with frame title text-001.
select-options s_kunr for v1.
parameter p_dis as checkbox.
parameter p_nondis as checkbox.
selection-screen end of block a.
If you want to provide the meaningful descriptions to the input variables then in the menu bar click on go
to text elements selection texts. It displays the all available inputs. If the field is coming from
dictionary then select the dictionary check box otherwise we manually provide the text.
By Mr.Sunil
Save, activate, back.
Design the selection-screen as shown in the figure.
data v1 type t001-bukrs.

selection-screen begin of block a with frame.
select-options s_BUKRS for v1.
selection-screen begin of block b with frame title text-001.
selection-screen end of block b.
When ever we are working with begin of line & end of line then the name of the parameter is
disable. So we must provide comment before, after block of a checkbox or radiobutton.
Syntax: -
Selection-screen comment x(y) text-<no>. 3 digit number
Starting position
data v1 type kna1-kunnr.

selection-screen begin of block a
with frame.
select-options s_kunnr for v1.
selection-screen begin of line.
selection-screen comment 2(10)
text-002.
selection-screen comment 14(11)
text-003.
selection-screen: end of line,
end of block a.
By Mr.Sunil
Skip is the keyword to provide the space in between any two input variables in the selections name. By
default skip is one line. Maximum we can skip up to 9 lines at a line.

SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF BLOCK A
WITH FRAME.
SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF LINE.
SELECTION-SCREEN COMMENT 1(12) TEXT-001.
PARAMETER P_DIS RADIOBUTTON GROUP B.
SELECTION-SCREEN END OF LINE.
SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF LINE.
SELECTION-SCREEN COMMENT 1(12) TEXT-002.
PARAMETER P_NONDIS RADIOBUTTON GROUP B.
SELECTION-SCREEN: END OF LINE,
END OF BLOCK A.
Design the selection-screen as shown in the figure

DATA V2 TYPE EKKO-LIFNR.
SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF BLOCK
A WITH FRAME TITLE TEXT-003.
SELECT-OPTIONS S_LIFNR FOR V2.
SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF BLOCK
B WITH FRAME TITLE TEXT-004.
PARAMETER P_DIS AS CHECKBOX.
PARAMETER P_NONDIS AS CHECKBOX.
SELECTION-SCREEN: END OF BLOCK B,
END OF BLOCK A.
Types of reports as per ABAPer requirement: -
Types of Reports:-
1. Classical Reports
2. Interactive Reports
3. ALV Reports
Classical Reports: - Its nothing but to display the entire information in a single list
Ex: - <Vendor details>

<Vendor purchasing header details>
<Purchasing item details>
<Material details>
Events in classical reports : -

1. Initialization
By Mr.Sunil
2. At selection-screen
3. At selection-screen on
4. Start-of-selection
5. End-of-selection
6. Top-of-page
7. End-of-page
Initialization: -
Its an event which is triggered before displaying the selection-screen.
ADV: - its used to provide the default values to the selection-screen.
At selection-screen: -
Its an event which is triggered after provide the input to the screen & before leaving the selection-
screen.
ADV: - This is used to validate the given input.
At selection-screen on: -
Its an event which is triggered at the selection-screen based on particular input field.
ADV: - This is used to validate the particular input field.
Start-of-selection: -
Its an event which is triggered after leaving the selection-screen & before display the output.
ADV: - This is used to fetch the data from data base & place into internal table.
End-of-selection: -
Its an event which is triggered after completion of the logic.
ADV: - This is used to display the output.
Top-of-page: -
Its an event which is triggered of the top of the each page.
ADV: - Its used to display the header information.
End-of-page: -
Its an event which is triggered of the end of each page.
ADV: - Its used to display the footer information.
Note: - Start-of-selection is the default event in the classical report
Process flow of events: -
By Mr.Sunil
Some more events in classical report: -
1. At selection-screen output
2. At selection-screen on value-request
3. At selection-screen on help-request
At selection-screen output: -
Its an event which is triggered at the selection-screen based on the user action.
ADV: - This is used to modify the selection-screen.
At selection-screen on value-request: -
Its an event which is triggered at the time of click on F4 button.
ADV: - This is used to provide the list of possible values to the input variables.
At selection-screen on help-request: -
Its an event which is triggered at the time of click on F1 button.
ADV: - This is used to provide the help document to the input variable
At selection-screen output is the first triggering event in the selection-screen.
Note: - When ever the program is loaded into the ABAP editor then automatically load of event
program will be triggered. We never write any code on load of program event.
Design as well as provide the default values in the selection-screen as shown in the figure.
Data v1 type vbak-vbeln.
Selection-screen begin of block A with frame.
Select-options s_vbeln for v1.
Parameter p_dis as checkbox.
Parameter p_nondis as checkbox.
Selection-screen end of block A.
Initialization.
s_vbeln-sign = 'I'.
s_vbeln-option = 'BT'.
s_vbeln-low = '4969'.
s_vbeln-high = '4975'.
Append s_vbeln.
Clear s_vbeln.
s_vbeln-sign = 'I'.
s_vbeln-option = 'BT'.
s_vbeln-high = '4988'.
Append s_vbeln.
Clear s_vbeln.
s_vbeln-sign = 'I'.
s_vbeln-option = 'EQ'.
By Mr.Sunil
Append s_vbeln.
Clear s_vbeln.
p_dis = 'X'.
Design as well as assigned the default values
to the selection screen as shown in the figure.
Data v1 type ekko-bukrs.
Data v2 type ekko-ebeln.
Selection-screen begin of block A
with Frame title text-001.
Select-options s_ebeln for v2.
Selection-screen begin of line.
Parameter p_dis as checkbox.
Selection-screen comment 2(11) text-002.
Parameter p_nondis as checkbox.
Selection-screen comment 15(11) text-003.
Selection-screen end of line.
Initialization.
s_bukrs-sign = 'I'.
s_bukrs-option = 'BT'.
s_bukrs-low = '1000'.
s_bukrs-high = '3000'.
Append s_bukrs.
Clear s_bukrs.
s_bukrs-sign = 'I'.
s_bukrs-option = 'BT'.
s_bukrs-low = '5000'.
s_bukrs-high = '7000'.
Append s_bukrs.
Clear s_bukrs.
s_ebeln-sign = 'I'.
s_ebeln-option = 'BT'.
s_ebeln-low = '3000000004'.
s_ebeln-high = '3000000008'.
Append s_ebeln.
Clear s_ebeln.
s_ebeln-sign = 'I'.
s_ebeln-option = 'EQ'.
s_ebeln-low = '3000000010'.
Append s_ebeln.
Clear s_ebeln.
p_dis = 'X'.
By Mr.Sunil
Types: begin of ty_knb1,
bukrs type knb1-bukrs,
kunnr type knb1-kunnr,
akont type knb1-akont,
end of ty_knb1.
Data wa_knb1 type ty_knb1.
Select single bukrs kunnr akont from knb1 into wa_knb1 where kunnr
= '000000224' and
bukrs = '5000'.
Write: / wa_knb1-kunnr, wa_knb1-bukrs, wa_knb1-akont.
* select bukrs kunnr akont from knb1 into wa_knb1 up to 1 rows
where kunnr = '0000000224'.
* endselect.
* write: / wa_knb1-kunnr, wa_knb1-bukrs, wa_knb1-akont.
Note: - We always choose the select single if you know the entire primary key combination otherwise
we choose the select up to 1 rows.
Message: -
Weve 4 different types messages.
1. Abend message (A) <Message> Terminates the entire transaction
2. Warning message (W) Status bar i. If you are in the basic list then it
Error message (E) goes to program.
ii. If you are in the secondary list
then it goes to previous list.
3. Information message (I) <Message> Goes to selection-screen.
4. Success message (S) Status bar Nothing happened
By Mr.Sunil
Syntax: -
Message <message type><message number> (<message class).
3 digit number
Note: - The transaction code for message class creation is SE91
Steps to create the message class: -

Execute SE91. Provide the message class name. Click on create. Provide short description. Click
on save. Click on messages tab. Provide messages against the messages.
000 Less than 10
001 Grater than 10
002 Equal to 10
Click on save.
Ex: -
Parameter P type I.
If P < 10.
Message I000(zmessage1).
Elseif p > 10.
Else
Endif.
Note: - In the real time we always use only one message class only one message number against that
number we maintain the place holders.
Syntax: -
Message <message type><message number> (<message class>) with <message>.
Zmessage2
000 & & &
Parameter p type I.
If p < 10.
Message I000(zmessage2) with less than 10.
Elseif p > 10.
Message I000(zmessage2) with grater than 10.
Else
Message I000(zmessage2) with equal to 10.
Endif.
Note: - When ever the system execute any message then the further statements are not executed.
(Execution is stopped.)
Field validation table
By Mr.Sunil
BUKRS T001
KUNNR KNA1
LIFNR LFA1
EBELN EKKO
VBELN VBAK
MATNR MARA
WERKS T001W
LGORT T001L
tables kna1.
select-options s_kunnr for kna1-kunnr.
data v type kna1-kunnr.
At selection-screen.
Select kunnr from kna1 into V up to 1 rows where kunnr in s_kunnr.
Endselect.
If sy-subrc <> 0.
Message E000(zmessage2) with 'Invalid customer'.
Endif.
Note: - All inputs are wrong then only SY-SUBRC value is not equal to zero.
Note: - Now-a-days in the real time we always use select single to validate the input. Because select
single is faster than up to 1 rows (select single hit the data once. Up to 1 rows hit the data twice.)
tables: ekko, lfa1.

data: v type ekko-ebeln, v1 type lfa1-lifnr.
select-options: s_ebeln for ekko-ebeln, s_lifnr for lfa1-lifnr.
Select single ebeln from ekko into V where ebeln in s_ebeln.
If sy-subrc <> 0.
Message E000(zmessage3) with 'Invalid number'.
Endif.
At selection-screen on s_lifnr.
Select single lifnr from lfa1 into V1 where lifnr in s_lifnr.
If sy-subrc <> 0.
Message E000(zmessage3) with 'Invalid vendor'.
Endif.
Note: - If you want to validate the entire selection-screen then we use at selection-screen event. If you
want to validate a particular field then we go for at selection-screen on. In this case also at selection-
screen work but performance wise poor compare to at selection-screen on.
tables t001.
selection-screen begin of block a with frame.
select-options s_bukrs for t001-bukrs.
By Mr.Sunil
types: begin of ty_t001,
bukrs type t001-bukrs,
butxt type t001-butxt,
ort01 type t001-ort01,
end of ty_t001.
data: wa_t001 type ty_t001,
Start-of-selection.
Select bukrs butxt ort01 from t001 into table it_t001 where bukrs
in s_bukrs.
End-of-selection.
If p_dis = 'X'.
Endloop.
Else.
message I000(zmessage1) with 'select the display checkbox'.
endif.
Top-of-page.
Write: 'SATISH TECHNOLOGIES'.
End-of-page.
Write '301, Tirumalagiri complex, SR Nagar'.
Note: - One event is always ends with another event.
Note: - When ever we are working with events then we no need to follow the order of the events.
Note: - When ever we are working with end-of-page then we must provide the LINE-COUNT in the
name of the report. Other wise the footer information is not printed.
Syntax: - Number of footer lines

Report <report name> line-count X(Y).
Number of lines per page
Note: - If you want to avoid the title in the output then we must provide NO STANDARD PAGE
HEADING in the name of the report.
document dates & vendor numbers by using classical event reports & also display the top-of-page as
DHAWAN TECHNOLOGIES & end of page as SR Nagar
REPORT ZWASTE102 line-count 10(1).
Data v1 type ekko-ebeln.
Select-options s_ebeln for v1.
By Mr.Sunil
Types: Begin of ty_ekko,
Ebeln type ekko-ebeln,
Bedat type ekko-bedat,
Lifnr type ekko-lifnr,
End of ty_ekko.
Data: wa_ekko type ty_ekko,
it_ekko type table of ty_ekko.
Data V type ekko-ebeln.
Select single ebeln from ekko into V where ebeln in s_ebeln.
If sy-subrc <> 0.
Message E000(zmessage3) with 'Invalid purchasing document'.
Endif.
start-of-selection.
Select ebeln bedat lifnr from ekko into table it_ekko where ebeln in
s_ebeln.
End-of-selection.
Loop at it_ekko into wa_ekko.
Write: / wa_ekko-ebeln, wa_ekko-lifnr, wa_ekko-bedat.
Endloop.
Top-of-page.
Write 'DHAWAN TECHNOLOGIES'.
End-of-page.
Write 'SR NAGAR'.
Based on the given customer numbers display the customer numbers, customer names & cities
by using classical report events & also provide top of page as THESE ARE CUSTOMER
DETAILS & end of page as SATISH TECHNOLOGIES.
Data v1 type kna1-kunnr.
Select-options s_kunnr for v1.
Types: begin of ty_kna1,

Kunnr type kna1-kunnr,
Name1 type kna1-name1,
Ort01 type kna1-ort01,
End of ty_kna1.
Data: wa type ty_kna1,
it type table of ty_kna1.
Data v type kna1-kunnr.
Select single kunnr from kna1 into v where kunnr in s_kunnr.
If sy-subrc <> 0.
Message E000(zmessage3) with 'Invalid customer number'.
Endif.
Start-of-selection.
By Mr.Sunil
Select kunnr name1 ort01 from kna1 into table it where kunnr in
s_kunnr.
End-of-selection.
Loop at it into wa.
Write: / wa-kunnr, wa-name1, wa-ort01.
Endloop.
Top-of-page.
Write / 'THESE ARE CUSTOMER DETAILS'.
End-of-page.
Write / 'SATISH TECHNOLOGIES'.
When ever we are working with at selection-screen output event then we must provide <MODIF>
<ID NAME> for each modified field & also provide user-command based on which field you want to
modify.

If the user selects the company radio button then company field is enabled and vendor field is
disable. If the user select vendor radio button then company field is disable.

Parameter P_BUKRS type lfb1-bukrs MODIF ID M1.
Parameter P_LIFNR type lfb1-lifnr MODIF ID M2.
Parameter p_com radiobutton group B USER-COMMAND UC.
Parameter p_ven radiobutton group B default 'X'.
At selection-screen output.
If p_com = 'X'.
Loop at screen.
If screen-group1 = 'M1'.
Screen-input = 1.
Modify screen.
Elseif screen-group1 = 'M2'.
Screen-input = 0.
Modify screen.
Endif.
By Mr.Sunil
Endloop.
Elseif p_ven = 'X'.
Loop at screen.
Screen-input = 0.
Modify screen.
Screen-input = 1.
Modify screen.
Endif.
Endloop.
Endif.

If the user select the sales radio button then sales field enabled & rest of the fields are disabled. If
the user select S_BUKRS then company field enabled & rest of the fields are disabled.
Data V1 type VBAK-VBELN.
Data V2 type KNA1-KUNNR.
Select-options S_VBELN for V1 MODIF ID M1.
Parameter S_BUKRS type T001-BUKRS MODIF ID M2.
Select-options S_KUNNR for V2 MODIF ID M3.
Parameter p_sal radiobutton group B USER-COMMAND UC.
Parameter p_com radiobutton group B.
Parameter p_cus radiobutton group B default 'X'.
At selection-screen output.
If p_sal = 'X'.
Loop at screen.
Screen-input = 1.
Modify screen.
Screen-input = 0.
Modify screen.
Screen-input = 0.
Modify screen.
Endif.
Endloop.
Elseif p_com = 'X'.
Loop at screen.
Screen-input = 0.
Modify screen.
Screen-input = 1.
Modify screen.
By Mr.Sunil
Screen-input = 0.
Modify screen.
Endif.
Endloop.
Elseif p_cus = 'X'.
Loop at screen.
Screen-input = 0.
Modify screen.
Screen-input = 0.
Modify screen.
Screen-input = 1.
Modify screen.
Endif.
Endloop.
Endif.
Interactive report: -
Its nothing but to display the summarized information in the basic list & detailed information in
the secondary list.
Note: - We can have only one basic list & up to 20 secondary lists (1-20).
Events in Interactive report: -

1. At line selection
2. At user-command.
3. Top-of-page during line-selection.
4. At PF(N)
5. Set PF-status.
By Mr.Sunil
At line selection: -
Its an event which is triggered at the time of user clicks on any record of any list.
At user-command: -
Its an event which is triggered at the time of user clicks on any menu item.
Top-of-page during line-selection: -

Its an event which is triggered at the top of each secondary list.
At PF (N): -
Its an event which is triggered at the time of user clicks on F1 to F12 function keys.
Set PF-status: -
Its an event which is triggered at the time of attaching our own GUI to the program.
Note: - Classical events are also triggered for basic list.

Some of the system variables related to interactive report: -
1. SY-LSIND
2. SY-LISEL
3. SY-LILLI
4. SY-UCOMM
5. SY-LINNO
SY-LSIND: -
Its the system variable which contains the current list index number.
SY-LISEL: -
Its the system variable which contains the contents of the selected record.
SY-LILLI: -
Its the system variable which contains the exact line number of the selected record.
SY-UCOMM: -
Its the system variable which contains the function code of the selected menu item.
SY-LINNO: -
Its the system variable which contains the line number of the last record display.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - Interactive reports support the user interaction is always through double click. When ever the
user double clicks on any record at any list then at line selection event will be triggered & list index is
incremented by 1. If you want to retrieve the data for current list then we should know the record which is
clicked by the user in the previous list.
The following techniques are used to identify the records which are clicked by the user in the
previous list.
1. Hide technique.
2. SY-LISEL technique.
3. Get cursor technique.
Hide technique: -
Hide maintain the copy of the previous list with output line numbers & their contents. When
ever the user clicks on any record of any list then at line-selection event will be triggered & list
index is increased by 1 & that particular record will move from hide area to work area. Based on
the work area we fetch the data for current list.
Note: - Hide is always maintain after write statement.
Based on the given purchasing document numbers display the purchasing document
number, document dates & vendor umbers. In the basic list. If the user clicks on any record
then we display the purchasing document item details (EBELN, EBELP, MENGE, MEINS,
NETPR) in the first secondary list by using hide technique.
Data V1 type EKKO-EBELN.

Select-options S_EBELN for V1.

EBELN type EKKO-EBELN,
BEDAT type EKKO-BEDAT,
By Mr.Sunil
LIFNR type EKKO-LIFNR,
End of ty_ekko.
Data: wa_ekko type ty_ekko,

it_ekko type table of ty_ekko.
Types: Begin of ty_ekpo,

EBELN type EKPO-EBELN,
EBELP type EKPO-EBELP,
MENGE type EKPO-MENGE,
MEINS type EKPO-MEINS,
NETPR type EKPO-NETPR,
End of ty_ekpo.
Data: wa_ekpo type ty_ekpo,

it_ekpo type table of ty_ekpo.
Select EBELN BEDAT LIFNR from EKKO into table it_ekko where EBELN in
S_EBELN.
Loop at it_ekko into wa_ekko.
Write: / wa_ekko-EBELN, wa_ekko-BEDAT, wa_ekko-LIFNR.
Hide : wa_ekko-EBELN, wa_ekko-BEDAT, wa_ekko-LIFNR.
Endloop.
At line-selection.
If SY-LSIND = '1'.
Select EBELN EBELP MENGE MEINS NETPR from EKPO into table it_ekpo
where EBELN = wa_ekko-EBELN.
Loop at it_ekpo into wa_ekpo.
Write: / wa_ekpo-EBELN, wa_ekpo-EBELP, wa_ekpo-MENGE, wa_ekpo-
MEINS, wa_ekpo-NETPR.
Endloop.
ENDIF.
Based on the given company codes display the company codes, company name & cities in the
basic list. If the user clicks on any record then we display the customers under company details
(BUKRS, KUNNR, AKONT) in the first secondary list. If the user clicks on any record then we
By Mr.Sunil
display the customers details (KUNNR, NAME1, ORT01) in the second secondary list by using hide
technique.
Data V1 type T001-BUKRS.

Select-options S_BUKRS for V1.
END OF TY_T001.
DATA: WA_T001 TYPE TY_T001,
IT_T001 TYPE TABLE OF TY_T001.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_KNB1,
BUKRS TYPE KNB1-BUKRS,
KUNNR TYPE KNB1-KUNNR,
AKONT TYPE KNB1-AKONT,
END OF TY_KNB1.
DATA: WA_KNB1 TYPE TY_KNB1,
IT_KNB1 TYPE TABLE OF TY_KNB1.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_KNA1,
KUNNR TYPE KNA1-KUNNR,
NAME1 TYPE KNA1-NAME1,
ORT01 TYPE KNA1-ORT01,
END OF TY_KNA1.
DATA: WA_KNA1 TYPE TY_KNA1,
IT_KNA1 TYPE TABLE OF TY_KNA1.
Select BUKRS BUTXT ORT01 from T001 into table it_t001 where BUKRS in
S_BUKRS.
Write:/ wa_t001-BUKRS, wa_t001-BUTXT, wa_t001-ORT01.
Hide: wa_t001-BUKRS, wa_t001-BUTXT, wa_t001-ORT01.
Endloop.
At line-selection.
If SY-LSIND = '1'.
By Mr.Sunil
Select BUKRS KUNNR AKONT from KNB1 into table it_knb1 WHERE BUKRS =
wa_t001-BUKRS.
Loop at it_knb1 into wa_knb1.
Write: / wa_knb1-BUKRS, wa_knb1-KUNNR, wa_knb1-AKONT.
Hide: wa_knb1-BUKRS, wa_knb1-KUNNR, wa_knb1-AKONT.
Endloop.
Elseif SY-LSIND = '2'.
Select KUNNR NAME1 ORT01 from KNA1 into table it_kna1 where KUNNR =
wa_knb1-KUNNR.
Loop at it_kna1 into wa_kna1.
Write: / wa_kna1-KUNNR, wa_kna1-NAME1, wa_kna1-ORT01.
Endloop.
Endif.
Syntax of accessing the part of data from any variable: -
Number of characters
<variable name>+X(Y).
Starting position
Ex: -
Data A(10) type C value ENRICH TECHNOLOGIES.
WRITE A.
Write A+0(5). ENRICH TECHNOLOGIES
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ENRICH
Note: - when ever we use any one of the classical report event then we must use the start of selection
event.
Note: - CONVERSION_EXIT_ALPHA_INPUT is the function module which is used to add the
leading zeros to the input variable based on the length of the input variable.
Ex: -
Data A(5) type C.
A = 415.
Call function CONVERSION-EXIT-ALPHA-INPUT.
Write C.
OP: - 00415.
Based on the given

company codes display
the company codes
company names & cities
in the basic list. If the
user clicks on any record
then display the vendors
under company details
(BUKRS, LIFNR,
AKONT) in the first
secondary list. If the user
clicks on any record then
By Mr.Sunil
display the vendor details (LIFNR, NAME1, ORT01) in the second secondary list by using SY-
LISEL technique & also validate the given company code.

END OF TY_T001.
DATA WA_T001 TYPE TY_T001.
DATA IT_T001 TYPE TABLE OF TY_T001.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_LFB1,
BUKRS TYPE LFB1-BUKRS,
LIFNR TYPE LFB1-LIFNR,
AKONT TYPE LFB1-AKONT,
END OF TY_LFB1.
DATA WA_LFB1 TYPE TY_LFB1.
DATA IT_LFB1 TYPE TABLE OF TY_LFB1.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_LFA1,
LIFNR TYPE LFA1-LIFNR,
NAME1 TYPE LFA1-NAME1,
ORT01 TYPE LFA1-ORT01,
END OF TY_LFA1.
DATA WA_LFA1 TYPE TY_LFA1.
DATA IT_LFA1 TYPE TABLE OF TY_LFA1.
DATA V TYPE T001-BUKRS.
AT SELECTION-SCREEN.
SELECT SINGLE BUKRS FROM T001 INTO V WHERE BUKRS IN S_BUKRS.
IF SY-SUBRC <> 0.
MESSAGE E000(ZMESSAGE1) WITH 'INVALID NUMBER'.
ENDIF.
START-OF-SELECTION.
S_BUKRS.
WRITE:/ WA_T001-BUKRS, WA_T001-BUTXT, WA_T001-ORT01.
ENDLOOP.
AT LINE-SELECTION.
IF SY-LSIND = '1'.
SELECT BUKRS LIFNR AKONT FROM LFB1 INTO TABLE IT_LFB1 WHERE BUKRS =
SY-LISEL+0(4).
LOOP AT IT_LFB1 INTO WA_LFB1.
WRITE:/ WA_LFB1-BUKRS, WA_LFB1-LIFNR, WA_LFB1-AKONT.
ENDLOOP.
By Mr.Sunil
ELSEIF SY-LSIND = '2'.
CALL FUNCTION 'CONVERSION_EXIT_ALPHA_INPUT'
EXPORTING
INPUT = SY-LISEL+5(10)
IMPORTING
OUTPUT = SY-LISEL+5(10).
SELECT LIFNR NAME1 ORT01 FROM LFA1 INTO TABLE IT_LFA1 WHERE LIFNR =
SY-LISEL+5(10).
LOOP AT IT_LFA1 INTO WA_LFA1.
WRITE:/ WA_LFA1-LIFNR, WA_LFA1-NAME1, WA_LFA1-ORT01.
ENDLOOP.
ENDIF.
TOP-OF-PAGE DURING LINE-SELECTION.

IF SY-LSIND = '1'.
WRITE: 'THESE ARE VENDORS UNDER COMPANY:', SY-LISEL+0(4).
WRITE: 'THESE ARE VENDOR DETAILS OF :', SY-LISEL+5(10).
ENDIF.
Based on the given customer numbers display the customer numbers, customer names, customer
cities in the basic list. If the
user clicks on any record then
display the sales document
header details of customer
(VBELN AUDAT KUNNR) in
the first secondary list. If the
user clicks on any record then
we display the sales document
item details (VBELN POSNR
KWMENG MEINS NETWR)
in the second secondary list by
using HIDE technique & also
validate the customer number.
DATA V1 TYPE KNA1-KUNNR.
SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF BLOCK A WITH FRAME.
SELECT-OPTIONS S_KUNNR FOR V1.
SELECTION-SCREEN END OF BLOCK A.

END OF TY_KNA1.
DATA WA_KNA1 TYPE TY_KNA1.

DATA IT_KNA1 TYPE TABLE OF TY_KNA1.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_VBAK,

By Mr.Sunil
VBELN TYPE VBAK-VBELN,
AUDAT TYPE VBAK-AUDAT,
KUNNR TYPE VBAK-KUNNR,
END OF TY_VBAK.
DATA WA_VBAK TYPE TY_VBAK.
DATA IT_VBAK TYPE TABLE OF TY_VBAK.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_VBAP,

VBELN TYPE VBAP-VBELN,
POSNR TYPE VBAP-POSNR,
KWMENG TYPE VBAP-KWMENG,
MEINS TYPE VBAP-MEINS,
END OF TY_VBAP.
DATA WA_VBAP TYPE TY_VBAP.

DATA IT_VBAP TYPE TABLE OF TY_VBAP.
DATA V TYPE KNA1-KUNNR.
SELECT SINGLE KUNNR FROM KNA1 INTO V WHERE KUNNR IN S_KUNNR.
IF SY-SUBRC <> 0.
MESSAGE E000(ZMESSAGE1) WITH 'INVALID CUSTOMER NUMBER'.
ENDIF.
START-OF-SELECTION.
SELECT KUNNR NAME1 ORT01 FROM KNA1 INTO TABLE IT_KNA1 WHERE KUNNR IN
S_KUNNR.
END-OF-SELECTION.
LOOP AT IT_KNA1 INTO WA_KNA1.
WRITE:/ WA_KNA1-KUNNR, WA_KNA1-NAME1, WA_KNA1-ORT01.
HIDE: WA_KNA1-KUNNR, WA_KNA1-NAME1, WA_KNA1-ORT01.
ENDLOOP.
AT LINE-SELECTION.
IF SY-LSIND = '1'.
SELECT VBELN AUDAT KUNNR FROM VBAK INTO TABLE IT_VBAK WHERE KUNNR =
WA_KNA1-KUNNR.
LOOP AT IT_VBAK INTO WA_VBAK.
WRITE:/ WA_VBAK-VBELN, WA_VBAK-AUDAT, WA_VBAK-KUNNR.
HIDE: WA_VBAK-VBELN, WA_VBAK-AUDAT, WA_VBAK-KUNNR.
ENDLOOP.

SELECT VBELN POSNR KWMENG MEINS NETWR FROM VBAP INTO TABLE IT_VBAP
WHERE VBELN = WA_VBAK-VBELN.
By Mr.Sunil
LOOP AT IT_VBAP INTO WA_VBAP.
WRITE: / WA_VBAP-VBELN, WA_VBAP-POSNR, WA_VBAP-KWMENG, WA_VBAP-
MEINS, WA_VBAP-NETWR.
ENDLOOP.
ENDIF.
Note: - Hide & SY-LISEL techniques generates the next list based on the line-selection. If you want to
generate the next list based on the field selection then we go for get-cursor technique.
Get-cursor technique: - Get-cursor technique writes the field name as well as field value which is clicked
by the user.
Syntax: -
Get-cursor field1 <variable1> value <variable2>
Based on the given sales document numbers display the sales document numbers, document
dates & customer numbers in the basic list. If the user clicks on the any sales document number
only then we display the sales document item details [VBELN POSNR KWMENG MEINS
NETWR] in the first secondary list if the user clicks on any customer number only then we display
the customer details [KUNNR NAME1 ORT01] in the first secondary list by using get-cursor
technique.
data v3(10) type c.

data v1 type vbak-vbeln.
select-options s_vbeln for v1.
DATA V2(15) TYPE C.
types: begin of ty_vbak,
vbeln type vbak-vbeln,
audat type vbak-audat,
kunnr type vbak-kunnr,
end of ty_vbak.
data: wa_vbak type ty_vbak,
it_vbak type table of ty_vbak.
types: begin of ty_vbap,

vbeln type vbap-vbeln,
posnr type vbap-posnr,
kwmeng type vbap-kwmeng,
meins type vbap-meins,
netwr type vbap-netwr,
end of ty_vbap.
data: wa_vbap type ty_vbap,

it_vbap type table of ty_vbap.
types: begin of ty_kna1,

kunnr type kna1-kunnr,
By Mr.Sunil
name1 type kna1-name1,
ort01 type kna1-ort01,
end of ty_kna1.
data: wa_kna1 type ty_kna1,

it_kna1 type table of ty_kna1.
select vbeln audat kunnr from vbak into table it_vbak where vbeln in
s_vbeln.
loop at it_vbak into wa_vbak.
write:/ wa_vbak-vbeln, wa_vbak-audat, wa_vbak-kunnr.
endloop.
at line-selection.
if sy-lsind = '1'.
get cursor field v2 value v3.
IF V2 = 'WA_VBAK-VBELN'.
EXPORTING
INPUT = V3
IMPORTING
OUTPUT = V3.
SELECT VBELN POSNR KWMENG MEINS NETWR FROM VBAP INTO TABLE
IT_VBAP WHERE VBELN = V3.
LOOP AT IT_VBAP INTO WA_VBAP.
WRITE:/ WA_VBAP-VBELN, WA_VBAP-POSNR, WA_VBAP-MEINS, WA_VBAP-
KWMENG, WA_VBAP-NETWR.
ENDLOOP.
ELSEIF V2 = 'WA_VBAK-KUNNR'.
EXPORTING
INPUT = V3
IMPORTING
OUTPUT = V3.
SELECT KUNNR NAME1 ORT01 FROM KNA1 INTO TABLE IT_KNA1 WHERE KUNNR
= V3.
LOOP AT IT_KNA1 INTO WA_KNA1.
ENDLOOP.
ENDIF.
ENDIF.
Note: - If you click on most of the records, if the output isnt coming then we open the table in SE11 &
pass the values. If the data is available then you must check the any conversion routine is available or not.
Steps to identify the conversion routine: -
By Mr.Sunil
Double click on data element of the field. Double click on domain if any conversion routines are
available, double click on it & identify the input routine & apply the input routine before select query.
document dates, company codes & vendor numbers if the user clicks on any purchasing document
number only then we display the purchasing document item details. [EBELN, EBELP, MENGE,
MEINS, NETPR] in the first secondary list if the user click on any vendor number then display the
vendor details [LIFNR, NAME1, ORT01] in the first secondary list & also validate the given
purchasing document number.

DATA V2(15) TYPE C.
DATA V3(10) TYPE C.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_EKKO,
EBELN TYPE EKKO-EBELN,
BEDAT TYPE EKKO-BEDAT,
BUKRS TYPE EKKO-BUKRS,
LIFNR TYPE EKKO-LIFNR,
END OF TY_EKKO.
DATA: WA_EKKO TYPE TY_EKKO,
IT_EKKO TYPE TABLE OF TY_EKKO.
END OF TY_EKPO.
DATA: WA_EKPO TYPE TY_EKPO,
IT_EKPO TYPE TABLE OF TY_EKPO.
END OF TY_LFA1.
DATA: WA_LFA1 TYPE TY_LFA1,
IT_LFA1 TYPE TABLE OF TY_LFA1.
DATA X TYPE EKKO-EBELN.
By Mr.Sunil
SELECT SINGLE EBELN FROM EKKO INTO X WHERE EBELN IN S_EBELN.
IF SY-SUBRC <> 0.
MESSAGE E000(ZMESSAGE1) WITH 'INVALID NUMBER'.
ENDIF.
START-OF-SELECTION.
select EBELN BEDAT BUKRS LIFNR from EKKO into table IT_EKKO where
EBELN IN S_EBELN.
LOOP AT IT_EKKO INTO WA_EKKO.
WRITE: WA_EKKO-EBELN, WA_EKKO-BEDAT, WA_EKKO-BUKRS, WA_EKKO-
LIFNR.
ENDLOOP.
AT LINE-SELECTION.
IF SY-LSIND = '1'.
GET CURSOR FIELD V2 VALUE V3.
IF V2 = 'WA_EKKO-EBELN'.
EXPORTING
INPUT = V3
IMPORTING
OUTPUT = V3.
SELECT EBELN EBELP MENGE MEINS NETPR FROM EKPO INTO TABLE
IT_EKPO WHERE EBELN = V3.
WRITE:/ WA_EKPO-EBELN, WA_EKPO-EBELP, WA_EKPO-MENGE,
WA_EKPO-MEINS, WA_EKPO-NETPR.
ENDLOOP.
ELSEIF V2 = 'WA_EKKO-LIFNR'.
EXPORTING
INPUT = V3
IMPORTING
OUTPUT = V3.
SELECT LIFNR NAME1 ORT01 FROM LFA1 INTO TABLE IT_LFA1 WHERE
LIFNR = V3.
LOOP AT IT_LFA1 INTO WA_LFA1.
WRITE:/ WA_LFA1-LIFNR, WA_LFA1-ORT01, WA_LFA1-NAME1.
ENDLOOP.
ENDIF.
ENDIF.
By Mr.Sunil
Working with menu painter: -
Menu painter is a tool to design the user interface to the program. The transaction code for menu painter is
SE41.
GUI Components: -
COMPONENTS OF GUI
GUI title
| GUI Status
Title bar Menu bar
Standard tool bar
Application tool bar
File Edit Goto Utilities ---- System Help Function keys
Menu bar
Standard tool bar
Title bar
Application tool bar
Note: - In the menu bar system & help are default menu items & we can create up to 6 menu items
[total 8 items].
Note: - We can design up to 35 buttons in the application tool bar.
Based on the given purchasing document numbers display the purchasing document numbers
document dates & vendor numbers as shown in the below & also design one download button in the
application tool bar. If the user clicks on download button then we download the display records
into presentation server.
Steps to create the GUI to the program: -

Execute SE41. Provide the program name. Provide the status (any name). Click on create. Provide the
short description. Enter.
Expand the function key and enabling the back button by providing BACK.
By Mr.Sunil
Expand the application tool bar. Provide the function code name. Double click on it. Enter. Provide
function text [Download]. Enter. Select the shortcut key. Enter. Repeat the same steps for all other
buttons. Save, check, activate.
Syntax of attaching our own GUI to the program: -

SET PF-STATUS <status name>.
Ex: - set pf-status STAT.
Note: - Download is the function module which is used to browse the file as well as download the data
from internal table to file. The input for the above function module is
1. File type DAT.
2. Data internal table.
Data V1 type EKKO-EBELN.
Select-options S_EBELN for V1.
Types: Begin of TY_EKKO,
End of TY_EKKO.
Data WA_EKKO type TY_EKKO.

Data IT_EKKO type table of TY_EKKO.
Select EBELN BEDAT LIFNR from EKKO INTO TABLE IT_EKKO where EBELN in
S_EBELN.
Loop at IT_EKKO into WA_EKKO.
Write: / WA_EKKO-EBELN, WA_EKKO-BEDAT, WA_EKKO-LIFNR.
Endloop.
Set PF-STATUS 'STAT'.
At user-command.
If SY-UCOMM = 'DOWN'.
CALL FUNCTION 'DOWNLOAD'
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_EKKO.
Endif.
Syntax of reading the displayed records:-
Read line <line number> field value <Displayed field name1> into <variable1>
<displayed field name2> into <variable2> ----.
Ex: -
Read line 3 field value WA_EKKO-EBELN into V1
WA_EKKO-BEDAT into V2
WA_EKKO-LIFNR into V3.
By Mr.Sunil
Based on the given sales document numbers display the sales document number, document dates
& customer numbers as shown in below.
If the user click on download button then we download

the selected records into presentation server. If the user
click on display button then we display the sales order
details through VA03 transaction. If the user click on
Selt all then select the all check boxes.
Some of the standard transaction codes: -

1. XK03 Display vendor
2. XD03 Display customer
3. MM03 Display material
4. ME53N Display purchase order
5. VA03 Display sales order
6. FB03 Display accounting document.
Note: - 1 Create 2 Change 3 Display

Syntax of call transaction: -
Call transaction <Tcode>.
Ex: -
Call transaction VA03.
Before call the transaction we must set the value set parameter ID <ID name> field <value>.
Steps to identify the parameter ID:-
Execute the transaction code place the cursor on input field. Click on F1. click on technical information
identify the parameter id.
Set parameter ID <ID Name> field <value>.
Ex: -
Parameter P_VBELN type VBAK-VBELN.
Set parameter ID AUN field P_VBELN.
CALL TRANSACTION VA03.
Note: - If you want to get the current document value which is opened.
Syntax: -
Get parameter ID <ID Name> field <Variable>.
Ex: -
Data v1 type vbak-vbeln.
Get parameter ID AUN field v1.
Write v1.
Note: - Set & get are called SAP memory & import, export, changing - - - are called ABAP memory.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - SY-INDEX is the system variable which contains the current loop pass.
Note: - SY-TABIX is the system variable which contains the exact line number of the record which is
moving from internal table to work area.
data: a, b.
DATA: V1 TYPE VBAK-VBELN, V2 TYPE VBAK-AUDAT.
DATA V TYPE SYLINNO.
tables vbak.
select-options s_vbeln for vbak-vbeln.
a type c,
end of ty_vbak.
data: wa_vbak type ty_vbak,
it_vbak type table of ty_vbak.
DATA: WA LIKE WA_VBAK,
IT LIKE TABLE OF WA.
s_vbeln.
loop at it_vbak into wa_vbak.
write:/ a as checkbox, wa_vbak-vbeln, wa_vbak-audat input, wa_vbak-
kunnr.
endloop.
V = SY-LINNO.
set pf-status 'STAT'.
AT USER-COMMAND.
IF SY-UCOMM = 'DOWN'.
DO V TIMES.
READ LINE SY-INDEX FIELD VALUE A INTO B
WA_VBAK-VBELN INTO WA-VBELN
WA_VBAK-AUDAT INTO WA-AUDAT
WA_VBAK-KUNNR INTO WA-KUNNR.
IF B = 'X'.
APPEND WA TO IT.
CLEAR WA.
ENDIF.
ENDDO.
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT.
REFRESH IT.
ELSEIF SY-UCOMM = 'SA'.
By Mr.Sunil
A = 'X'.
LOOP AT IT_VBAK INTO WA_VBAK.
WRITE:/ A AS CHECKBOX, WA_VBAK-VBELN, WA_VBAK-AUDAT, WA_VBAK-
KUNNR.
ENDLOOP.
ELSEIF SY-UCOMM = 'UPD'.
DO V TIMES.
WA_VBAK-VBELN INTO V1
WA_VBAK-AUDAT INTO V2.
IF B = 'X'.
UPDATE VBAK SET AUDAT = V2 WHERE VBELN = V1.
ENDIF.
ENDDO.
IF SY-SUBRC = 0.
MESSAGE S000(ZMESSAGE1) WITH 'UPDATED SUCCESSFULLY'.
ELSE.
MESSAGE E000(ZMESSAGE1) WITH 'NOT UPDATED'.
ENDIF.
ELSEIF SY-UCOMM = 'DIS'.
DO V TIMES.
WA_VBAK-VBELN INTO V1.
IF B = 'X'.
SET PARAMETER ID 'AUN' FIELD V1.
CALL TRANSACTION 'VA03' AND SKIP FIRST SCREEN.
ENDIF.
ENDDO.
ENDIF.
By Mr.Sunil
ALV (ABAP LIST VIEWERS): -
ALV is used to display the output with predefined functionalities. Like
1. Sort the list in ascending order
2. Sort the list in descending order
3. Tables
4. Filtering
5. Down the list
6. Send an attachment
7. Word processing
8. Excel sheet
9. Change the layout
10. Graphics
11. Print previews
AVL is introduced from 4.6C version onwards. ALV is used to display the data from internal table only.
Steps to work with ALV: -

1. Declare the final data internal table (which data we want to display) and implement the retrieving logic.
2. Prepare the field catalog (about the display field) i.e.

1. Filed name
2. Column position
3. Column Heading
4. Co lour
5. Hotspot
3. Call the REUSE_GRID_DISPLAY function module.
(OR)
CALL THE RESUE_ALV_LIST_DISPLAY function module.
Note: - REUSE_GIRD_DISPLAY is the function module which is used to display the output in a grid
format.
REUSE_ALV_LIST_DISPLAY is the function module which is used to display the output in a list
format.
The input for the above two functions modules are two internal tables.
1. Data internal table
2. Field Catalog internal table
Display the all sales documents details by using ALV.
Data IT_VBAP like table of VBAP.
Select * from VBAP into table IT_VBAP.
CALL FUNCTION 'REUSE_ALV_GRID_DISPLAY'
EXPORTING
I_STRUCTURE_NAME = 'VBAP'
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = IT_VBAP.
When ever we are working with all the fields from any one of the database table on structure, then
we no need to prepare field catalog internal table. We simply pass i_structure_name as data base
table name structure.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - Here the function module picks the column headings from the data element of each field
and also display the fields in the similar order of the fields in the table.
FILLING THE FIELD CATALOG
Some of the field catalog internal table: -

1. Field name Name of the field
2. Col_Pos Column position
3. Seltext_S
Seltext_M Column heading
Seltext_L
4. Emphasize Co lour
5. Output length Length of the output field
6. Hotspot Hand / Symbol
7. Edit Change mode
8. No-zero Remove the leading zeros
9. No-sign Remove the leading sign
10. No-out Hide the display field
11. Do-sum Calculate the total
12. Checkbox Checkbox
Note: - In slis we have one type i.e. SLIS_T_FIELDCAT_ALV which contains all the fields related to
field catalog internal table. So we simply declare our internal table by referring this.
Slis is the type group which contains all the types related to ALV.
Note: - When ever we are referring any type under any type group then we must include the type group
name by using type-pools keyword.
Steps to create type-pools: -

Execute SE11 & select the radio button type group. Provide the type group name (ZTG) & click on create.
Provide short description (Type group) & press enter. Select local object.
Note: - All the names under the group must be starts with type group name_ (underscore).
Type-pools ZTG.
Types: begin of ZTG_T001,
By Mr.Sunil
End of ZTG_T001. (IT)
Types ZTG_T_T001 type table of ZTG_T001. (WA)
Display the company codes, company names and cities.

Type-pools ZTG.
Data: it_t001 type ZTG_T_T001,
Wa_t001 like line of it_t001.
Write:/ wa_t001-bukrs, wa_t001-butxt, wa_t001-ort01.
Endloop.
Based on the given purchasing document number display the purchasing document numbers,
document dates and vendor numbers by using ALV and also display the purchasing document
number with yellow co lour, document date with edit and the vendor is hotspot.
Type-pools slis.
TABLES EKKO.
SELECT-OPTIONS S_EBELN FOR EKKO-EBELN.
* Declare the data internal table.

End of ty_ekko.
Data it_ekko type table of ty_ekko.
* Filling the data internal table.
Select ebeln Bedat lifnr from ekko into table it_ekko where ebeln
in s_ebeln.
* Declaring the field catalog.
Data: it_fcat type SLIS_T_FIELDCAT_ALV,
Wa_fcat like line of it_fcat.
* Filling the field catalog
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'EBELN'.
WA_FCAT-COL_POS = '1'.
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'PUR.DOC'.
WA_FCAT-EMPHASIZE = 'C310'.
APPEND WA_FCAT TO IT_FCAT.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
By Mr.Sunil
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'BEDAT'.
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'DOC.DT'.
WA_FCAT-EDIT = 'X'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'LIFNR'.
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'VENDOR'.
WA_FCAT-HOTSPOT = 'X'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
* Display the output
EXPORTING
It_fieldcat = it_fcat
TABLES
T_outtab = it_ekko.
REUSE_ALV_FIELDCATALOG_MERGE is the function module which is used to fill the filed catalog
internal table.
The input for the above function module is
Data work area.
Program name in where data work area is declared.
Field catalog internal table.
Program name, in where field catalog internal table is declared.
Note: - SY-CPROG is the system variable which contains current program name.
Note: - When ever we are working with merge function module then we must consider the following
things.
We never declare the data internal table by using TYPES keyword.
We never refer the data internal table fields by using type. Instead of type we use like.
We must maintain the code up to 72 columns.
By Mr.Sunil
Based on the given purchasing document number display the purchasing document numbers,
document dates and vendor numbers by using ALV and also display the purchasing document
number with yellow co lour, document date with edit and the vendor is hotspot by using hotspot
module.
After the merge function module the field catalog as shown in the below.
After merge function module we modify the field catalog based on the client requirement.
Note: - We cant modify the key fields directly first we remove the key then we modify it.
TYPE-POOLS SLIS.
TABLES EKKO.
DATA: BEGIN OF WA_EKKO,
EBELN LIKE EKKO-EBELN,
BEDAT LIKE EKKO-BEDAT,
LIFNR LIKE EKKO-LIFNR,
END OF WA_EKKO.
DATA IT_EKKO LIKE TABLE OF WA_EKKO.
SELECT EBELN BEDAT LIFNR FROM EKKO INTO TABLE IT_EKKO WHERE EBELN
IN S_EBELN.
DATA: IT_FCAT TYPE SLIS_T_FIELDCAT_ALV,
WA_FCAT LIKE LINE OF IT_FCAT.
CALL FUNCTION 'REUSE_ALV_FIELDCATALOG_MERGE'

EXPORTING
I_PROGRAM_NAME = SY-CPROG
I_INTERNAL_TABNAME = 'WA_EKKO'
I_INCLNAME = SY-CPROG
CHANGING
CT_FIELDCAT = IT_FCAT.
* Modify the field catalog based on requirement
WA_FCAT-KEY = 'X'.
MODIFY IT_FCAT FROM WA_FCAT TRANSPORTING KEY EMPHASIZE WHERE
FIELDNAME = 'EBELN'.
MODIFY IT_FCAT FROM WA_FCAT TRANSPORTING HOTSPOT WHERE
FIELDNAME = 'LIFNR'.
EXPORTING
IT_FIELDCAT = IT_FCAT
TABLES
By Mr.Sunil
T_OUTTAB = IT_EKKO.
Based on the given purchasing document numbers and dates to display the purchasing document
numbers document dates, vendor numbers, item numbers and price by using ALV.
TYPE-POOLS SLIS.
Tables EKKO.
Select-options s_ebeln for ekko-ebeln.
* Declare the data IT.
Types: Begin of ty_final,
Ebelp type ekpo-ebelp,
Netpr type ekpo-netpr,
End of ty_final.
Data it_final type table of ty_final.
Select ekko~ebeln ekko~bedat ekko~lifnr ekpo~ebelp ekpo~netpr into
table it_final from ekko inner join ekpo on ekko~ebeln = ekpo~ebeln
where ekko~ebeln in s_ebeln.
* Declare the field catalog.
Data: it_fcat type slis_t_fieldcat_alv,
* Filling the field catalog.
Wa_fcat-fieldname = 'EBELN'.
Wa_fcat-col_pos = '1'.
Wa_fcat-seltext_m = 'pur.doc'.
Append wa_fcat to it_fcat.
Clear wa_fcat.
Wa_fcat-fieldname = 'BEDAT'.
Wa_fcat-seltext_m = 'DOC DATE'.
Clear wa_fcat.
Wa_fcat-fieldname = 'LIFNR'.
Wa_fcat-seltext_m = 'VENDOR'.
Clear wa_fcat.
Wa_fcat-fieldname = 'EBELP'.
Wa_fcat-seltext_m = 'ITEM'.
Clear wa_fcat.
Wa_fcat-fieldname = 'NETPR'.
By Mr.Sunil
Wa_fcat-seltext_m = 'NETVALUE'.
Clear wa_fcat.
* Display output
CALL FUNCTION 'REUSE_ALV_LIST_DISPLAY'
EXPORTING
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = IT_FINAL.
By Mr.Sunil
EVENTS IN ALV
In ALV, events are handle through sub-routines (form, endform)
1. Top_of_page
2. Top_of_list
3. End_of_page
4. End_of_list
5. User_command
6. Pf_status_set
Top_of_page: -
Its an event which is triggered at the top of each page.
Top_of_list: -
Its an event which is triggered at the top of displayed output list.
End_of_page: -
Its an event which is triggered at the end of each page.
End_of_list: -
Its an event which is triggered at the end of displayed output list.
User_command: -
Its an event which is triggered at the time of user clicks on any record of any list as well as any
menu item.
This event acts like both at line-selection & at user-command.
Pf_status_set: -
Its an event which is triggered at the time of attaching our GUI to the program.
When ever we are working with events then we must declare an event internal table which contains 2
fields.
By Mr.Sunil
Event
Note: - In slis we have one type I.e. slis_t_event which contains the above fields. So we simply declare
the internal table by referring slis_t_event.
Based on the given company codes display the company codes, company names & customer
numbers by using ALV as shown in the below and also validate the company code.
Note: - We can also print the data in start-of-selection event when ever we are fetching the data from
(Data base). Then we must use end-of-selection to print the data.
Note: - When ever we are working with events then we must provide I_callback_program as current
program name in the grid or list display.
TYPE-POOLS SLIS.
TABLES T001.
DATA V TYPE T001-BUKRS.
SELECT-OPTIONS S_BUKRS FOR T001-BUKRS.
* Declare the final data IT.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_FINAL,
END OF TY_FINAL.
* Declare the event internal table.
DATA: IT_EVENT TYPE SLIS_T_EVENT,
WA_EVENT LIKE LINE OF IT_EVENT.
By Mr.Sunil
SELECT SINGLE BUKRS FROM T001 INTO V WHERE BUKRS IN S_BUKRS.
IF SY-SUBRC <> 0.
MESSAGE E000(ZMESSAGE1) WITH 'PLEASE SELECT VALID COMANY CODE'.
ENDIF.
* Filling the data internal table
SELECT T001~BUKRS T001~BUTXT KNB1~KUNNR INTO TABLE IT_FINAL FROM T001
INNER JOIN KNB1 ON T001~BUKRS = KNB1~BUKRS WHERE T001~BUKRS IN S_BUKRS.
* Filling field catalog
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'BUKRS'.
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'COCD'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'BUTXT'.
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'COMPANY NAME'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'KUNNR'.
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'CUSTOMER'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
* Filling event IT.
WA_EVENT-NAME = 'TOP_OF_PAGE'.
WA_EVENT-FORM = 'TOP'.
* Perform TOP
APPEND WA_EVENT TO IT_EVENT.
* Display output
EXPORTING
I_CALLBACK_PROGRAM = SY-CPROG
IT_EVENTS = IT_EVENT
TABLES
FORM TOP.
WRITE:/ 'ENRICH TECHNOLOGIES'.
WRITE:/ 'THESE ARE CUSTOMERS UNDER COMPANY'.
ENDFORM.
Note: - If you want to print the logo in the top of page then list display doesnt support. Only grid
display supports the logo, but we cant print the text in the top or bottom events by using write statements
in grid display.
REUSE_ALV_COMMENTARY_WRITE: -
Its the function module which is used to display the text top or bottom events.
The input for the above function module is an IT which contains two fields.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - In slis we have one type i.e. slis_t_listheader which contains the above two fields. So we
simply declare our internal table by reffering slis_t_listheader.
Based on the given purchasing document numbers display the purchasing document number,
document dates and vendor numbers by using ALV. As shown in the below.
Steps to upload the logo in ALV: -

Execute / OAER
Provide the class name is pictures
Class type as OT Fixed
Object by as Any name
Execute (F8).
Expand standard document types in the bottom window. Double click on screen. Browse the logo.
Enter.
Note: - If you want to print the logo then you must pass the object key name into commentary write
function module.
TYPE-POOLS SLIS.
TABLES EKKO.
By Mr.Sunil
KUNNR TYPE EKKO-KUNNR,
END OF TY_EKKO.
* Declaring the field catalog.
* Filling the data internal table.

SELECT EBELN BEDAT KUNNR FROM EKKO INTO TABLE IT_EKKO WHERE EBELN IN
S_EBELN.
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'PUR DOC'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'DOC DATE'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'CUSTOMER'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
* Declare two event internal tables.
* Filling the event IT.
WA_EVENT-NAME = 'TOP_OF_PAGE'.
WA_EVENT-FORM = 'TOP'.
* Perform TOP.
WA_EVENT-NAME = 'END_OF_LIST'.
WA_EVENT-FORM = 'END'.
* Display output
EXPORTING
By Mr.Sunil
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = IT_EKKO.
FORM TOP.
DATA: IT_LIST TYPE SLIS_T_LISTHEADER,
WA_LIST LIKE LINE OF IT_LIST.
WA_LIST-INFO = 'THESE ARE PO DETAILS'.
WA_LIST-TYP = 'H'.
APPEND WA_LIST TO IT_LIST.
WA_LIST-INFO = 'ENRICH TECHNOLOGIES'.
WA_LIST-TYP = 'S'.
APPEND WA_LIST TO IT_LIST.
CALL FUNCTION 'REUSE_ALV_COMMENTARY_WRITE'
EXPORTING
IT_LIST_COMMENTARY = IT_LIST
I_LOGO = 'SATISH'.
ENDFORM.
FORM END.
DATA: IT_LIST1 TYPE SLIS_T_LISTHEADER,
WA_LIST1 LIKE LINE OF IT_LIST1.
WA_LIST1-INFO = 'SR NAGAR'.
WA_LIST1-TYP = 'A'.
APPEND WA_LIST1 TO IT_LIST1.
CALL FUNCTION 'REUSE_ALV_COMMENTARY_WRITE'
EXPORTING
IT_LIST_COMMENTARY = IT_LIST1.
ENDFORM.
Syntax of calling subroutine for the event USER_COMMAND: -
Perform <form name> using sy-ucomm slis_selfied
Tab index
It contains code of user Value
selection menu item Field name
Syntax of definition: -
Form <form name> using <variable 1> like sy-ucomm <variable 2> type slis_selfied.
-----
-----
----- Field name Value Tab index
Endform
Based on the given company codes display the company codes, company names and vendors
under company as shown in below by using ALV and also print the company code with green color
along with hotspot.
By Mr.Sunil
Type-pools slis.
Tables vbak.
Select-options s_vbeln for vbak-vbeln.
Data v type vbap-vbeln.
BUKRS_VF TYPE VBAK-BUKRS_VF,
END OF TY_VBAK.
DATA: WA_VBAK TYPE TY_VBAK,
IT_VBAK TYPE TABLE OF TY_VBAK.
DATA: IT_VBAP TYPE TABLE OF VBAP,
WA_VBAP LIKE LINE OF IT_VBAP.
* Filling the date internal table.
Select vbeln audat kunnr bukrs_vf from vbak into table it_vbak where
vbeln in s_vbeln.
* Declare the field catalog
Data: it_fcat type slis_t_fieldcat_alv,
* Filling the field catalog.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'VBELN'.
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'SALES DOC'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'AUDAT'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
By Mr.Sunil
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'CUST NO'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'BUKRS_VF'.
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'COCD'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
* Declare the event IT.
Data: it_event type slis_t_event,
wa_event like line of it_event.
* Filling the event IT.
wa_event-name = 'USER_COMMAND'.
wa_event-form = 'UC'.
* Perform UC using sy-ucomm slis_selfield
Append wa_event to it_event.
* Display output
EXPORTING
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = IT_VBAK.
Form UC using A like sy-ucomm B type slis_selfield.
If B-fieldname = 'VBELN'.
V = B-VALUE.
EXPORTING
INPUT = V
IMPORTING
OUTPUT = V.
SELECT * FROM VBAP INTO TABLE IT_VBAP WHERE VBELN = V.
EXPORTING
I_STRUCTURE_NAME = 'VBAP'
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = IT_VBAP.
*read table it_vbak into wa_vbak index b-tabindex.
*select * from vbap into table it_vbap where vbeln = wa_vbak-vbeln.
* CALL FUNCTION 'REUSE_ALV_LIST_DISPLAY'
* EXPORTING
* I_STRUCTURE_NAME = 'VBAP'
* TABLES
* T_OUTTAB = IT_VBAP.
Endif.
Endform.
Note: - If the user clicks on any record then we display the sales document item details.
By Mr.Sunil
Read table it_vbak into wa_vbak index B-tabindex.
Select * from vbap into table it_vbap where vbeln = wa_vbak-vbeln.
CALL FUNCTION REUSER_ALV_LIST_DISPLAY
VBAP
IT_VBAP
Endform
Based on the given vendor numbers, display the purchase document numbers, document dates &
vendor numbers by using ALV & also display the purchase document numbers with yellow color. If
the user clicks on any purchasing document number only then we display the all the purchasing
document item details by using ALV.
Type-pools SLIS.
Tables EKKO.
Select-options s_EBELN for ekko-EBELN.
* Declare the data internal table
End of ty_ekko.
Data it_ekko type table of ty_ekko.
Data it_ekpo type table of ekpo.
* filling the data internal table
Select ebeln bedat lifnr from ekko into table it_ekko where ebeln in
s_ebeln.
Wa_fcat-seltext_m = 'PUR.DOC'.
Wa_fcat-emphasize = 'C310'.
Clear wa_fcat.
By Mr.Sunil
Clear wa_fcat.
Clear wa_fcat.
* Declare the event internal table
wa_event like line of it_event.
* Filling the event internal table
Wa_event-name = 'USER_COMMAND'.
WA_Event-form = 'UC'.
* Perform UC using sy-ucomm slis_selfield
EXPORTING
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = IT_EKKO.
FORM UC USING A LIKE SY-UCOMM B TYPE SLIS_SELFIELD.
IF B-fieldname = 'EBELN'.
Select * from ekpo into table it_ekpo where ebeln = B-value.
EXPORTING
I_STRUCTURE_NAME = 'EKPO'
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = IT_EKPO.
ENDIF.
ENDFORM.
LOGIC: -
WA_EVENT-NAME = USER_COMMAND. Field name (EBELN)
WA_EVENT-FORM = UC.
* PERFORM UC USING SY-UCOMM SLIS_SELFIELD Value (300012)
Append wa_event to it_event. Tabindex (4)
Call function REUSE_ALV_LIST_DISPLAY.
IT_EKKO
IT_FCAT
IT_EVENT
By Mr.Sunil
FORM UC USING A LIKE SY-UCOMM B TYPE SLIS_SELFIELD.
IF B-FIELDNAME = EBELN. Tabindex (4)
-----
- - - - - LOGIC Field name (EBELN)
----- Value (300012)
ENDIF.
ENDFORM.
Some of the standard transaction codes: -
1. XK03 Display the vendor
2. XD03 Display the customer
3. MM03 Display the material
4. ME23N Display purchasing order
5. VA03 Display sales order
6. FB03 Display the accounting document
Note: - 1 create 2 change 3 display
Syntax of call the transaction: -
Call transaction <transaction code>
If you want to skip the first screen: -
Call transaction <transaction code> and skip first screen.
Syntax of set the value before call the transaction: -
Set parameter id <IDNAME> field <VALUE>.
Steps to identify the parameter id at transaction: -

Execute the transaction code XK03. Place the customer on input field. Click on technical information.
Identify the parameter id.
EX: -
Parameter p_lifnr type lfa1-lifnr.
Set parameter id LIF field p_lifnr.
Call transaction XK03 and skip first screen.
Based on the given sales document numbers to display the sales doc numbers, document dates &
customer numbers by using ALV & also display the sales document number with green color. If the
user clicks on any sales document only then we display the sales order details through VA03
transaction. If the user clicks on any customer number only then we display the customer details
through XD03 transaction.
* Declare select-options
* Declare data internal table, field catalog, event internal table
* Fill the data internal table
* Fill the field catalog
Wa_event-name = USER_COMMAND.
Wa_event-form = UC.
* Perform UC using SY-UCOMM SLIS_SELFIELD.
Field name (VBELN) Value (4972)

Tabindex (4)
Call function REUSE_ALV_LIST_DISPLAY
SY-CPROG
By Mr.Sunil
IT_VBAK
IT_FCAT
IT_EVENT
FORM ABC USING A LIKE SY-UCOMM B TYPE SLIS_SELFIELD.

IF B-FIELDNAME = 'VBELN'.
set parameter id 'AUN' field B-value.
call transaction 'VA03' and skip first screen.
Endif.
ENDFORM.
Based on the given purchasing document numbers, display the purchasing document numbers,
document dates & vendor numbers by using ALV. If the user clicks on any record then we display
the purchasing document details through ME23N transaction.
Wa_event-name = USER_COMMAND.
Wa_event-form = XYZ.
* Perform XYZ using sy-ucomm slis_selfield.
Field name (BEDAT) Value (31.03.2010) Tabindex (4)

Call function REUSE_ALV_LIST_DISPLAY
IT_EKKO
IT_FCAT
IT_EVENT
Form XYZ using A like sy-ucomm B type slis_selfield.
Field name (BEDAT) Value (31.03.2010) Tabindex (4)
Read table it_ekko into wa_ekko index

b-tabindex.
Set parameter id BES field wa_ekko-
ebeln.
Call transaction ME23N.
Endform.
Syntax of calling subroutine for the

pf_status_set event: -
Perform <form name> using
slis_t_extab.
Syntax of definition: -
By Mr.Sunil
Form <form name> using <variable 1> type slis_t_extab.
-----
----- logic
-----
Endform.
Note: - When ever we are working with ALV then we never create our own GUI to the program we
always copy the existing GUI from SAPLKKBL standard program.
If you create our own GUI to the existing functionality will loss. (Sorted list in ascending, in
descending - - - ).
Based on the given purchasing document number display the purchasing document number,
document dates and vendor numbers as shown in the below by using ALV. Here also attach display
button in the application tool bar.
If the user click on display button then we display the selected check box purchasing doc details through
ME23N transaction.
Steps to copy the existing GUI: -
Execute SE41. Click on copy status in the application tool bar (copy status). Provide from program
SAPLKKBL. Select the status STANDARD_FULLSCREEN. Provide to program (ZREPO12), Status
(STAT). Click on copy and enter. Open our status in change mode. Expand the application tool bar.
Provide transaction code for additional button (DIS) where the place is available. Double click on it and
press enter. Provide the function text (Display). Click on enter. Select the shortcut key. Enter. Save, check
and activate GUI.
Type-pools slis.
Tables ekko.
* Declare the data IT.
Data: begin of wa_ekko,
Chk,
End of wa_ekko.
Data it_ekko like table of wa_ekko.
* Filling the data IT.
IN S_EBELN.
By Mr.Sunil
* Filling field catalog.
Wa_fcat-fieldname = 'CHK'.
Wa_fcat-COL_POS = '1'.
Wa_fcat-seltext_m = ' '.
Wa_fcat-checkbox = 'X'.
Wa_fcat-edit = 'X'.
Wa_fcat-outputlen = '3'.
Clear wa_fcat.
Wa_fcat-seltext_m = 'PUR DOC'.
Clear wa_fcat.
Clear wa_fcat.
Clear wa_fcat.
* Declare the event IT.
Wa_event like line of it_event.
wa_event-name = 'PF_STATUS_SET'.
wa_event-form = 'GUI'.
* Perform GUI using slis_t_extab
clear wa_event.
Wa_event-name = 'USER_COMMAND'.
Wa_event-form = 'UC'.
* Perform UC using sy-ucomm slis_selftext
EXPORTING
I_callback_program = sy-cprog
It_fieldcat = it_fcat
It_events = it_event
TABLES
T_outtab = it_ekko.
Form GUI using M type slis_t_extab.

Set pf-status 'STAT'.
Endform.
By Mr.Sunil
If A = 'DIS'.
Read table it_ekko into wa_ekko index b-tabindex.
Set parameter id 'RES' field wa_ekko-ebeln.
CALL TRANSACTION 'ME23N' and skip first screen.
ENDIF.
ENDFORM.
Table Maintenance Generator: -
This is used to create the user interface to the data base table to perform the DML operations
(Insert, Update, Modify) without any code.
Some of the fields in layout WA: -
Colwidth_optimize Compress the displayed field
Zebra Stripped pattern
Info_fieldname colour field.
Note: - In slis we have one type I.e. slis_layout_alv which contains all the fields related to layout work
area. So we simply declare our layout work area by referring above type.
I Structure
IS Work area
CT
IT Internal table
T
Blocked ALV
Blocked ALV: -
Blocked ALV is used to display the output in a block wise.
Steps to work with blocked ALV: -
1. Initialize the blocked ALV by using REUSE_ALV_BLOCK_LIST_INIT function module. The
input for the above function module is current program name.
2. Append the data IT to the blocked ALV by using REUSE_ALV_BLOCK_LIST_APPEND
function module. The input for the above function module is
1. <Data IT>
2. <Field catalog IT>
3. <event IT> Dummy also ok
4. <Layout WA>
3. Display the data in blocked ALV by using REUSE_ALV_BLOCK_LIST_DISPLAY function
module.
Based on the given purchasing document numbers display the purchasing document header
(EBELN, BEDAT, LIFNR) and item (EBELN EBELP MENGE MEINS NETPR) details by using
blocked ALV as shown in the below.
By Mr.Sunil
REPORT ZREPORT2007.
TYPE-POOLS SLIS.
TABLES EKKO.
* Declare data IT (EKKO, EKPO)
END OF TY_EKKO.
END OF TY_EKPO.
* Filling the data IT.

IN S_EBELN.
IF IT_EKKO IS NOT INITIAL.
SELECT EBELN EBELP MENGE MEINS NETPR FROM EKPO INTO TABLE IT_EKPO
FOR ALL ENTRIES IN IT_EKKO WHERE EBELN = IT_EKKO-EBELN.
ENDIF.
* Declare the field catalogs

DATA: IT_FCAT1 TYPE SLIS_T_FIELDCAT_ALV,
WA_FCAT1 LIKE LINE OF IT_FCAT1.

CLEAR WA_FCAT.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
By Mr.Sunil
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT1-FIELDNAME = 'EBELN'.
WA_FCAT1-COL_POS = '1'.
WA_FCAT1-SELTEXT_M = 'PUR DOC'.
APPEND WA_FCAT1 TO IT_FCAT1.
CLEAR WA_FCAT1.
WA_FCAT1-FIELDNAME = 'EBELP'.
WA_FCAT1-SELTEXT_M = 'ITME'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT1.
WA_FCAT1-FIELDNAME = 'MENGE'.
WA_FCAT1-SELTEXT_M = 'QTY'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT1.
WA_FCAT1-FIELDNAME = 'MEINS'.
WA_FCAT1-SELTEXT_M = 'UOM'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT1.
WA_FCAT1-FIELDNAME = 'NETPR'.
WA_FCAT1-SELTEXT_M = 'NET PRICE'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT1.
* Declare the event IT
DATA: IT_EVENT1 TYPE SLIS_T_EVENT,
WA_EVENT1 LIKE LINE OF IT_EVENT1.
* Declare the layout WA (2).

DATA WA_LAYOUT TYPE SLIS_LAYOUT_ALV.
DATA WA_LAYOUT1 TYPE SLIS_LAYOUT_ALV.
* Initialize the blocked ALV.

CALL FUNCTION 'REUSE_ALV_BLOCK_LIST_INIT'
EXPORTING
I_CALLBACK_PROGRAM = SY-CPROG.
CALL FUNCTION 'REUSE_ALV_BLOCK_LIST_APPEND'
EXPORTING
IS_LAYOUT = WA_LAYOUT
By Mr.Sunil
I_TABNAME = 'WA_EKKO'
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = IT_EKKO.

EXPORTING
IS_LAYOUT = WA_LAYOUT1
IT_FIELDCAT = IT_FCAT1
I_TABNAME = 'WA_EKPO'
IT_EVENTS = IT_EVENT1
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = IT_EKPO.
* Display output.
CALL FUNCTION 'REUSE_ALV_BLOCK_LIST_DISPLAY'.
Steps to work with row colour: -

1. Declare the one additional colour field in the data IT, which is char and length 4.
2. Fill the data IT based on given input.
3. Modify the colour field based on the requirement.
4. Pass the colour field name into layout WA (info_field name).
5. Fill the field catalog (not colour field)
6. Display output
Based on the given purchasing document no, display the purchase document numbers, item
numbers, quantity, unit of measurement, net prize by using ALV & also display the line item details
in red colour if the amt is more than 1000.
type-pools slis.
tables ekpo.
select-options s_ebeln for ekpo-ebeln.
types: begin of ty_ekpo,
ebeln type ekpo-ebeln,
ebelp type ekpo-ebelp,
menge type ekpo-menge,
meins type ekpo-meins,
netpr type ekpo-netpr,
xyz(4) type c,
end of ty_ekpo.
data: wa_ekpo type ty_ekpo,
it_ekpo type table OF ty_ekpo.
data: it_fcat type slis_t_fieldcat_alv,
By Mr.Sunil
wa_fcat like line of it_fcat.
* Delcare the layout
data wa_layout type slis_layout_alv.
* Fill the layout wa.
wa_layout-info_fieldname = 'XYZ'.
select ebeln ebelp menge meins netpr from ekpo into table it_ekpo where
ebeln in s_ebeln.
wa_fcat-fieldname = 'EBELN'.
wa_fcat-col_pos = '1'.
wa_fcat-seltext_m = 'PUR DOC'.
append wa_fcat to it_fcat.
clear wa_fcat.
wa_fcat-fieldname = 'EBELP'.
wa_fcat-seltext_m = 'ITEM'.
clear wa_fcat.
wa_fcat-fieldname = 'MENGE'.
wa_fcat-seltext_m = 'QTY'.
clear wa_fcat.
wa_fcat-fieldname = 'MEINS'.
wa_fcat-seltext_m = 'UOM'.
clear wa_fcat.
wa_fcat-fieldname = 'NETPR'.
wa_fcat-seltext_m = 'NET PRICE'.
clear wa_fcat.
* Modify the color field

wa_ekpo-xyz = 'C610'.
modify it_ekpo from wa_ekpo transporting XYZ where NETPR > 1000.

EXPORTING
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = IT_EKPO.
By Mr.Sunil
HIERARCHICAL ALV
Hierarchical ALV is used to display the header and item details in a hierarchical manner.
Note: - REUSE_ALV_HIERSEQ_LIST_DISPLAY is the function module which is used to display

the header and item details in a hierarchical manner.
Two data IT (Header of item)
Only one field catalog IT
Key info WA
Link field between header and item table
Key info WA contains link fields between the header and item table.
EKKO
EKPO EBELN key info wa
Fields in key info WA: -

Header 01
Item 01
Header 02
Item 02
Header 05
Item 05
Note: - In slis we have one type I.e. SLIS_KEYINFO_ALV which contains above fields. So we
simply declare our IT by referring SLIS_KEYINFO_ALV.
Ex: -
EKKO MARD WERKS

EBELN
EKPO T001L LGORT
HEADER 01 = EBELN HEADER 01 = WERKS

ITEM01 = EBELN ITEM 01 = WERKS
HEADER 02 = LGORT
ITEM 02 = LGORT.
Note: - When ever we are working with hierarchical ALV then we must maintain link fields in between
header and item internal table.
Note: - When ever we are working with hierarchical ALV then we must fill the field catalog IT.
1. REUSE_ALV_LIST_DISPLAY
2. REUSE_ALV_GRID_DISPLAY
3. REUSE_ALV_HIERSEQ_LIST_DISPLAY
By Mr.Sunil
4. REUSE_ALV_COMMENTARY_WRITE
5. REUSE_ALV_BLOCK_LIST_DISPLAY
6. REUSE_ALV_FIELD CATALOG_MERGE
1. SLIS_T_FIELDCAT_ALV
2. SLIS_T_ALV
3. SLIS_T_LIST HEADER
4. SLIS_SELFIELD
5. SLIS_T_EXTAB
6. SLIS_LAYOUT_ALV
7. SLIS_KEYINFO_ALV
Based on the given purchasing
document number display the
purchasing document (EBELN,
BEDAT, LIFNR) & purchasing
document item details (EBELP,
MENGE, MEINS, NETPR) in
hierarchical manner as shown in the
below by using ALV.
Type-pools slis.
Tables ekko.
* Declare the data IT (IT_EKKO, IT_EKPO)
END OF TY_EKKO.
END OF TY_EKPO.
IN S_EBELN.
WHERE EBELN IN S_EBELN.
data: it_fcat type slis_t_fieldcat_alv,
wa_fcat like line of it_fcat.
By Mr.Sunil
WA_FCAT-TABNAME = 'IT_EKKO'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-TABNAME = 'IT_EKPO'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'EBELP'.
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'ITME'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'MENGE'.
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'QTY'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'MEINS'.
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'UOM'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'NETPR'.
WA_FCAT-SELTEXT_M = 'NETPRICE'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
By Mr.Sunil
* Declare the key info WA
Data wa_key type slis_keyinfo_alv.
* Filling the key info WA.
Wa_key-header01 = 'EBELN'.
Wa_key-item01 = 'EBELN'.
* Display output
CALL FUNCTION 'REUSE_ALV_HIERSEQ_LIST_DISPLAY'
EXPORTING
I_TABNAME_HEADER = 'IT_EKKO'
I_TABNAME_ITEM = 'IT_EKPO'
IS_KEYINFO = WA_KEY
TABLES
T_OUTTAB_HEADER = IT_EKKO
T_OUTTAB_ITEM = IT_EKPO.
Differences between GRID & LIST display: -
Note: - When ever we are working with ALV Repots in real time then we must pass layout WA.
Data wa_layout type slis_layout_alv.
Wa_layout-colwidth_optimize = X.
Wa_layout-zebra = X.
Steps to identify the fields in field catalog: -

Execute SE37. Open any one of the ALV function module. Example is REUSE_ALV_LIST_DISPLAY.
Click on import tab against the field catalog, double click on associated type. Double click on their
reference types. Double click on includes. Absorb the fields in field catalog.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - When ever we are filling the field catalog manually, if you want to refer the database table, field
description to print as a heading then we use following fields in field catalog.
Ref_fieldname
Ref_tabname.
EX: -
Wa_fcat-fieldname = VBELN.
Wa_fcat-col_pos = 1.
Wa_fcat-ref_tabname = VBAK.
Wa_fcat-ref_fieldname = VBELN.
Clear wa_fcat.
By Mr.Sunil
Transaction / Dialog pool programming / Module Pool Programming: -
A transaction is the collection of sequential screens which accept the input & display the output.
Its also called as Dialog Pool Programming since we have interaction between screens. Its also called as
Module Pool Programming because the flow logic of each screen acts as a module. So its a pool of
module.
Note: - A transaction code contains either executable program or module pool program.
Differences between executable program, module pool program: -
Steps to create transaction code for executable program: -

Execute SE93. Provide the transaction code. Click on create. Provide short text. Select the radio button
program and selection screen. Enter. Provide the program name. Select the GUI check boxes. Save.
Check.
Note: - In the real time when ever we develop a new object other than enhancement then we must create
transaction code.
Steps to work with module pool program: -
1. Create a module pool program (in SE38) & implement the logic.
2. Design the required screens (in SE51) & attached to the program.
3. Design the required menus (in SE41) & attached to screen.
4. Design the database tables (in SE11) & as per client requirement.
5. Create the transaction code (in SE93) & run the module pool program.
These 5 steps, we can work with single transaction. I.e. SE80 (Object Navigator).
Steps to create the module pool program: -
Step 1: -
By Mr.Sunil
Execute SE80. Click on Edit object in the application tool bar. Click on program tab. Provide program
name. Click on create. Remove the check box TOP INCL. Click on enter. Select the type is module pool.
Enter. Click on save, local object. Select the program name. Provide program name in left panel. Enter,
save.
Step 2: -
Execute SE38. Provide the program name. Click on create. Provide title. Select the type is module pool.
Click on save, local object. Click on display object list in the application tool bar.
Working with screen painter: -
Screen painter is a tool which contains both the graphical as well as alpha numeric mode. The transaction
code for screen painter is SE51.
Components of screen painter: -

1. Attributes
2. Layout
3. Element list
4. Flow logic editor
Attributes: -
Attributes specify the type of the screen whether its a normal sub screen or model dialog box.
Layout: -
Layout is the collection of screen elements. I.e. check box, radio button, input output field, push button,
table control, tab strip, etc.
Element list: -
Element list contains the screen elements which are designed on the screen & their data types & lengths.
Flow logic editor: -
Flow logic editor contains the logic related to the screen.
Events in flow logic editor: -

1. PBO (Process Before Output)
2. PAI (Process After Input)
3. POV (Process On Value-request)
4. POH (Process On Help-request)
PBO: -
Its an event which is triggered before display the screen.
ADV: - This is used to provide the default values to the screen.
PAI: -
It's an event which is triggered after provide the input to the screen.
ADV: - This is used to implement the logic.
POV: -
It's an event which is triggered at the time of user clicks on F4 button.
ADV: - This is used to provide the list of possible values to the input variable.
POH: -
It's an event which is triggered at the time of user clicks on F1 button.
ADV: - This is used to provide the help document to the input variable.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - The communication between flow logic editor to ABAP editor is always through screen
elements. I.e. each element in the screen we must declare on equality declaration in ABAP editor.
Steps to work with module pool program as per ABAPer point of view: -
1. Create the module pool program
2. Design the required screens
3. Maintain the equality declaration in ABAP editor
4. Maintain or implement the PBO and PAI logics of each screen
5. Create the transaction code to run the program
Design the screen as shown in the below.
After the user provide the input1 and input2 click on addition
button then we display the output in the result field. If the user
clicks on back button then we go to program.
Note: - If we are
working with only one
screen then the back
button functionality of
the screen is either
leave to screen 0 or
leave program.
If we are working with more than one screen then the back button functionality of the first screen is leave
program, from second screen on wards leave to screen 0.
Design the screen: -

Select the program in left panel. Right click on it. Create screen. Provide screen number (4
digit). Enter. Provide short description. Click on save. Click on layout in the application tool bar. Design
the screen abaper client requirement.
Screen designing: -
Select the text field screen element. Draw it. Double click on it. Provide the name, text. Select the
input output field screen element. Draw it. Double click on it. Provide the name. Identify the data type &
length. Repeat the same steps for all other fields. Select the push button screen element. Draw it. Double
click on it. Provide the name, text, function code. Repeat the same steps for back button. Select the box
screen element. Draw it.
Steps to activate the program: -
Double click on program in the left panel. Right click Activate. Enter.
Steps to create the transaction code: -
By Mr.Sunil
Select the program in the left panel. Right click, create transaction. Provide the transaction
code, short description. Enter. Provide the program name, screen number. Select the GUI checkbox. Save.
Steps to execute the program: -

Select the transaction code in the left panel. Right click execute direct processing.
Programming: -
DATA A(10) TYPE C.
DATA B(10) TYPE C.
DATA C(10) TYPE C.
MODULE USER_COMMAND_2000 INPUT.
IF SY-UCOMM = 'ADD'.
C = A + B.
WRITE C.
ELSEIF SY-UCOMM = 'BACK'.
LEAVE PROGRAM.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
Flow logic of 2000 screen: -
PROCESS BEFORE OUTPUT.
* MODULE STATUS_2000.
PROCESS AFTER INPUT.
MODULE USER_COMMAND_2000.
Design the screen as shown in the below. After the
user provide the company code, name & city,
click on insert button then we insert company
details into T001 data base table if the user
clicks on back button then we come back to
program.
Steps to design the screen: -
Click on layout in the application tool bar.

If the fields are coming from any data base table
or work area then click on dictionary / program
field icon (F6) in the standard tool bar. Provide
the table name. Enter. It displays the all fields.
Select our required fields. Click on OK & place
on the screen. & design the rest of the buttons.
Programming: -
IF SY-UCOMM = 'INS'.
INSERT T001 FROM T001.
IF SY-SUBRC = 0.
MESSAGE S000(ZMESSAGE1)
WITH 'INSERTED SUCCESSFULLY'.
ELSE.
MESSAGE E000(ZMESSAGE1) WITH 'NOT INSERTED'.
ENDIF.
By Mr.Sunil
LEAVE PROGRAM.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
Design the screen as shown in the below. After the user provide the company code & click on
display button then we display the customers under company details (BUKRS, KUNNR, AKONT)
like ordinary report.
Note: - If you want to display the output like ordinary report then we must place leave to list processing
before display the output.
DATA A TYPE KNB1-BUKRS.
END OF TY_KNB1.

IF SY-UCOMM = 'DIS'.
SELECT BUKRS KUNNR AKONT FROM KNB1 INTO TABLE IT_KNB1 WHERE BUKRS =
A.
LEAVE TO LIST-PROCESSING.
LOOP AT IT_KNB1 INTO WA_KNB1.
WRITE:/ WA_KNB1-BUKRS, WA_KNB1-KUNNR, WA_KNB1-AKONT.
ENDLOOP.
LEAVE PROGRAM.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
Working with table control: -
Table control is used to display the
multiple records in a tabular format.
Syntax of declaring the table control in

ABAP editor: -
Controls <table control name> type table
view using screen <screen no>. In which screen, table
control is available
Design the screen as shown in the
below.
After the user provide the purchasing doc

number in the 1000s screen & click on
display button then we display the
purchasing document item details in a
tabular format in 2000s screen.
By Mr.Sunil
Steps to design table control: -
Select the table control screen element & draw it. Double click on it. Provide the name. Select vertical,
horizontal check boxes, multiple radio buttons. Click on dictionary / program fields button (F6). Provide
the table name. Select the required fields. Click on OK & place it top right. Double click on each input
field. Provide the name as wa_ekpo-ebeln, wa_ekpo-ebelp, wa_ekpo-meins, and wa_ekpo-netpr like this.
Design the back button. Save.
Syntax of transferring the data from internal table to table control in the flow logic editor: -
Loop at <IT> into <WA> with control <table control> cursor <table control> - current_line.
Module <module name>. This is not required, if we are maintain
Endloop. table control field names & work area field
names are same.
Note: - When ever we are working with loop & endloop in any one of the event then we must declare a
dummy loop & endloop in another event.
CONTROLS TBC TYPE TABLEVIEW USING SCREEN 2000.
DATA A TYPE EKPO-EBELN.
DATA: BEGIN OF WA_EKPO,
END OF WA_EKPO.
DATA IT_EKPO LIKE TABLE OF WA_EKPO.
WHERE EBELN = A.
CALL SCREEN 2000.
LEAVE PROGRAM.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
IF SY-UCOMM = 'BAK'.
LEAVE TO SCREEN 0.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
Flow logic of 1000 screen:-
LOOP AT IT_EKPO INTO WA_EKPO WITH CONTROL TBC CURSOR TBC-CURRENT_LINE.
By Mr.Sunil
ENDLOOP.
LOOP.
ENDLOOP.
In the work area field names, table control field names are different suppose V1, V2, V3, V4, V5.
PBO of 2000: -
Loop at it_ekpo into wa_ekpo with control TC cursor TC-current_line.
Module xyz.
Endloop.
Program: -
Module xyz output.
V1 = wa_ekpo-ebeln.
V2 = wa_ekpo-ebelp.
V3 = wa_ekpo-menge.
V4 = wa_ekpo-meins.
V5 = wa_ekpo-netpr.
Endmodule.
After the user provide the company code & city

on display button then we display the customers
under company details in a tabular format in
2000 screen. If the user clicks on download
button in 2000 screen then we download the
selected records into presentation server.
Note: - In the PAI dummy loop & endloop

acts like loop at table control.
Steps to provide the check box to the table

control: -
Double click on table control. Provide the name.
provide the vertical, horizontal check boxes,
multiple radio buttons. Select the w/SelColumn
check box & provide the cheek box name.
CONTROLS TBC TYPE TABLEVIEW

USING SCREEN 2000.
DATA CHK.
DATA A TYPE KNB1-BUKRS.
DATA: BEGIN OF WA_KNB1,
END OF WA_KNB1.
By Mr.Sunil
DATA IT_KNB1 LIKE TABLE OF WA_KNB1.
DATA IT LIKE IT_KNB1.
SELECT BUKRS KUNNR AKONT FROM KNB1 INTO TABLE IT_KNB1 WHERE
BUKRS = A.
CALL SCREEN 2000.
LEAVE PROGRAM.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
IF SY-UCOMM = 'DOWN'.
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT.
ELSEIF SY-UCOMM = 'BAK'.
LEAVE TO SCREEN 0.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
MODULE XYZ INPUT.

IF CHK = 'X'.
APPEND WA_KNB1 TO IT.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
LOOP AT IT_KNB1 INTO WA_KNB1 WITH CONTROL TBC CURSOR TBC-
CURRENT_LINE.
ENDLOOP.
LOOP.
MODULE XYZ.
ENDLOOP.
Steps to provide the mask to the particular field: -
Double click on the field in the pop of window. Click on program tab in attributes block. Select the input
field is NOT POSSIBLE.
Steps to provide the input field is mandatory: -

Double click on the field in the pop of window. Click on program tab in attributes block. Select the input
field is REQUIRED.
Working with POV: -
By Mr.Sunil
POV is an event which is triggered at the time of user clicks on F4 button. This is used to provide the list
of possible values.
Note: - F4IF_INT_TABLE_VALUE_REQUEST is function module which is used to provide the F4

help to the input variable. The input for the above function module is
F4IF_INT_TABLE_VALUE_REQUEST
<DATA INTERNAL TABLE> (which data we want to provide F4 help)

<Return field in the data internal table>
<Field name> (for which field, we want to provide F4)
<Screen number>
<Program name>
<Value_ORG> = S

If the user click on F4 button then we display the all
company codes & company names as F4. After user select
the company code & click on display button then we
display the customers under company details (BUKRS,
KUNNR, AKONT) like a ordinary report. If the user click
on BACK button then we come back to program.
Steps of module in POV event: -
Field <field name> module <module name>.
For which field we want to provide F4.

DATA A TYPE T001-BUKRS.
DATA: BEGIN OF WA_KNB1,
END OF WA_KNB1.
DATA IT_KNB1 LIKE TABLE OF WA_KNB1.
DATA: BEGIN OF WA_T001,
END OF WA_T001.
DATA IT_T001 LIKE TABLE OF WA_T001.
SELECT BUKRS KUNNR AKONT FROM KNB1 INTO TABLE IT_KNB1 WHERE
BUKRS = A.
LEAVE TO LIST-PROCESSING.
ENDLOOP.
By Mr.Sunil
LEAVE PROGRAM.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
MODULE XYZ INPUT.
SELECT BUKRS BUTXT FROM T001 INTO TABLE IT_T001.
CALL FUNCTION 'F4IF_INT_TABLE_VALUE_REQUEST'
EXPORTING
RETFIELD = 'BUKRS'
DYNPPROG = 'ZMPPR6'
DYNPNR = '1000'
DYNPROFIELD = 'A'
VALUE_ORG = 'S'
TABLES
VALUE_TAB = IT_T001.
ENDMODULE.

PROCESS ON VALUE-REQUEST.
FIELD A MODULE XYZ.
Working with menu painter: -
Its a tool to design the user interface to the program the transaction code for menu painter is SE41.
GUI Components
GUI Title
Note: - The PBO of each screen contains by default GUI title & GUI status.
Working with sub screen
areas: -
Sub screen area must be
placed in normal screen only.
Each sub screen area can call
only one sub screen at a time.
Design the screen as

shown in the below.
Syntax of calling the sub

screen from sub screen
area: -
By Mr.Sunil
Call subscreen <subscreen area name> including <program name> <screen number>.
Ex: -
Call subscreen SA1 including SY-REPID 0100.
Note: - SY-REPID is the system variable which contains the current program name.
Steps to design the back button (working with GUI): -
Remove the comment of module in the PBO event. Double click on module name. By default it contains
GUI status & GUI title. Uncomment the PF-Status. Provide the status name. Double click on it. Provide
the short description. Enter. Expand the function keys. Enable the back button. Save, check, activate the
GUI. Click on back.
Note: - If you want to navigate to subscreens from normal screen then we must call the subscreen area
names in the PAI of normal screen.
TABLES: T001, KNA1.
MODULE STATUS_1000 OUTPUT.
SET PF-STATUS 'STAT'.
ENDMODULE.
IF SY-UCOMM = 'BACK'.
LEAVE TO SCREEN 0.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
IF SY-UCOMM = 'SAV'.
INSERT KNA1 FROM KNA1.
IF SY-SUBRC = 0.
MESSAGE S000(ZMESSAGE1) WITH 'SAVED SUCCESSFULLY'.
ELSE.
MESSAGE E000(ZMESSAGE1) WITH 'NOT SAVED'.
ENDIF.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
IF SY-SUBRC = 0.
MESSAGE S000(ZMESSAGE1) WITH 'INSERTED SUCCESSFULLY'.
ELSE.
ENDIF.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
Flow logic of 1000 screen.
MODULE STATUS_1000.
CALL SUBSCREEN: SA1 INCLUDING SY-REPID '2000',
SA2 INCLUDING SY-REPID '3000'.
By Mr.Sunil
CALL SUBSCREEN: SA1, SA2.
Working with tab strip: -
Strip of tabs.
Each tab must contain at least one sub screen
area.
Each sub screen area can call only one sub
screen at a time.
By default tab strip contains 2 tabs.
Only one tab is always activated.
Syntax of declaring the tab strip in ABAP editor:-
Controls <table strip name> type tabstrip.
Note: - When ever we are working with tabstrip then
its better to maintain tab name & function code of the
tab name same.
Syntax of activate the tab: -
<tabstrip name> - Active tab = <tab name>.
Steps to design the strip control: -
Select the tabstrip control screen element. Draw it. Double click on it. Provide the name (TBS). Provide
number of tab titles. Double click on tab1. Provide the name of tab1 (TAB1), provide the text function
code as tab1(Company). Select the subscreen area screen element. Draw it. Double click on it. Provide the
name(SA1). Repeat the steps for all the tabs.
CONTROLS TBS TYPE TABSTRIP.
TABLES: T001, KNA1.
LEAVE TO SCREEN 0.
ELSEIF SY-UCOMM = 'TAB1'.
TBS-ACTIVETAB = 'TAB1'.
ELSEIF SY-UCOMM = 'TAB2'.
TBS-ACTIVETAB = 'TAB2'.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
ENDMODULE.
By Mr.Sunil
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
IF SY-UCOMM = 'SAV'.
INSERT KNA1 FROM KNA1.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
MODULE STATUS_1000.
CALL SUBSCREEN: SA1 INCLUDING SY-REPID '0100',
SA2 INCLUDING SY-REPID '0200'.
CALL SUBSCREEN: SA1, SA2.
Working with drop down list: -

Note: - VRM_SET_VALUES is the function module which is used to provide the drop down list to
the input variable. The input for the above function module is ID (fieldname, for which field we want to
provide dropdown), TEXT (Data Internal Table).
Note: - In VRM, we have one type that is VRM_VALUES which contains the above two fields. So we
simply declare our internal table by referring VRM_VALUES.
Design the screen as shown in the

below.
Note: - At the time of designing the
screen double click on the drop down field
& select the drop down as list box with key
in the pop up window.
Note: - T005T is the standard data base
table which contains all the country keys &
country names.
TYPE-POOLS VRM.
TABLES T001.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_T005T,
LAND1 TYPE T005T-LAND1,
LANDX TYPE T005T-LANDX,
END OF TY_T005T.
DATA: WA_T005T TYPE TY_T005T,
IT_T005T TYPE TABLE OF TY_T005T.

By Mr.Sunil
DATA: IT TYPE VRM_VALUES,
WA LIKE LINE OF IT.
*WA-KEY = 'IN'.
*WA-TEXT = 'INDIA'.
*APPEND WA TO IT.
*WA-KEY = 'CN'.
*WA-TEXT = 'CHINA'.
*APPEND WA TO IT.
*WA-KEY = 'KW'.
*WA-TEXT = 'KUWAIT'.
* APPEND WA TO IT.
SELECT LAND1 LANDX FROM T005T INTO TABLE IT_T005T WHERE SPRAS = SY-
LANGU.
LOOP AT IT_T005T INTO WA_T005T.
WA-KEY = WA_T005T-LAND1.
WA-TEXT = WA_T005T-LANDX.
APPEND WA TO IT.
ENDLOOP.
CALL FUNCTION 'VRM_SET_VALUES'
EXPORTING
ID = 'T001-LAND1'
VALUES = IT.
REFRESH IT.
ENDMODULE.

LEAVE PROGRAM.
ELSEIF SY-UCOMM = 'INS'.
INSERT T001.
IF SY-SUBRC = 0.
MESSAGE S000(ZMESSAGE1) WITH 'INSERTED SUCCESSFULLY'.
ELSE.
ENDIF.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
Differences between call screen & set screen
By Mr.Sunil
Ranges: -
Ranges is the key word. Which acts of single value, multiple values, single range, multiple ranges.
Syntax: -
Ranges <name of the ranges> for <variable name>.
Ex: -
Data V1 type t001-bukrs.
Ranges r_bukrs for v1.

After the user provide the company codes & click on display button then we display the vendors under
company details by using ordinary report.
Data: A type t001-bukrs,
B type t001-bukrs.
Data v1 like t001-bukrs.
Ranges r_bukrs for v1.
Data: begin of wa_lfb1,
Bukrs type lfb1-bukrs,
Lifnr type lfb1-lifnr,
Akont type lfb1-akont,
End of wa_lfb1.
Data it_lfb1 like table of wa_lfb1.
By Mr.Sunil
if sy-ucomm = 'DIS'.
r_bukrs-low = A.
r_bukrs-high = B.
r_bukrs-sign = 'I'.
if b is not initial.
r_bukrs-option = 'BT'.
else.
r_bukrs-option = 'EQ'.
endif.
append r_bukrs.
select bukrs lifnr akont from lfb1 into table it_lfb1 where bukrs
in r_bukrs.
leave to list-processing.
loop at it_lfb1 into wa_lfb1.
write:/ wa_lfb1-bukrs, wa_lfb1-lifnr, wa_lfb1-akont.
endloop.
elseif sy-ucomm = 'BACK'.
leave program.
endif.
ENDMODULE.
Working with validations: -

Validations always performed in the PAI event of any screen. There are three types of validations.
1. System validation
2. Validation of flow logic editor
3. validation of ABAP editor
System validations: -
Whenever we are working with date & time format if you entered invalid date & time format then
the system automatically validate & provide an error message.
Validation of flow logic editor: -
The validation logic is maintained in flow logic editor of the screen.
Syntax: -
Field <field name> values ( <value1>, <value2> ).
Which field we want to validate.

Ex:-
Field A values ( 1000, 2000, 2200 ).
Validate of ABAP editor: -

The validation logic is maintained in ABAP editor. This is similar as at selection-screen event
logic.
Syntax in flow logic editor: -
Field <field name> module <module name>
For which field we want to validate.
CHAIN ---- ENDCHAIN: -

By Mr.Sunil
This is used to validate the related input fields. If you arent using chain & endchain, if you pass
invalid input then it display the error field enabled mode & rest of the fields are disable mode. If we use
chain & endchain if you get the error then all the fields are displayed in enable mode.
Whenever were working with validations, if you get the error then the back button functionality
isnt work. If you want to enable the back button functionality then we must provide function type as E
at the time of providing the function key. & also provide at exit command for the module name of the
back button.
In the PAI at exit command module is executed first & later rest of the modules are executed.
Ex: -
PAI of 1000.
Module ABC.
Module XYZ.
First execute Module XYZ1 at exit-command.
Module XYZ2
PROGRAM ZMPP99910.
DATA A TYPE LFB1-BUKRS.
DATA B TYPE LFB1-LIFNR.
DATA V1 TYPE LFA1-LIFNR.
DATA V2 TYPE LFB1-BUKRS.

LEAVE TO SCREEN 0.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
MODULE ABC INPUT.

SELECT SINGLE LIFNR FROM LFB1 INTO V1 WHERE LIFNR = B.
IF SY-SUBRC <> 0.
MESSAGE E000(ZMESSAGE1) WITH 'INVALID VENDOR'.
ENDIF.
SELECT SINGLE BUKRS LIFNR FROM LFB1 INTO (V2 , V1) WHERE LIFNR =
B AND BUKRS = A.
IF SY-SUBRC <> 0.
MESSAGE E000(ZMESSAGE1) WITH 'THE VENDOR IS NOT UNDER THE
COMPANY'.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
*
CHAIN.
FIELD A VALUES ('1000','2000','2200').
FIELD B MODULE ABC.
By Mr.Sunil
ENDCHAIN.
MODULE USER_COMMAND_2000 AT EXIT-COMMAND.
Syntax of calling the model dialogue box: -

Call screen <screen no> starting at <XPOS> <YPOS> ending at <XPOS> <YPOS>.
Ex:-
Call screen 2000 starting 1 1 ending at 50 40.
Syntax of calling the executable program: -
Submit <report name> via selection-screen.
Ex: -
Submit ZENT via selection-screen.
Steps to provide input field as password: -
Double click on input filed. Provide name. Click on display tab on the attributes block. Select the check
box INVISIBLE.
Design the screen as shown in

the below.
After the user provide the

customer & click on display or
enter key then we display the sales
document details of customer in a A
tabular format in 6000 screen.
If the user click on display button

then we display the elected sales
document details through VA03. If
the user click on item details then
we display the selected sales
document details item details
(VBELN, POSNR, KUNNR,
MEINS,L NETPR) by using ALV
& also validate the given
customer.
By Mr.Sunil
SAP-SCRIPT
In the real time if you want to design the business
documents, such as offer letters, experience letters,
invoices, commercial invoices etc. we need layout
sets. These are designed through forms. Forms are
either SAP scripts or smart forms.
SAP-Script is a tool to display the business

documents.
The standard SAP provided layout sets for

almost all the applications. Most of the times the
ABAPer job is either change the layout or adding
some additional logic to the standard driver program.
Driver program is used to fetch the data from data base & transfer to the layout.
Components of SAP script: -

1. Layout
2. Driver program
Components of layout: -
1. Header
2. Pages
3. Windows
4. Page window
5. Paragraph format
6. Character format
7. Documentation
Header: -
Header is used to maintain the administrative information. i.e. form name, language & page
format.
In the real time page formats are created by BASIS people through SPAD transaction.
Page format is the collection of page width & height of displayed document.
By Mr.Sunil
Pages: -
Page is the physical area where we can place the windows. We cant print the data directly on the
page. Page
Windows: -
We can paste the same window in any number of pages. We cant print the data directly on the
window. There are two types of windows.
1. Main window
2. Variable window
Note: - Main window is the default window in SAP script
without a main window we cant design SAP script.
Note: - We can place the variable window only one time per
page. Where as main window we can place up to 99 times per
page.
Page window: -
Page window is nothing but placing the window on the page with co-ordinates (left margin, upper
margin, width, height) we can print the data only on page window.
Paragraph format: -
This is used to print the entire paragraph to the required fonts & style.
Character format: -
This is used to display the perticular text with the required font & style.
Documentation: -
This is used to maintain the document related to the form.
Note: - SE71 is the transaction code for form painter or form editor.
Steps to design the layout: -
Execute SE71 . Provide the form name. Click on create. Provide short description. Click on pages in the
application tool bar. In the menu bar click on edit create element. Provide the page name, short
description. Enter. Repeat the same steps for all pages. Click on windows in the application tool bar. Click
on edit create element. Provide the window name, short description. Enter. Repeat the same steps for
By Mr.Sunil
all other windows. Click on page window. Click on edit create element. Itll display the all available
windows. Double click on the window & provide the co-ordinations. Click on paragraph formats in the
application tool bar. Provide the default paragraph. Enter. Provide short description. Click on header in the
application tool bar (F5). Click on basic settings. Provide the first page. Default paragraph. Save the
layout. In the menu bar click on settings form painter. Select the check box graphical form painter.
Enter. Click on layout in the application tool bar. Arrange the layouts by using drag & drop. Minimize the
layout. Once again click on settings in the menu bar form painter remove the graphical form painter.
Enter. Save the layout. Check the layout. (Form check definition). Activate the layout (Form
active).
We can print the data on the page window is always through symbols. Each symbol start with & ends
with &. There are 4 types of symbols.
1. Program symbols.
2. System symbols
3. Standard symbols
4. Text symbols
Program symbols: -
Program symbols are variables in the program.
Ex: -
&WA_T001-BUKRS&
&WA_KNA1-KUNNR&
System symbols: -
System symbols are system variables.
EX: -
&date&
&month&
Standard symbols: -
Standard symbols are coming from TTDTG standard data base table.
Ex: -
&Mr&
&Dear&
Text symbols:-
Text symbols are variables, which are defined in page window.
Ex: -
1: define &A&.
Steps to develop the driver program:-
1. Create an executable program and implement the retrieving logic.
2. Access the layout from the driver program by using OPEN_FORM function module. The input
for the above function module is form name (layout).
3. Transfer the data from driver program to particular page window by using WRITE_FORM
function module the input for above function module is window name.
Repeat the same steps for each page window, which contains program symbols.
4. Close the form by using CLOSE_FORM function module.
Based on the given vendor number display the vendor address in the address window by using
SAP-Script.
Steps to provide the symbols on the page window:-
By Mr.Sunil
Execute SE71. Provide the form name. Click on change. Click on page window on the application tool
bar. Double click on our required window. Click on text elements in the application tool beside header
button. Define &WA_LFA1-LIFNR& &WA_LFA1-NAME1& &WA_LFA1-ORT01&.
Click on back, save, check, activate the program.
Steps to execute the driver program: -
Execute the program. Provide the input. Execute. Provide the output is LP01. Click on print preview.
PARAMETER P_LIFNR TYPE LFA1-LIFNR.
END OF TY_LFA1.
SELECT SINGLE LIFNR NAME1 ORT01 FROM LFA1 INTO WA_LFA1 WHERE LIFNR =
P_LIFNR.
* Access the layout from driver program
CALL FUNCTION 'OPEN_FORM'
EXPORTING
FORM = 'ZSCRIPT1'.
* Transfer the data to address window.
CALL FUNCTION 'WRITE_FORM'
EXPORTING
WINDOW = 'ADDRESS'.
*Close the form
CALL FUNCTION 'CLOSE_FORM'.
* &WA_LFA1-LIFNR&
* &WA_LFA1-NAME1&
* &WA_LFA1-ORT01&
Working with logo: -
We can print either .BMP or .TIFF images only.
Note: - When ever we are working with .BMP image then we must convert .BMP to graphics image
by using SE78 transaction.
Note: - If we are working with .TIFF image then we must convert TIFF to text image by using
RSTXLDMC standard program.
Steps to convert .BMP to graphics image: -
Execute SE78. Expand the graphics. Double click on bitmap image. Provide the graphics name. Select the
radio button color bitmap image. Click on import in the application tool bar. Browse the bitmap image.
Enter.
Steps to insert the logo in the page window: -
Execute SE71. Open the form in change mode. Click on page widows in the application tool bar. Double
click on logo window. Click on text elements in the application tool bar. In the menu bar click on insert
graphics. Click on stored document server tab. Provide the graphics name. Select the radio button color
bitmap image. Enter. Click on back. Save, check, activate.
By Mr.Sunil
Based on the given vendor number display the vendor purchase orders (LIFNR, EBELN,
BEDAT) in the main window and vendor details in header window by using SAP-Script.
Note: - If you get the error WRITE_FORM is invalid START_FORM is missing then we must provide
the next page as same page in the form (page).
Steps to provide next page: -
Execute SE71. Open form in change mode. Click on the pages on the application tool bar. Provide next
page is page1. Save, check, activate.
Note: - When ever we are working with main window then we must provide text element name
otherwise the first information will be printed twice. The text element name start with /E.
PARAMETER P_LIFNR TYPE LFA1-LIFNR.
END OF TY_LFA1.
END OF TY_EKKO.
SELECT SINGLE LIFNR NAME1 ORT01 FROM LFA1 INTO WA_LFA1 WHERE LIFNR =
P_LIFNR.
SELECT LIFNR EBELN BEDAT FROM EKKO INTO TABLE IT_EKKO WHERE LIFNR =
P_LIFNR.
* Access the layout from driver program
EXPORTING
FORM = 'ZSCRIPT1'.
* Transfer the data to address window.
EXPORTING
WINDOW = 'ADDRESS'.
* Transfer the data to main window.
LOOP AT IT_EKKO INTO WA_EKKO.
EXPORTING
ELEMENT = 'SATISH'
WINDOW = 'MAIN'.
ENDLOOP.
*Close the form
By Mr.Sunil
In the real time most of the times footer window is used to print the page numbers & sign in last page.
Syntax of page numbers -
PAGE &PAGE& at &SAPSCRIPT-FORMPAGES&
Current page number of pages
Syntax of sign in last page: -
/: if &nextpage& = 0.
* ENRICH TECHNOLOGIES
/: endif.
Control commands: -
Control commands are used to control the display output. Control commands start with /: control
commands are
1. Include
2. Define
3. Address - - - - - endaddress
4. protect - - - - - - - endprotect
5. top - - - - - - endtop
6. bottom - - - - - Endbottom
7. if - - - - endif
8. case - - - - endcase
9. set date / time mask
10. new-page
11. New window
12. box
13. perform - - - - endperform
Include: -
This command is used to include the standard text
which is defined in SO10 transaction into page
window. If you want to maintain the same information in
more than one form instead of maintain these information
in each form its better to maintain those statements in the
standard text & later we include the standard text into
each form.
By Mr.Sunil
Steps to create standard text: -
Execute SO10. Provide the standard text name. Click on create. Provide the screen text.
ENRICH TECHNOLOGIES
# 301, TIRUMALA MANASA COMPLEX
ABOVE DCB BANK
Steps to include the standard text in the page window: -
Execute SE71. open the form in change mode. Click on the page window in the application tool bar.
Double click on our required window. Click on text elements (F9). Place the cursor where we want to
include the standard text. In the menu bar click on insert text standard. Provide the standard text
name, enter. Click on back. Save, activate.
Whenever we create standard text it wont ask any package or request number. So we must create
a request number to standard text to transport to quality & live server.
Steps to create the request number to standard text: -
Execute SE38. Provide program name (RSTXTRAN). Execute. Provide the standard text name (ZSTN).
Execute. Click on enter. Click on transfer text to correction in the application tool bar. Click on yes. Click
on create request. Provide short description. Enter. Request no is EC6K900496.
This request number is given to basis people then the basis people move the standard text from
development server to Quality / Live server.
Define: -
This command is used to declare the variables in the page window.
Ex: -
/: define &special& = DEC25.
Address - - - - endaddress: -
This command is used to display the address in the format of target countries.
/: Address
* &wa_kna1-name1&
* &wa_kna1-ort01&
/: endaddress
Protect - - - endprotect: -
This control command is used to print the continuous text without any page break. Here the system
check each & every page which page is having the enough of page. If no page is having enough of page
then it simply break the text & print in different places.
/: protect
* ENRICH TECHNOLOGIES
* SR NAGAR
/: endprotect
Top - - - endtop: -
This control command is used to display the header information in the main window.
Ex: -
/: top
* PUR-DOC, ITEM, QTY, UOM, PRICE
/: endtop.
Bottom - - - endbottom: -
This control command is used to print the footer information in the main window.
/: bottom
* Total &v_total&
By Mr.Sunil
/: endbottom
Note: - Top & Bottom commands only work in main window.

If - - - - -Endif: -
This command functionality similar as ordinary of IF functionality.
/: If &wa_mara-matnr& = ROH.
* Row material.
/: Elseif &wa_mara-matrn& = HALB.
* Semi finished product.
/: Endif.
Case - - - - endcase: -
This command functionally similar as ordinary case & end case functionality.
Set date / time mask: -
This command is used to print the date & time as per client required format.
/: Set date mask = DD/MM/YYYY.
* &date&
12/07/2014
/:Set time mask = HH:MM:SS.
* &time&
09:54:35
New page: -
This control command is used to break the page.
/: If &wa_marc-matnr& = 100 200.
/: New-page.
/: Endif.
New-window: -
This control command is used to call the next window.
Box: -
This command is used to draw the tables, horizontal lines & vertical lines.
Syntax of box: -
/: BOX xpos <value> <unit> ypos <value> <unit> width <value> <unit> height <value> <unit>
intensity <value> <unit> frame <value> <unit>.
UNITS DESCRIPTION
CM CENTIMETER
MM MILLIMETER
PT POINT
IN INCHES
CH CHAR
TW TWIP = 1/20 PT.
Ex: -
/: Box XPOS 0 cm YPOS 0 cm width 5 cm height 2 CM frame 20 TW.
Note: - If we want to draw the horizontal line then height is 0, vertical line then width is 0.
/: Box xpos 0 cm ypos 0 cm width 7 cm height 0 cm frame 20 pw.
7 CM 3 CM
/: Box xpos 0 cm ypos 0 cm width 0 cm height 3 cm frame 20 pw.
By Mr.Sunil
Based on the given purchasing document number display the purchasing document item details
as shown below by using SAPSCRIPT.
Title window: -
Left margin 1 cm width 18.5 cm
Upper margin 1 cm height 1 cm
Main window: -
Left margin 1 cm width 18.5 cm
Upper margin 2.5 cm height 20 cm
/: Box frame 20 tw.

/: Box xpos 0 cm ypos 1 cm width 18.5 cm height 0 cm frame 20 tw.
/: Box xpos 0 cm ypos 19 cm width 18.5 cm height 0 cm frame 20 tw.
/: Box xpos 4 cm ypos 0 cm width 0 cm height 19 cm frame 20 tw.
/: Box xpos 6.5 cm ypos 0 cm width 0 cm height 19 cm frame 20 tw.
/: Box xpos 11 cm ypos 0 cm width 0 cm height 19 cm frame 20 tw.
/: Box xpos 13.5 cm ypos 0 cm width 0 cm height 19 cm frame 20 tw.
Steps to create paragraph formats: -
Opens the form in change mode. Click on paragraph formats in the application tool bar. Provide
the paragraph format. Enter. Provide short description, provide left margin 0.2 cm select the alignment
center. Click on font tab. Select font family HELVE. Font size 14 pt. select the bold / italic / underline.
By Mr.Sunil
Click on tabs button in the right side. Provide tab positions. Click on save. Repeat the same steps for all
paragraph formats.
* default paragraph
/E Text element
/: Control command
/* Comment
T1
M1 User created paragraphs
M2
= Same line
Left align = left line + 0.2cm.

Right align = Right line 0.2cm. Left line + width/2
Center align = Left line + (column width/2). 0 + 4/2 = 2.
1 TAB = ,, 4 + 2.5/2 = 5.2
Left alignment: - 6.5 + 4.5/2 = 8.7
M1 PUR.DOC,,ITEM,,QTY,,UOM,,PRICE
M1 Center alignment
Left margin 0.2CM.
Number Tab position Alignment Number Tab position Alignment
1 4.2CM Left 1 2CM Center
2 6.7CM Left 2 5.2CM Center
5 16CM Center
Note: - In the real time when ever we are working with quantity & amount fields then those information
must be printed in right alignment.
M2 &WA_EKPO-EBELN&&WA_EKPO-EBELP&&WA_EKPO-MENGE(ZC)&
= &WA_EKPO-MEINS&&WA_EKPO-NETPR(ZC)&
M2
Number Tab position Alignment
Left margin 0.2CM
1 4.2CM Left
F1 ,,Total:,,&V_Total&
2 10.8CM Right
F1
3 11.2CM Left
Left margin 0.2 CM
4 18.3CM Right
Number Tab position Alignment
1 4.2 CM Left
2 18.3 CM Right
PARAMETER P_EBELN TYPE EKPO-EBELN.

END OF TY_EKPO.
By Mr.Sunil
DATA V_TOTAL TYPE EKPO-NETPR.
WHERE EBELN = P_EBELN.
EXPORTING
FORM = 'ZSCRIPT2'.
EXPORTING
ELEMENT = 'SATISH'
WINDOW = 'MAIN'.
V_TOTAL = V_TOTAL + WA_EKPO-NETPR.
ENDLOOP.
FORM ZSCRIPT2
MAIN WINDOW: -
/E SATISH
/: BOX FRAME '20' TW
/: BOX XPOS '0' CM YPOS '1' CM WIDTH '18.5' CM HEIGHT '0' CM FRAME '20' TW
/: BOX XPOS '0' CM YPOS '19' CM WIDTH '18.5' CM HEIGHT '0' CM FRAME '20' TW
/: BOX XPOS '4' CM YPOS '0' CM WIDTH '0' CM HEIGHT '20' CM FRAME '20' TW
/: BOX XPOS '6.5' CM YPOS '0' CM WIDTH '0' CM HEIGHT '20' CM FRAME '20' TW
/: BOX XPOS '11' CM YPOS '0' CM WIDTH '0' CM HEIGHT '20' CM FRAME '20' TW
/: BOX XPOS '13.5' CM YPOS '0' CM WIDTH '0' CM HEIGHT '20' CM FRAME '20' TW
/: TOP
M1 ,,PUR DOC,,ITEM,,QTY,,UOM,,PRICE
/: ENDTOP
M2 &WA_EKPO-EBELN&,,&WA_EKPO-EBELP&,,&WA_EKPO-MENGE(ZCT)&,,
= &WA_EKPO-MEINS(K)&,,&WA_EKPO-NETPR(ZCT)&
/: BOTTOM
M3 ,,TOTAL:,,&V_TOTAL&
/: END BOTTOM
Format options:-
Format options are used to display the output or print the output as per client requirement.
Format Options Syntax Example Output
Offset &symbol+offset& &a& = abcdefgh &a+3& = defgh
Output length &symbol(o/p length)& &a& = abcdefgh &a(3)& = abc
Omitting leading zeros &symbol(z)& &a& = 000100.00 &a(z)& = 100.00
Omitting sign &symbol(s)& &a& = -100.00 &a(s)& = 100.00
Leading sign at left &symbol(<)& &a& = 100.00- &a(<)& = -100.00
Leading sign right &symbol(>)& &a& = -100.00 &a(>)& = 100.00-
Compress output &symbol(c)& &a& = 100.00 &a(c)& = 100.00
Ignore the separators &symbol(t)& &a& = 1,00,000.00 &a(t)& = 100000.00
Number of decimals &symbol(.number)& &a& = 10.3215 &a(.2)& = 10.32
&a(.0)& = 10
By Mr.Sunil
Ignore conversions &symbol(k)& &a& = &WA_EKPO-MEINS(K)&
Note: - In the real time before modifying the SAP-SCRIPT we must maintain the backup of SAP-
SCRIPT because SAP-SCRIPT doesnt have version management (ABAP editor have version
management).
Steps to maintain the backup of SAP-SCRIPT or download the SAP-SCRIPT: -

Execute SE38. Provide the program name RSTXSCRP. Execute. Provide object name as form name.
Provide mode is EXPORT. Execute. Provide the file name with .txt. Click on save.
Steps to reload the backup SAP-SCRIPT: -

Execute SE38. Provide the program name RSTXSCRP. Click on execute. Provide the object name as form
name. Mode is IMPORT. Execute. Browse the file. Enter.
Note: - RSTXSCRP is the standard program which is used to download as well as upload the SAP-
SCRIPT.
Steps to convert the SAP-SCRIPT output to PDF format: -
This is 2 step procedure.
1. Generate / create the spool request number
2. Convert the spool request number to PDF format
Steps to generate the spool request number: -
Execute the driver program. Provide the input. Execute. Provide the output device is LP01. Select the
check box new spool request. Click on print.
Steps to identify the spool request number: -
Execute SP01 or SP02. Provide the output devices is LP01. Click on execute. identify the spool.
Steps to convert the spool to PDF format: -
Execute SE38. Provide the program name RSTXPDFT4. Execute. Provide the spool request number,
execute. Provide the file name with .PDF.
Note: - We can convert any output to PDF format if the output is available in spool request. We can also
convert the report output to PDF format. First we execute the report in background. Then we get the
output in a spool, the spool request is convert into PDF by using RSTXPDFT4 standard program.
Steps to execute the report / program in background: -
Execute SE38. Provide the program name. Execute. Provide the input. In the menu bar click on program
execute in background (F9). Click on continue. Click on immediate or click on date / time button.
Provide the date & time.
If you want to print the output in both sides then open the form in SE71. Click on pages in the
application tool bar. Select the print mode is D in the print attributes. Save, check, activate the form.
If you want to print the terms & conditions in back side of each page, print mode D is not possible.
We go for pre printed stationary (First we print the terms & condit8ions on the each paper those papers re
loaded into the machine).
Steps to call the multiple frames from driver program: -
1. Create an executable program & implement the retrieving logic.
2. Access the layouts from driver program by using OPEN_FORM function module.
3.
i. Start the form by using START_FORM function module. The input for the above
function module is form name.
By Mr.Sunil
ii. Transfer the data from driver program to particular page window by using
WRITE_FORM function module. The input for the above function module is window
name. Repeat the same step (ii) for each page window which contains program
symbols.
iii. End the form by using END_FORM function module.
Repeat the step 3 for each form.
Close the form by using CLOSE_FORM function module.
TABLES EKPO.
DATA V_TOTAL TYPE EKPO-NETPR.
SELECT-OPTIONS S_EBELN FOR EKPO-EBELN.
END OF TY_EKPO.
CALL FUNCTION 'OPEN_FORM'.
CALL FUNCTION 'START_FORM'
EXPORTING
FORM = 'ZTFORM3'.
EXPORTING
ELEMENT = 'SATISH'
WINDOW = 'MAIN'.
V_TOTAL = V_TOTAL + WA_EKPO-NETPR.
ENDLOOP.
CALL FUNCTION 'END_FORM'.
CALL FUNCTION 'START_FORM'

EXPORTING
FORM = 'ZTFORM03'.
EXPORTING
WINDOW = 'MAIN'.
CALL FUNCTION 'END_FORM'.
Steps to debug the SAP-SCRIPT: -

METHOD 1: -
By Mr.Sunil
Execute SE71. Provide the form name. In the menu bar click on utilities activate debugger. Now
execute the driver program. Provide the input. Execute. Click on all. Click on print preview. Now the form
is in debugging mode. Continuously click on F5 button. Identify the field names & their values.
METHOD 2: -
Execute SE38. Provide the program name RSTXDBUG. Execute the driver program in a separate session.
Provide the input. Execute. Click on OK. Click on print preview. Continuously click on F5 button.
Identify the field names & field values.
Note: - From the driver program to main window data is transferred first. Next only other window data
transfers.
MCHA (Material Batch Table) : -
MATNR (Material number)
WERKS (Plant number)
CHARG (Batch number)
HSDAT (Mfg. date)
VFDAT (Exp. Date)
Working with labels: -
Labels are used to print the same information in each window.
In the real time in the where house module we design the so many labels such as accepted labels,
rejected labels, on test labels, control sample label . . .
Depends the label size we split the main window into smaller window.
Based on the given material number & plant number & number of labels design the accepted
labels as shown in the below.
Material: -------------
Plant: -----------------
Batch: ----------------
Mfg.dt: ---------------
Exp.dt: ---------------
Steps to design the form: -

Execute SE71. Provide the form name. Click on create. Provide short description. Create the page. Click
on windows in the application tool bar. In the menu bar click on edit Main window. Provide the
window area. Provide area left margin 1.00 cm, upper margin 1.00 cm, area width 18.5 cm, area height
25.00 cm, horizontal spacing 1.00 cm, number 2, vertical spacing 1cm, number 4. Click on enter.
Create the paragraph format. Provide header information. Save, check, activate.
PARAMETER: P_MATNR TYPE MCHA-MATNR,
P_WERKS TYPE MCHA-WERKS,
P_NOL TYPE I.
DATA: BEGIN OF WA_MCHA,
MATNR TYPE MCHA-MATNR,
WERKS TYPE MCHA-WERKS,
CHARG TYPE MCHA-CHARG,
HSDAT TYPE MCHA-HSDAT,
VFDAT TYPE MCHA-VFDAT,
END OF WA_MCHA.
By Mr.Sunil
SELECT SINGLE MATNR WERKS CHARG HSDAT VFDAT FROM MCHA INTO WA_MCHA
WHERE MATNR = P_MATNR AND WERKS = P_WERKS.
* Access the layout from drive program
EXPORTING
FORM = 'ZFORM195'.
* Transfer the data to main window
DO P_NOL TIMES.
EXPORTING
ELEMENT = 'HAI'
WINDOW = 'MAIN'.
ENDDO.
* Close the form
MAIN WINDOW: -
/E TM
* Material,,:&wa_mcha-matnr&
* Plant,,: &wa_mcha-werks&
* Batch,,: &wa_mcha-charg&
* Mfg.dt,,: &wa_mcha-hsdat&
* Exp.dt,,: &wa_mcha-vfdat&
/: new-window
Working with Standard SAP-SCRIPT
Change layout Adding some additional logic to standard driver program
Note: - TNAPR is the

standard data base table,
which contains all the
standard layouts & driver
programs.
Note: - NACE is the

transaction code, which
contains all the application
& their driver programs &
layouts.
If we want to take the print
preview of purchase order
then execute ME23N
transaction.
If you want to display the purchase order print preview then we execute the ME23N transaction & provide
the purchase order number & click on print preview in the application tool bar. Then it goes to NACE
transaction & identify the application at purchase order. Against the application it identify the output type
(NEW) against the output type it identifies the medium print output. Against the medium it triggers the
standard program & form. Based on the form we print the output.
By Mr.Sunil
In the real time output types are created by functional people based on the document category.
Ex: -
For domestic purchase order they create one output type. For amendment domestic purchase orders one
output type. For import purchase order they create one output type. For stock transfer order they create
one output type.
Steps to change the layout: -
1. Identify the standard layout / form
2. Copy the standard form into Z form
3. Convert the language from original (DE) to our required language of the form based on
requirement
4. Change Z layout as per client requirement.
5. Place the new layout/form into NACE transaction.
Modify the standard purchase order layout (MEDRUC) to incorporate the logo.
Steps to identify the standard layout or form: -
Execute NACE transaction. Select the purchase order application (EF) & click on output types in the
application tool bar. Select the output type which is provided by functional people. Double click on
processing routines in the left panel. Against print output medium identify the form MEDRUCK.
Steps to copy the standard form into Z form: -
Execute SE71. In the menu bar click on utilities copy from client. Provide the form name
MEDRUCK. Source client is 000. Target form ZENT_930_MEDRUCK. Click on execute, save, local
object.
Steps to convert the languages: -
Execute SE71. Provide the original language DE. Click on change. In the menu bar click on utilities
convert original language. Provide to original language EN. Enter.
Note: - We can create the windows page windows paragraph & character formats only in original
language. That is automatically reflected to all other languages. The text in the windows isnt reflected to
other languages.
Steps to change the layout as per client requirement: -
Execute SE71. Provide the form name & original language. Click on change. Create the logo window.
Place the logo window on the page. Align the layout & insert the graphics image in the logo window.
Steps to place the new layout / form into the NACE transaction: -
Execute NACE transaction. Select the application. Click on output types. Select the output type. Double
click on processing routines in the left panel. Click on change mode. Remove the old form & place the
new form. Save.
Steps to identify the output type & language of purchase order: -
Execute ME23N. Provide the purchase order number. Click on messages in the application tool bar.
Identify the output type & language.
Steps to take the print preview of sales order: -
Execute VA03 transaction. Provide the sales order number. In the menu bar click on sales document
issue output to. Select the message type. Click on print options. Provide destination LP01. Click on
execute. Click on print preview in the bottom.
Note: - In the real time the output device is not always LP01, depends on the printer (laser, dot matrix)
& depends on the language (EN, DE, CH) the output devices are created by basis people.
Perform - - - - endperform: -
By Mr.Sunil
This control command is used to adding some additional logic to the standard driver program
without disturbing the standard driver program.
Syntax of perform - - - endperform (calling) in page window: -
/: Perform <form name> in program <subroutine pool program>
Where the definition is available
/: using &input1&
/: using &input2&
||
/: changing &output1&
/: changing &output2&
||
/: endperform
Syntax of definition in subroutine pool program: -

Form <form name> tables <input> structure ITCSY <output> structure ITCSY.
------
------ business logic
------
/: Endform.
Here input & output acts like an internal table with header line which contains two fields. That is
name & value.
Note: - ITCSY is the structure which contains the two fields name & value.
Here all the using parameters & their values are stored into input internal tables. & all the changing
parameters are stored into output internal tables. Here the business logic is read the input field & their
value based on the values, we will fetch the data from data base & modify the output field value.
Based on the given company code display the company
code, company name, city by using SAP-SCRIPT with out
disturbing the driver program add the country by using
subroutine pool program.
ZENT_930_DRIVER_PROGRAM3
PARAMETER p_bukrs TYPE t001-bukrs.
TYPES: BEGIN OF ty_t001,
bukrs TYPE t001-bukrs,
butxt TYPE t001-butxt,
ort01 TYPE t001-ort01,
END OF ty_t001.
DATA: wa_t001 TYPE ty_t001,
it_t001 TYPE TABLE OF ty_t001.
SELECT SINGLE bukrs butxt ort01 FROM t001
INTO wa_t001 WHERE bukrs =
p_bukrs.
EXPORTING
form = 'ZFEB26'.
EXPORTING
element = 'SATISH'
By Mr.Sunil
window = 'MAIN'.
ZENT_930_FORM3 /E SATISH
* &WA_T001-BUKRS&
* &WA_T001-BUTXT&
* &WA_T001-ORT01&
/: PERFORM GET_COUNTRY IN PROGRAM Z11SCRIPT3
/: USING &WA_T001-BUKRS&
/: CHANGING &V_LAND1&
/: ENDPERFORM
* COMPANY COUNTRY: &V_LAND1&
ZENT_930_CTRY (SUBROUTINE POOL PROGRAM): -
DATA: BEGIN OF WA,
LAND1 TYPE T001-LAND1,
END OF WA.
FORM GET_COUNTRY TABLES ITAB STRUCTURE ITCSY OTAB STRUCTURE ITCSY.
READ TABLE ITAB WITH KEY NAME = 'WA_T001-BUKRS'.
SELECT SINGLE BUKRS LAND1 FROM T001 INTO WA WHERE BUKRS = ITAB-VALUE.
OTAB-VALUE = WA-LAND1.
MODIFY OTAB TRANSPORTING VALUE WHERE NAME = 'V_LAND1'.
ENDFORM.
Develop a driver program to display the material number & plant number with out disturbing
the driver program we add the material description & plant description by using subroutine pool
program.
PARAMETER P_MATNR TYPE MARC-MATNR.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_MARC,
MATNR TYPE MARC-MATNR,
WERKS TYPE MARC-WERKS,
END OF TY_MARC.
DATA WA_MARC TYPE TY_MARC.
SELECT SINGLE MATNR WERKS FROM MARC INTO WA_MARC WHERE MATNR =
P_MATNR.
EXPORTING
FORM = 'ZTSCRIPT2'.
EXPORTING
ELEMENT = 'SATISH'
WINDOW = 'MAIN'.
/E SATISH
* &WA_MARC-MATNR&
* &WA_MARC-WERKS&
/: PERFORM GET_DES IN PROGRAM ZTSCRIPT02
/: USING &WA_MARC-MATNR&
/: USING &WA_MARC-WERKS&
/: CHANGING &V_MDES&
/: CHANGING &V_PDES&
By Mr.Sunil
/: ENDPERFORM
* MAT DES: &V_MDES&
* PLANT DES: &V_PDES&
DATA: BEGIN OF WA_MAKT,
MATNR TYPE MAKT-MATNR,
MAKTX TYPE MAKT-MAKTX,
END OF WA_MAKT.
DATA: BEGIN OF WA_T001W,
WERKS TYPE T001W-WERKS,
NAME1 TYPE T001W-NAME1,
END OF WA_T001W.
FORM GET_DES TABLES INPUT STRUCTURE ITCSY
OUTPUT STRUCTURE ITCSY.
READ TABLE INPUT WITH KEY NAME = 'WA_MARC-MATNR'.
SELECT SINGLE MATNR MAKTX FROM MAKT INTO WA_MAKT WHERE MATNR =
INPUT-VALUE.
OUTPUT-VALUE = WA_MAKT-MAKTX.
MODIFY OUTPUT TRANSPORTING VALUE WHERE NAME = 'V_MDES'.
READ TABLE INPUT WITH KEY NAME = 'WA_MARC-WERKS'.
SELECT SINGLE WERKS NAME1 FROM T001W INTO WA_T001W WHERE WERKS =
INPUT-VALUE.
OUTPUT-VALUE = WA_T001W-NAME1.
MODIFY OUTPUT TRANSPORTING VALUE WHERE NAME = 'V_PDES'.
ENDFORM.
Text element: -
The text element is the name given to the block of statements in the page window. Text element name
start with /E. Normally the write form functional module transfers the data from driver program to all the
statements which are available in the page window.
Call function WRITE_FORM
Exporting
FORM = ADDRESS.
If you provide text element name to the write form function module then the WRITE_FORM function
module transfers the data from driver program to all the statements which are available in the text element.
Call function WRITE_FORM
Exporting
Element = DHAWAN.
Window = ADDRESS.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - The page window contains at least one text element then we must provide the text element name
to the write from function module.
EKET (Scheduling agreement table) : -
EBELP Item number
EINDT Delivery date
Modify the standard purchase order layout to incorporate the item wise delivery date.
In the object we add the additional logic of item wise delivery date to the standard driver program through
subroutine pool program. Before adding the additional logic first we take a printout or print preview of
existing layout & later we put the debugging mode & identify the right place with the help of printout or
print preview. Implement the logic.
Steps to identify the right place in the page window where we add the additional logic to the page
window: -
Execute ME23N. provide PO number. Click on print preview or take a printout. Now execute the SE71.
provide form name. in the menu bar click on utilities Activate debugger. Now execute ME23N in a
separate session. Click on print preview. Now the form is in debugging mode. Click on ok. Continuously
click on F5 button. Identify the right window & text element. Right place is window name MAIN.
Element name is ITEM_LINE_1
FORM: ZENT930_MEDRUCK
WINDOW MAIN: -
IL
/: PERFORM GET_DELDT IN PROGRAM ZTDELDT
/: USING &EKPO-EBELN&
/: USING &EKPO-EBELP&
/: CHANGING &V_DD&
/: ENDPERFORM
/ &EKPO-EBELP&,,&EKPO-EMATN&,,&EKPO-TXZ01&,,&V_DD+6(2)&.&V_DD+4(2)&.
= &V_DD+0(4)&
Sub routine pool program: -
PROGRAM ZTDELDT.
DATA V1 TYPE EKPO-EBELN.
DATA V2 TYPE EKPO-EBELP.
DATA: BEGIN OF WA_EKET,

EBELN TYPE EKET-EBELN,
EBELP TYPE EKET-EBELP,
EINDT TYPE EKET-EINDT,
END OF WA_EKET.
FORM GET_DELDT TABLES INPUT STRUCTURE

ITCSY OUTPUT STRUCTURE ITCSY.
READ TABLE INPUT WITH KEY 'EKPO-EBELN'.
V1 = INPUT-VALUE.
READ TABLE INPUT WITH KEY 'EKPO-EBELP'.
V2 = INPUT-VALUE.
By Mr.Sunil
SELECT SINGLE EBELN EBELP EINDT FROM EKET INTO WA_EKET WHERE
EBELN = V1 AND EBELP = V2.
OUTPUT-VALUE = WA_EKET-EINDT.
MODIFY OUTPUT TRANSPORTING VALUE WHERE NAME = 'V_DD'.
ENDFORM.
V_ADD = 20010522
&v_add+6(2)&.&v_add+4(2)&.&v_add+0(4)&
22 05 2001
Types of windows in the SAP-SCRIPT: -

1. Main window
2. Variable window
3. Constant window
Control window is the fixed window in all the pages.
SAP script is client dependent that means if you design the SAP script in one client that isnt reflected to
all other clients in the same server.
BASIS People job
Server1 Server2
Client800 Client 810 Client 800 Client 810
SAP script X
Driver program
By Mr.Sunil
Copy the SAP script from one client to another client in the same server
Depends on package
$TMP Our own package & request number
SE71 SCC1
Steps to copy the SAP script frame one client to another client (800 to 810) into the script is
available in $TMP: -
In 810 client execute SE71. In the menu bar click on utilities copy from client. Provide the form name
source. Client is 800. Provide the target form (ZENT_930_FORM). Execute.
Steps to change the package at any object: -

Execute SM30. Provide the table name TADIR. Click on maintain. Enter & check the our object type. If
our object type isnt available, then select the object type & provide the form name or object name. Click
on execute. Double click on our object. Remove the old package. Place the new package. Click on save.
Create the request (F8). Provide short description. Note down the request. Enter.
Steps to copy the SAP script from 800 to 810 client if the form is available in our own package &
request number: -
In 810 client execute SCC1. Provide the source client, number, request number. Select the including
request sub tasks. Click on start immediately in the application tool bar. Click on yes.
Note: - We cant copy the SAP script one server to another server. This is done by BASIS people. We
can copy the SAP script within the server only.
Note: - RSTXFCPY is the standard program to copy the SAP script from one client to another client.
READ_TEXT: -
Its the function module which is used to read the standard text information. The input for the
above function module is
1. Text ID
2. Name
3. Object
4. Language
The output for the above function module is an internal table which contains two fields. They are
TDFORMAT & TDLINE.
If you want to identify the input of the above function module then open the standard text in the
menu bar. Click on goto header. Identify the name, language, text id, object.
Note: - In the real time we use this function module to read the purchasing document header text,
purchase document item text, sales document header, sales document item text, invoice header text,
invoice item text . . . . .
When ever we are working with READ_TEXT module, we must uncomment the execution.
By Mr.Sunil
Data: IT like table of TDLINE,
WA like line of IT.
Call function READ_TEXT
Exporting
ID = ST
Language = sy-langu
Name = ZENT_930_ST
Object = TEXT
Lines = IT.
Exceptions
-------
-------.
Loop at IT into WA.
Write:/ WA-TDFORMAT, WA-TDLINE.
Endloop.
Based on the given material number, display the material numbers, material descriptions. If the
functional people maintain the material description in the purchase order text then we print this
information otherwise print the MAKT.
Steps to create the material: -

Execute MM01. Select the provide industry sector, material type. Enter. Select Basic data1, purchase
order text, enter. Provide short description. Provide the material group. Click on purchase order text tab.
Provide the detailed description & save.
Data V like THEAD-TDNAME

Loop at it_makt into wa_makt.
* Apply the conversion routine if it required
Call function READ_TEXT
Name = V
Object = MATERIAL
Language = sy-langu
Id = BEST
Lines = IT.
If sy-subrc = 0.
Read table it into wa index 1.
Write:/ wa_makt-matnr, wa-pdformat.
Else.
Write:/ wa_makt-mant, wa_makt-maktx.
Endif.
Endloop.
By Mr.Sunil
SMART FORMS: -
Smart forms are used to design the business documents such as invoices, purchase orders, sales orders. . .
smart form is introduced from 4.6C version on wards.
Procedure of the smart form: -
Based on the client requirement we design the smart form layout by using SMARTFORMS
transaction code & provide the necessary symbols, save, check, activate.
When ever we activate the smart form it generates a function module. Based on the function
module we develop the print program.
Function module is used to transfers the data from print program to layout.
Components of SMART FORMS: -
1. Smart form layout
2. Function Module
3. Print program
Components of Smart form layout: -
1. Global settings
2. Pages and windows
Global settings are the collection of form attribute, form interface, global definitions.
Form attributes: -
These are used to maintain the administrative information that is form name, language, page
format, default style.
Form Interface: -
This is used to declare the variables, work areas and internal tables which are needed to transfers
the data from print program to layout
Global definition: -
These are used to declare the variables, work area, internal tables which are needed to implement
the logic in the form or layout.
Pages and windows: -

These are used to design the smart form layout.
Note: - SMARTFORMS is the transaction code to design the smart form layout.
Based on the given company code, display the company code, comp name & city by using smart
forms.
Steps to design the smart form:-
By Mr.Sunil
Execute SMARTFORMS. Select the radio button form. Provide the form name. Click on create. Provide
short description. Double click on form interface in the left panel. The import tab (I_BUKRS, type, t001-
bukrs). Double click on global definitions in the left panel. Click on types tab. Declare the types.
End of ty_t001.
Click on global data tab. Provide work area. (WA_T001 TYPE TY_T001).
Click on initialization tab & implement the logic. Provide input output parameters.
INPUT PARAMETER OUTPUT PARAMETER
I_BUKRS WA_T001
select single bukrs butxt ort01 from t001 into wa_t001 where bukrs =
i_bukrs.
Expand the page in the left panel. Select the main window. Right click create text. Double click on
text. Click on editor under general attributes tab. Provide symbols.
&wa_t001-bukrs&
&wa_t001-butxt&
&wa_t001-ort01&
Click on back. Save, check, activate. In the menu bar click on environment function module name.
based on this function module we develop the print program.
Report ZENT_930_PRINT_PROGRAM
Parameter p_bukrs type t001-bukrs.
Call function /1BCDWB/SF00000341
Exporting
I_BUKRS = P_BUKRS.
Note: - In the SAP summarized data is available in t001, kna1,
lfa1 & their detailed information is available in ADRC table. The
link is ADRNR.
Working with address window: -

In the real time if you want to print the address then you must use address window. This input for the
address window is address number (ADRNR)
Based on the given customer number, display the customer address by using address window in
the smart form.
Steps to design the smart form: -
SMART FORM NAME: ZENT_930_SF2
Form interface:
Import:
I_KUNNR TYPE KNA1_KUNNR
Global definition
Types:
types: begin of ty_kna1,
kunnr type kna1-kunnr,
adrnr type kna1-adrnr,
end of ty_kna1.
Global data:
By Mr.Sunil
Wa_kna1 type ty_kna1
Initialization:
I_KUNNR WA_KNA1
select single kunnr adrnr from kna1 into wa_kna1 where kunnr = i_kunnr.
Select the page in the left panel. Right click create address. Double click on address. Provide the
address number in the general attributes tab. Save, check, activate. In the menu bar click on environment
function module name. Based on this function module we develop the print layout.
REPORT ZSM1.
parameter p_kunnr type kna1-kunnr.
CALL FUNCTION '/1BCDWB/SF00000260'
EXPORTING
I_KUNNR = p_kunnr.
Note: - If you want to declare the select-options in the smart form then we must declare one structure
with the following fields in the data dictionary & later we refer the structure in the tables tab of form
interface in the smart form.
Based on the given purchasing document numbers, display the purchasing document numbers,
document dates & vendor numbers by using smart forms.
Sign (C, 1)
Option (C, 2)
Low
High
Structure: ZVBAK1
Sign char 1
Option char 2
Low char 10
High char 10
Steps to design the smort form: -

Form interface:
Tables:
I_SVBELN like ZVBAK1
Global definition
Types:
end of ty_vbak.
Global data:
Wa_vbak type ty_vbak
It_vbak type table of ty_vbak
By Mr.Sunil
Initialization:
I_SEBELN IT_VBAK
i_svbeln.
Expand the page in left panel. Select the main window. Right click create flow logic loop.
Provide internal table name into work area name in the data tab. (IT_VBAK INTO
WA_VBAK).
Select the loop into the left panel. Right click create text. Double click on text. Click on editor in the
general attributes tab.
&wa_vbak-vbeln& &wa_vbak-audat& &wa_vbak-kunnr&
Click on back, save, check, activate.
REPORT ZTEST199.
tables vbak.
select-options s_vbeln for vbak-vbeln.
TABLES
I_SVBELN = s_vbeln.
Note: - We can test the smart form independently without using the print program.
Working with graphic: -
By using graphic window we can print the logo in the smart form. The input for the graphic window is
graphics image.
We can print the .BMP images in the smart form. When ever we are working with .BMP image then we
must convert graphic image by using SE78 transaction.
Steps to place the logo in smart form: -
Execute SMARTFORMS. Open the smart form in change mode. Select the page in the left panel. Right
click create graphic. Double click on the graphics in the left panel. Provide the name (logo name),
object (Graphics), ID (BMAP). Select the radio button color Bitmap image (BCOL). Click on form painter
in the application tool bar. Align the windows. Once again click on form painter. Save, check, activate.
Note: - RSTXPD4T4 is the standard program. We can convert the smart form output to PDF format.
Steps to print the watermark or background pictures in smart forms: -
Execute SMARTFORMS. Open the form in change mode. Double click on page in the left panel. Click
on background picture tab. Provide the name (SPG1), object (GRAPHICS), id (BMAP). Select the radio
button colour. Select the output mode is print preview & print. Provide the position. Save, check, activate
the smart form.
Steps to convert SAP-SCRIPT to SMARTFORM: -
Execute SMARTFORMS. Provide the smart form name. In the menu bar click on utilities. Migration
import SAPSCRIPT FORM. Provide the script name (ZENRICH_7AM_FORM). Enter. Click on save.
Note: - By using FB_MIGRATE_FORM function module we can convert the SAPSCRIPT to smart
form.
Working with SMARTSTYLES: -
SMARTSTYLES are used to create the paragraphs as well as character formats in the smart form. The
transaction code for smart styles is SMARTSTYLES.
Steps to create paragraph & character formats: -
Execute SMARTSTYLES. Provide the style name (ZENRICH_7AM_SS1). Click on create. Provide
short description. Select the paragraph formats in the left panel. Right click on node. Provide the
paragraph format name. Enter. Provide short description. Provide the left margin (0.2 CM). Click on font
By Mr.Sunil
tab. Select the font family (Helve), font size (14), font style (bold). Select the checkbox color & select the
colour. Click on tabs tab. Provide the tab positions. Click on save. Repeat the same steps for all the
paragraph formats. Select the character format in the left panel. Right click create node. Provide the
character format name. Enter. Provide short description. Select the bar code name if its required. Click on
font tab. Provide the font family, size, style. Click on color check box. Select color. Click on save. Repeat
the same steps for all character formats. Double click on header data. Select the standard paragraph as
default paragraph. Save, check, activate.
Working with table: -

Table is used to print the data in a tabular format. Table contains 3 sections.
1. Header
2. Main
3. Footer
Based on the client requirement which data is varying that part consider as a main area. Above main area
consider as a header & below main area consider as footer.
Based on the given purchasing document numbers, display the purchase order details as shown
in the below.
Note: - When ever we are

working with table then we must
create different lines with
different cells based on the
requirement.
For header
Line1
C1
4 3 4.5 2.5 4.5
Line2 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
For main area: -

We can use line2.
For footer
We can use line1.
Note: - SPELL_AMOUNT is the function module which is used to convert the amount in words. The
input for the above function module is amount & currency and output for the above function module is
amount in words.
Smart form name: ZENRICH_7AM_SF6
Form Attributes
Output options
Styles: ZENRICH_7AM_SS2
Form interface: -
Tables:
I_sebeln like ZENRICH_7AM_SS
Global definitions
Types
types: begin of ty_ekpo,
ebeln type ekpo-ebeln,
By Mr.Sunil
ebelp type ekpo-ebelp,
menge type ekpo-menge,
meins type ekpo-meins,
netpr type ekpo-netpr,
end of ty_ekpo.
Global data
Wa_ekpo type ty_ekpo
It_ekpo type table of ty_ekpo
V_total type ekpo-netpr
AIW type SPELL
Initialization: -
I_SEBELN IT_EKPO
IT_EKPO V_TOTAL
WA_EKPO AIW
V_TOTAL
Select EBELN EBELP MENGE MEINS NETPR from EKPO into table it_ekpo
where Ebeln in I_SEBELN.
loop at it_ekpo into wa_ekpo.
v_total = v_total + wa_ekpo-netpr.
endloop.
CALL FUNCTION 'SPELL_AMOUNT'
EXPORTING
AMOUNT = v_total
CURRENCY = 'INR'
IMPORTING
IN_WORDS = AIW.
Double click on main window in the left panel. Click on output options tab. Provide the co ordinations of
main window.
Left margin 1 CM Width 18.5 CM
Upper margin 1CM height 25 CM
Select the main window in the left panel right click create table. Double click on table. In the data
tab provide internal table name into work area name (IT_EKPO into WA_EKPO). Click on tables tab.
Select the LTYPE1. Right click rename line. Provide new name as line1. Select the Line1. Click on
select pattern under table tab. Click on display framed pattern. Select the pattern. Select the Line1. Right
click insert empty line underneath. Select the Ltype1. Right click rename line. Provide the new
name as Line2. Select the line2. Click on details in top right. Provide the each call width.
Line1 18.5 cm
Line2 4cm 3cm 4.5cm 2.5cm 4.5cm
Click on table painter in the top right. Select the Line2. Click on select pattern under table tab. Select the
pattern.
Table
Header Right click Create Table line Select Line1
Line1
Cell Text T1 purchase order
Line2
Cell1 Text T2 Purchase doc
By Mr.Sunil
Cell2 Text T2 Item
Cell3 Text T2 QTY
Cell4 Text T2 UOM
Cell5 Text T2 Price
Main window
Line2
Cell1 Text M1 &WA_EKPO-EBELN&
Cell2 Text M1 &WA_EKPO-EBELP&
Cell3 Text M2 &WA_EKPO-MENGE&
Cell4 Text M1 &WA_EKPO-MEINS&
Cell5 Text M2 &WA_EKPO-NETPR&
Footer
Line1
Cell1 F1 ,, Total,,&V_Total(ZC)&
F1,, Amount in words: &AIW-Words& Rupees and
&AIW-DECWORD& Paise.
Save, check, activate the smart form.
T1
Helve, 16, Bold, Center
T2
Helve, 14, Bold, Center
M1
Helve, 14, Bold, Left alignment, Left margin 0.2 cm
M2
Helve, 14, Bold, Right alignment
F1
Tab position
1. 14 cm left alignment
2. 18.3 cm right alignment
Working with template: -

Template is used to print the data in a fixed column & fixed rows.
Based on the given purchasing document number, display as show in below.
Smart form name: ZENRICH_7AM_SF7

Form interface
Import
I_EBELN TYPE EKKO-EBELN
Global definitions
Types
BUKRS TYPE EKKO-BUKRS,
END OF TY_EKKO.
By Mr.Sunil
Global data
WA_EKKO TYPE TY_EKKO
Initialization
I_EBELN WA_EKKO
SELECT SINGLE EBELN BEDAT LIFNR BUKRS FROM EKKO INTO WA_EKKO WHERE
EBELN = I_EBELN.
Select the main window in the left panel. Right click create Template. In the template tab select the
C1. Right click rename line. Provide new name as line1. Select the line1. Click on details in the top
right. Provide the height, each cell width. Click on table painter in the top right. Select the line1. Click on
select pattern under template tab. Select the required pad. Repeat the same steps for all the lines. Select the
template in the left panel. Right click Create Text. Double click on text. Click on editor under
general attributes tab. (Pur.doc: &wa_ekko-ebeln&). Click on back. Click on output options tab. Provide
the line number and column number in the bottom. Repeat the same steps for all other text. Save, check
activate the smart form.
Events in SMARTFORMS: -
1. Event on sort begin
2. Event on sort end
Event on sort begin: -
Its an event which is triggered at the first record of each block.
ADV: - Its used to display the individual headings
This is similar as at new field name in the control break statement.
Event on sort end: -
Its an event which is triggered at the last record of each block.
ADV: - Its used to display the subtotals.
This is similar as at end of field name in the control break statement.
Based on the given purchasing document numbers, display the purchasing item details as shown in
the below by using SMARTFORMS.
SMART FORM NAME: ZENRICH_7AM_SF8
FORM INTERFACE
===============
Table
I_SEBELN LIKE ZENRICH_7AM_SS
Global definitions
Types:
END OF TY_EKPO.
Global data
Wa_ekko type ty_ekpo
It_ekpo type table of ty_ekpo
V1 type ekpo-netpr
V2 type ekpo-netpr
By Mr.Sunil
Initialization
I_sebeln it_ekpo
Wa_ekpo v2
It_ekpo
WHERE EBELN IN I_SEBELN.

ENDLOOP.
Select the main window in the left panel. Right click create text. Double click on text. Click on editor.
* grand total: &v2(zc)&
Click on back. Select the main window once again. Right click create flow logic loop. Double click
on loop. In the data tab provide
It_ekpo into wa_ekpo
In the below sort criteria block provide field name is Ebeln. Select the check box event on sort begin. Select
the event on sort begin in the left panel. Right click create text. Double click on text.
* &wa_ekpo-ebeln&
Select the loop in left panel. Right click create text. Double click on the text. Click on editor.
* &wa_ekpo-ebelp& &wa_ekpo-menge(zc)& &wa_ekpo-meins& &wa_ekpo-netpr(zc)&
Click on back. Select the text in left panel. Right click create flow logic program lines. Double click
on code in the left panel. Provide input, output parameters.
Wa_ekpo v1
V1 = v1 + wa_ekpo-netpr
Double click on loop in the left panel. In the sort criteria block provide field name as Ebeln and select the
check box event on sort end. Select the event on sort end in left panel. Right click create text. Double
click on text.
* Sub total: &v1(zc)&
Click on back. Select the text in left panel. Right click create flow logic program lines.
Double click on code. Implement the logic & input parameter is v1.
Clear v1.
In the menu bar click on environment function module name. based on this function module we develop
the print program.
TABLES EKPO.
TABLES
I_SEBELN = S_EBELN.
Differences between SAP Script & SMARTFORMS
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - In the smart forms function module number we cant transported to quality & live server.
Depends on server configuration function module number is generated. So we cant fix the function
module number in the print program. We always generate the function module by using
SSF_FUNCTION_MODULE_NAME. The input for the above function module is smart form name. the
output for the above function module is smart form number.
REPORT ZSF.
TABLES EKPO.
DATA V_FM TYPE RS38L_FNAM.
CALL FUNCTION 'SSF_FUNCTION_MODULE_NAME'
EXPORTING
FORMNAME = 'ZSF2'
IMPORTING
FM_NAME = V_FM.
By Mr.Sunil
CALL FUNCTION V_FM
TABLES
I_SEBELN = S_EBELN.
Note: - Now-a-days most of the companies used zebra printers to print the labels. Because the cost of
payable is cheap, quality is good. Gum thickness is also good. Zebra printers dont support sap script only.
It supports smart forms. So we must design the labels through smart form.
Based on the given material number & number of labels design the accepted labels as shown in
the below.
At the time of label design BASIS people create page format based on the table width & height through
SPAD transaction & given to us. Based on this page format we design the label.
Smart form name: ZENRICH_7AM_SF9.
FORM INTERFACE
Import
I_MATNR TYPE MCHA-MATNR
I_NOL TYPE I
Global definitions
Types
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_MCHA,
MATNR TYPE MCHA-MATNR,
WERKS TYPE MCHA-WERKS,
CHARG TYPE MCHA-CHARG,
HSDAT TYPE MCHA-HSDAT,
VFDAT TYPE MCHA-VFDAT,
END OF TY_MCHA.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY,
NO TYPE SYINDEX,
END OF TY.
Global data
WA_MCHA TYPE TY_MCHA
IT_MCHA TYPE TABLE OF TY_MCHA
WA TYPE TY
IT TYPE TABLE OF TY
Initialization
I_MATNR WA_MCHA
I_NOL WA
IT
SELECT SINGLE MATNR WERKS CHARG HSDAT VFDAT FROM MCHA INTO WA_MCHA
WHERE MATNR = I_MATNR.
DO I_NOL TIMES.
WA-NO = SY-INDEX.
By Mr.Sunil
APPEND WA TO IT.
ENDDO.
Double click on main window in the left panel. Click on output options tab. Provide the co ordinates.
Left margin: 1CM width: 18.5 CM
Upper margin: 1 CM Window height 2.5 CM
Select the main window in the left panel. Right click create flow logic loop. Double click on
loop. Click on data tab. Provide (IT into WA). Select the loop. Right click Create Text. Double
click on text.
MATERIAL : &WA_MCHA-MATNR&
PLANT : &WA_MCHA-WERKS&
BATCH : &WA_MCHA-CHARG&
MFG.DT : &WA_MCHA-HSDAT&
EXP.DT : &WA_MCHA-VFDAT&
PARAMETER: S_MATNR TYPE MCHA-MATNR,
S_NOL TYPE I.
DATA V_FM TYPE RS38L_FNAM.
CALL FUNCTION 'SSF_FUNCTION_MODULE_NAME'
EXPORTING
FORMNAME = 'ZSF3'
IMPORTING
FM_NAME = V_FM.
CALL FUNCTION V_FM
EXPORTING
I_MATNR = S_MATNR
I_NOL = S_NOL.
Each & every window & text editor contains the following additional events in the conditions tab.
1. Only on first page
2. Not on first page
3. Only after end of Main window
4. Only before end of Main window
5. Only on page
1. Only on first page: - This is used to print the window or text editor information only on first page.
2. Not on first page:- This is used to print the window or text editor information from 2nd page on wards.
3. Only after end of Main window:- This is used to print the window or text editor information after
main window data printing completion.
4. Only Before end of Main window: - This is used to print the window or text information on each page
until the main window is completed.
5. Only on page:- This is used to print the window or text editor information on a specified page.
Working with BOX & Shading:-

Each and every window & text editor contains BOX & shading in the output options tab.
Steps to draw the box & shading: -
Double click on required window or text editor. Click on output options tab. Select the check box lines
with provide the spacing (0.2 cm) if its required, color. If you want to add or remove any line then click
on that line in the preview. If you want to shading, then select the shading color.
When ever we are working with Boxes in the smart form based on the requirement we consider
each part as window & draw the boxes for the window & also move lines.
By Mr.Sunil
Types of window in smart form
1. Main window
2. Secondary window (Its similar as variable window in smart form)
3. Copies window
4. Final window
Copies window: - When ever we want to print the same document multiple copies with different leadings
then we use copies window.
In the real time the same invoice document is printed 3 copies with different headings. That is
government form, company form, customer form. Here we use copies window to print the different
headings on the same document.
Steps to work with copies window: -
Execute SMARTFORMS. Open the smart form in change mode. Select the page in the left panel. Right
click create window. Double click on window. Select window type as copies window in general
attributes tab. Select the copies window in the left panel. Right click create flow logic program
lines. Double click on code.
IF SFSY-COPYCOUNT = 1.
V = 'GOVERNMENT COPY'.
ELSEIF SFSY-COPYCOUNT = 2.
V = 'COMPANY COPY'.
ELSEIF SFSY-COPYCOUNT = 3.
V = 'CUSTOMER COPY'.
ENDIF.
Output parameter V.
Select the code in left panel. Right click create text. Double click on text. Click on editor.
&V&
Click on back. Save, check, activate.
At the time of print preview in the print program provide output device LP01. Provide number of copies
3. click on print preview & absorb the different headings by click on next page.
Note: - SFSY is the structure which contains all the smart forms system variables.
If we want to print the page number
&SFSY-PAGE&
If we want to print total number of pages
&SFSY-FORM PAGES&
DATE &SFSY-DATE&
Final window is used to print the total amount in the last page.
Note: - By using static break points (Break-point keyword) we can debug the smart form & also placing
the dynamic break points in the function module we can debug the smart form.
Folder:- This is used to print the continuous text without any page break.
This functionality is similar as protect & end protect control command in SAP SCRIPT.
Alternative: - This acts like if & endif control command in the SAP SCRIPT.
Command: - This is used to break the page. This is similar as new page control command in smart form.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - In the real time output device isnt always LP01. depending on the printer type (Laser printer,
Dot Matrix printer) & language (English, Chinese, Japanese) the output device is created by BASIS
people through SPAD transaction.
Steps to provide Microsoft word as a text editor in SAP SCRIPT and SMART FORM
Method 1:
* Execute I18N customizing
* Double click on MS word as editor
* Select the SAP SCRIPT and SMARTFORM check boxes and click on active.
* Yes
Method 2: Open any text editor. Then in menu bar click on goto configure editor. Select graphical pc
editor check box. Enter. You will get the MS Word editor.
Note: - In the realtime some times we develop the entire code in the print program only. Printed values
are transferred to smartform layout. Here we must create one structure with the transferred fields in the
data dictionary later we declare the work area and internal table in the form interface in the smart form
based on structure.
Based on the given company code, display the company code, company name, city by using smart
form and develop the entire code in the print program only.
Here we create one structure with BUKRS, BUTXT, ORT01 (which data we want to transfer). Based on
this structure we declare the work area import tab of form interface to carry the data.
Structure name: ZENRICH_7AM_SS2.
SMART FORM Name: ZENRICH_7AM_SF10.
Form interface
Import
I_WA like ZENRICH_7AM_SS2.
Select the MAIN window right click text
&I_WA-BUKRS&
&I_WA-BUTXT&
&I_WA-ORT01&
Print Program
REPORT ZSF4.
PARAMETER P_BUKRS TYPE T001-BUKRS.
END OF WA_T001.
SELECT SINGLE BUKRS BUTXT ORT01 FROM T001 INTO WA_T001 WHERE BUKRS
= P_BUKRS.
EXPORTING
I_WA = WA_T001.
Based on the given purchasing document number display the document number, doc date,
vendor (ALV). Select any check box of any record and click on PRINT button then display the
purchasing item details in smart form.
REPORT ZALVR2.
TABLES EKKO.
By Mr.Sunil
TYPE-POOLS SLIS.
A(2) TYPE C,
END OF TY_EKKO.
IN S_EBELN.

WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'A'.
WA_FCAT-EDIT = 'X'.
WA_FCAT-CHECKBOX = 'X'.
WA_FCAT-OUTPUTLEN = '3'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.

WA_EVENT-NAME = 'PF_STATUS_SET'.
WA_EVENT-FORM = 'PF'.
WA_EVENT-NAME = 'USER_COMMAND'.
By Mr.Sunil
WA_EVENT-FORM = 'UC'.

EXPORTING
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = IT_EKKO.
FORM PF USING M TYPE SLIS_T_EXTAB.

ENDFORM.
FORM UC USING D LIKE SY-UCOMM E TYPE SLIS_SELFIELD.
IF D = 'PRINT'.
READ TABLE IT_EKKO INTO WA_EKKO INDEX E-TABINDEX.

EXPORTING
I_EBELN = WA_EKKO-EBELN.
ENDIF.
ENDFORM.
Smart form
Global Settings
Form interface
I_EBELN TYPE EKKO-EBELN
Global Definitions
Global data
WA_EKPO TYPE TY_EKPO
WA_EKKO TYPE TY_EKKO
IT_EKPO TYPE TABLE OF TY_EKPO
Types
END OF TY_EKPO.

END OF TY_EKKO.
Initialization SELECT EBELN EBELP MENGE MEINS NETPR FROM EKPO INTO TABLE
IT_EKPO
Input parameters (I_EBELN), output parameters (IT_EKPO, WA_EKPO)
By Mr.Sunil
WHERE EBELN = I_EBELN.
SELECT SINGLE EBELN BEDAT FROM EKKO INTO WA_EKKO WHERE EBELN =
I_EBELN.
Table:-
Header
Line1 - create text purchasing document
Line 2: - row1 create text pur doc: &wa_ekko-ebeln&
Row2 create text doc date: &wa_ekko-bedat&
Line 3: row1 text purchasing doucment
Row2 text item
Row3 text qty
Row4 text uom
Row5 text price
Main: -
Line3: row1 text &wa_ekpo-ebeln&
Row2 text &wa_ekpo-ebelp&
Row3 text &wa_ekpo-menge&
Row4 text &wa_ekpo-meins&
Row5 text &wa_ekpo-netpr&
By Mr.Sunil
Debugging
Debugging is a tool to trace the program execution line by line. Debugging is used to change the
field values at run time. Debugging is used to stop the program execution at any executable statement by
using break points.
There are 2 types of break points.
1. Static break point
2. Dynamic break point
Note: - SY-UNAME is the system variable which contains the current user name.
If SY-UNAME = SAPUSER.
BREAK-POINT.
Endif.
Steps to place the dynamic break points: -

Place the cursor where we want to stop the program execution. Click on stop button in the application tool
bar. Then it automatically set the break point. If you want to remove the break point then place the cursor
on the same line & click on stop button in the application tool bar.
Note: - We can place up to 30 break points in the program. At the time of debugging mode F5 line by
line execution, F6 At a time one block is executed (At a time subroutine & function module is
executed), F7 come of the block, F8 first itll check is there any other break points available or not.
If there is available then it goes to next break point. Otherwise come out of the program.
Watch Point: -
Watch point is used to stop the program execution based on the condition. We can place up to 10 watch
points in the program.
Steps to create watch point: -

In the debugging mode click on watch point which is in the application tool bar. Provide the field name.
Provide the relational operator & Comp.field/value. Enter. Click on F5 button. When ever the watch point
is reached then the program is stopped.
Fields: -
This is used to identify the fields or variable values and also we can change the values.
By Mr.Sunil
Steps to change the field values: -
Provide the field name in left side. Click on enter. Then we get the value in the right side. Remove the
value place the new value and click on change field (pencil symbol in right side).
Table: -
This is used to display the internal table fields & their value & also perform the internal table operations
(Append, Insert, and Delete).
Break Points: -
This is used to identify the all the break points which are placed in the program & their line number.
Watch points: -
This is used to identify the all available watch points & also we can change the watch point condition.
Callstack: -
This is used to identify the current execution event.
Over view: -
This is used to identify the all the events and all the blocks which are available in the program.
ABAP new debugger: -
Desktop1: -
In this ABAP source code is displayed in the left side, global & local variables & their values are
displayed in right side.
Desktop2: -
In this ABAP source code is displayed in the left side, ABAP stack is displayed in right side
(currently which block is executed under which event).
Desktop3: -
By Mr.Sunil
In this source code is displayed in the top & global & local variables & their values are displayed
in bottom.
Standard: -
In this source code is displayed in the left side. ABAP stack is displayed in right side top. Global &
local variables are displayed in right side bottom.
Structures: -
This is used to identify the work area fields & their values & also change the values.
Tables: -
This is used to display the internal table fields & their values & also perform the internal table
operations.
Objects: -
This is used to identify the all the methods of objects & also check their values.
Detail display: -
This is used to identify the detailed information of any particular field.
Break point / watch points: -

This is used to identify the all the break points as well watch points in the program.
Difference: -
This is used to compare the any two field values & also display their history.
Differences between classic debugger & new debugger
There are two types of debugging

1. Place the break points in the program & run the program in debugging mode.
2. Execute the program & provide the input & set the program in debugging mode by using /H. /H is
the runtime debugger.
The following ways are used to identify the errors in standard program
1. By using where used list we identify the error location.
2. By using watch point.
3. By using break point.
4. By using source code scanner.
5. By using ABAP runtime analysis [SE30].
6. By using SQL trace [ST05].
By Mr.Sunil
When ever we execute any transaction code if you get the error or message if you want to identify the
location of the message then we use following techniques.
EX: -
When ever we try to open a program which isnt created, then it throws a message. This message is
triggered from which location we identify now.
By using where used list: -
Execute SE38. provide the program which isnt created. Click on display. Then we get the message.
Double click on that message. Identify the message number. In that last three digit is message number.
Rest of the things is message class.
Execute SE91. Provide message class. Click on display. Select the message number. Click on where used
list in the application tool bar. Enter. It displays the so many programs. Double click on each & every
program & identify our message is available in which program.
By using watch points: -
Execute SE38. Provide the program name. Execute /H before display. Then debugging switched
on. Click on display. In the menu bar click on classic debugger. Click on watch point in the application
tool bar. Provide field name as SY-MSGID. Provide relational operator (=). Provide comparison value
S017. Click on F8. & identify the right location.
By using break points: -
Execute SE38. Provide the program name. Execute /H. Click on display. In the menu bar click on
break points. Break point at message / statement. If it is a statement then provide write. Enter. Click on
F8. Identify the right location of the error.
By using source code: -
Execute SE93. Provide the transaction code. Click on display. Identify the package. Execute SE38.
Provide the program name RS_ABAP_SOURCE_SCAN. Execute. Provide the package & provide string
searched for (S017). Execute. it provide the all the locations where the message is available. Double click
on each and every message or location. Place the break point. Execute SE38. Provide the program name.
Click on display. Then the cursor is stops at right location.
Note: - By using CODE_SCANNR transaction also we identify the right location.
By Mr.Sunil
BDC
(Batch Data Conversion / Communication)
BDC is used to upload the data from flat file to SAP system.
Develop a BDC program is nothing but to automate the existing transaction code. Each transaction can
create only one record at a time. If you want to create the thousands of records, one way is execute the
same transaction thousands of time. Another way is develop a BDC program to automate the existing
transaction.
Steps of the standard transaction codes: -
1. XK01 / MK01 / FK01 Create Vendor.
2. XD01 / VD01 / FD01 Create Customer.
3. MM01 Create Material
4. ME51N Create Purchase Requisition
5. ME21N Create Purchase Order
6. MB01 Create Material Document
7. VA01 Create Sales Order
8. VL01 Create Delivery
9. VF01 Create Billing
10. FI01 Create Bank
11. KS01 Create Cost Center
12. KE51N Create Profit Center
13. FB01 Create Accounting Document
14. CS01 Create BOM (Bill of Material)
15. MSC1N Create Batch
16. COR1 Create Process Order
17. C201 Create Recipe
Note: - 1 Create 2 Change 3 Display

Steps to create a vendor : -
Execute XK01. Provide vendor number, account group. Click on enter. Provide the name, search term ,
country. Save.
Note: - We can perform the data base table operation either through DML commands or through
Transaction codes.
DML commands are used to update only one data base table at a time, where as transaction code is
used to update their relevant data base tables at a time.
By Mr.Sunil
Steps to develop the BDC program : -
1. Analyze the transaction code
Analyzing the screen as well as field details

2. Prepare the flat file.
3. Upload the data from flat file to internal table / BDC program.
4. For each record in the internal table, we collect the screen and filed details to automate the transaction.
5. For each record in the internal table, call the transaction.
Steps in detail: -
Step 1: -
Analyzing the screen and field details is nothing but identifying the technical information of each
screen and field. If you want to identify the technical information, execute the transaction. Place the cursor
on input fields. Click on F1 button. Click on technical information. Identify the screen & field details. Its
very difficult to identify the technical information of entire transaction. So we go for SHDB transaction.
SHDB is the transaction code to collect the technical information of entire transaction (Do the
recording).
Steps to Do The Recording : -
Execute SHDB. Click on new recording in the application tool bar. Provide the recording name (any
name). Provide the transaction code. Click on start recording or enter. Provide the vendor number, account
group. Enter. Provide the name (any name), search term, country. Click on save.
Note: - When ever we click on save button recording will be stopped.
Note: - BDC_OKCODE is the last entry of any screen.
Note: - In the real time recording is provide by functional people either in development server or in
quality server depends on the data availability.
Step 2: -
In the real time functional people or end users provide a sample file in the development server to
test the BDC program.
By Mr.Sunil
Step 3: -
UPLOAD is the function module which is used to browse the file as well as upload the data from
file to internal table. The input for the above functional module is
1. File type DAT
2. Data internal table which is similar as file.
Note: - In the real time instead of upload functional module we always use GUI_UPLOAD +
F4_filename function module.
Step 4: -
Collect the screen & field details are nothing but fill an internal table which contains the following
fields.
1. PROGRAM Program name

2. DYNPRO Screen number
3. DYNBEGIN Starting position
4. FNAM Field name
5. FVAL Field value
Note: - In the DDIC we have one structure that is BDCDATA which contains above fields, so we
simply declare our internal table by referring BDCDATA structure.
Step 5: -
Syntax of call transaction method: -

Call transaction <Transaction code> using <BDCDATA internal table> mode A/N/E.
A All screens
N No screens
E Error screens
Develop a conversion program to upload the vendor master data from flat file to SAP system by
using BDC call transaction method through XK01 transaction. The flat file contains vendor
numbers, names and search terms.
Step 1 (Do the record): -
Execute SHDB. Click on new recording. Provide recording name (ZSXK01). Provide transaction code
(XK01). Enter. Provide the vendor number (v1010), account group (0004). Enter. Provide the name (Big
Bazar), search term (BB), country (IN). Save.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_VEN,
SORTL TYPE LFA1-SORTL,
END OF TY_VEN.
DATA: WA_VEN TYPE TY_VEN,
IT_VEN TYPE TABLE OF TY_VEN.
By Mr.Sunil
DATA: WA_BDCDATA LIKE BDCDATA,
IT_BDCDATA LIKE TABLE OF WA_BDCDATA.
* Upload the data.
CALL FUNCTION 'UPLOAD'
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_VEN.
LOOP AT IT_VEN INTO WA_VEN.
WA_BDCDATA-PROGRAM = 'SAPMF02K'.
WA_BDCDATA-DYNPRO = '0100'.
WA_BDCDATA-DYNBEGIN = 'X'.
APPEND WA_BDCDATA TO IT_BDCDATA.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'BDC_CURSOR'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = 'RF02K-KT0KK'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'BDC_OKCODE'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = '/00'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'RF02K-LIFNR'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = WA_VEN-LIFNR.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'RF02K-KTOKK'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = '0004'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
* 2nd screen and field details
WA_BDCDATA-PROGRAM = 'SAPMF02K'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = 'LFA1-LAND1'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = '=UPDA'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'LFA1-NAME1'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = WA_VEN-NAME1.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
By Mr.Sunil
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'LFA1-SORTL'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = WA_VEN-SORTL.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'LFA1-LAND1'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = 'IN'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
CALL TRANSACTION 'XK01' USING IT_BDCDATA MODE 'A'.
REFRESH IT_BDCDATA.
ENDLOOP.
By Mr.Sunil
Develop a conversion program to upload the customer number data from flat file to SAP system
by using BDC Call transaction method through XD01 transaction. The flat file contains the
customer numbers, names, search terms & street.
Do the recording: - Execute SHDB. Click on new recording in the application tool bar. Provide
recording name (ZXD01), transaction code (XD01). Enter. Provide the customer number (12501), account
group (0004). Enter. Provide the name (GMR INFRA LTD), search term (GMR), street (Ameerpet),
country (IN), language key (EN). Save.
Steps to create a transaction code for BDC program: -
Execute SE93. Provide the transaction code [(zsbdc2) any name]. Click on create. Provide short
description. Select the radio button program and selection screen. Enter. Provide the program name. Select
the GUI check boxes. Click on save.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_CUS,

SORTL TYPE KNA1-SORTL,
STRAS TYPE KNA1-STRAS,
END OF TY_CUS.
DATA: WA_CUS TYPE TY_CUS,
IT_CUS LIKE TABLE OF WA_CUS.
* UPLOAD THE DATA.
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_CUS.
LOOP AT IT_CUS INTO WA_CUS.
WA_BDCDATA-PROGRAM = 'SAPMF02D'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = 'RF02D-KTOKD'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'RF02D-KUNNR'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = WA_CUS-KUNNR.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
By Mr.Sunil
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'RF02D-KTOKD'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
* 2nd screen details
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = 'KNA1-SPRAS'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'KNA1-NAME1'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = WA_CUS-NAME1.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'KNA1-SORTL'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = WA_CUS-SORTL.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'KNA1-STRAS'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = WA_CUS-STRAS.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'KNA1-LAND1'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'KNA1-SPRAS'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = 'EN'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
CALL TRANSACTION 'XD01' USING IT_BDCDATA MODE 'A'.

REFRESH IT_BDCDATA.
ENDLOOP.
By Mr.Sunil
Steps to work with session method: -
1. Do the Recording.
2. Prepare flat file.
3. Upload the data from flat fie to internal table.
4. Create the session by using BDC_OPEN_GROUP function module.
i. GROUP Name of the session, which is used to process the session.
ii. KEEP Re maintain the session. After processing the session (Activate = X).
iii. HOLDDATE The session is locked, until it reaches the hold date.
iv. USER Valid user.
5. Loop at <Data internal table>.
-------------
-------------
Call the transaction by using BDC_INSERT function module.
i. <TCODE>
ii. <BDCDATA INTERNAL TABLE>
6. Close the session by using BDC_CLOSE_GROUP function module.

Develop a conversion program to upload the customer master data from flat file to SAP system
by using BDC session method. The flat file contains customer numbers, names, search terms, street.
Steps to process the session (after execution the program): -
Execute SM35. Select the session name. Click on process in the application tool bar. Click on process.
By Mr.Sunil
END OF TY_CUS.
IT_CUS LIKE TABLE OF WA_CUS.
* UPLOAD THE DATA.
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_CUS.
CALL FUNCTION 'BDC_OPEN_GROUP'
EXPORTING
GROUP = 'DARLING'
* HOLDDATE = FILLER8
KEEP = 'X'
USER = SY-UNAME.

CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = 'RF02D-KTOKD'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'RF02D-KUNNR'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = WA_CUS-KUNNR.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'RF02D-KTOKD'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
* 2nd screen details
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
By Mr.Sunil
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = 'KNA1-SPRAS'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'KNA1-NAME1'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = WA_CUS-NAME1.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'KNA1-SORTL'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = WA_CUS-SORTL.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'KNA1-STRAS'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = WA_CUS-STRAS.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'KNA1-LAND1'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = 'KNA1-SPRAS'.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = 'EN'.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
CALL FUNCTION 'BDC_INSERT'
EXPORTING
TCODE = 'XD01'
TABLES
DYNPROTAB = IT_BDCDATA.
REFRESH IT_BDCDATA.
ENDLOOP.
* Close the session
CALL FUNCTION 'BDC_CLOSE_GROUP'.
BNKA (Bank Master Table)
BANKS Bank country key
BANKL Bank key
BANKA Bank name
Steps to create a bank: -
Execute FI01. Provide bank country key IN, bank key [any name (669111)]. Enter. Provide the bank
name. Save.
Develop a conversion program to upload the vendor and customer master data from two flat files
to SAP system by using BDC session method. The vendor flat files contain vendor numbers, names
& search term, customer flat file contains customer numbers, customer names, search terms &
street.
CALL FUNCTION UPLOAD
By Mr.Sunil ----------
----------
-----------
DAT
IT_VEN.
CALL FUNCTION UPLOAD
DAT
IT_CUS. ----------
----------
CALL FUNCTION BDC_OPEN_GROUP -----------
GROUP = SPMT
KEEP = X
USER = SY-UNAME
------------
------------ Collect the screen and field details of vendor
------------
CALL FUNCTION BDC_INSERT
XK01
IT_BDCDATA.
REFRESH IT_BDCDATA.
ENDLOOP.
------------
------------ Collect the screen and field details of vendor
------------
XD01
IT_BDCDATA.
REFRESH IT_BDCDATA.
ENDLOOP.
CALL FUNCTION BDC_CLOSE_GROUP.
DATA: BDCDATA LIKE BDCDATA OCCURS 0 WITH HEADER LINE.
END OF TY_VEN.

END OF TY_CUS.
IT_CUS TYPE TABLE OF TY_CUS.
START-OF-SELECTION.
By Mr.Sunil
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_VEN.
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_CUS.

EXPORTING
GROUP = 'DARLING2'
KEEP = 'X'
USER = SY-UNAME.
perform bdc_dynpro using 'SAPMF02K' '0100'.
perform bdc_field using 'BDC_CURSOR'
'RF02K-KTOKK'.
perform bdc_field using 'BDC_OKCODE'
'/00'.
perform bdc_field using 'RF02K-LIFNR'
WA_VEN-LIFNR.
perform bdc_field using 'RF02K-KTOKK'
'0004'.
'LFA1-LAND1'.
'=UPDA'.
perform bdc_field using 'LFA1-NAME1'
WA_VEN-NAME1.
perform bdc_field using 'LFA1-SORTL'
WA_VEN-SORTL.
perform bdc_field using 'LFA1-LAND1'
'KW'.
EXPORTING
TCODE = 'XK01'
TABLES
DYNPROTAB = BDCDATA.
REFRESH BDCDATA.
ENDLOOP.

perform bdc_dynpro using 'SAPMF02D' '0100'.
By Mr.Sunil
perform bdc_field using 'BDC_CURSOR' 'RF02D-KTOKD'.
perform bdc_field using 'BDC_OKCODE' '/00'.
perform bdc_field using 'RF02D-KUNNR' WA_CUS-KUNNR.
perform bdc_field using 'RF02D-KTOKD' '0004'.
perform bdc_dynpro using 'SAPMF02D' '0110'.
perform bdc_field using 'BDC_CURSOR' 'KNA1-SPRAS'.
perform bdc_field using 'BDC_OKCODE' '=UPDA'.
perform bdc_field using 'KNA1-NAME1' WA_CUS-NAME1.
perform bdc_field using 'KNA1-SORTL' WA_CUS-SORTL.
perform bdc_field using 'KNA1-STRAS' WA_CUS-STRAS.
perform bdc_field using 'KNA1-LAND1' 'IN'.
perform bdc_field using 'KNA1-SPRAS' 'EN'.

EXPORTING
TCODE = 'XD01'
TABLES
REFRESH BDCDATA.
ENDLOOP.
FORM BDC_DYNPRO USING PROGRAM DYNPRO.

CLEAR BDCDATA.
BDCDATA-PROGRAM = PROGRAM.
BDCDATA-DYNPRO = DYNPRO.
BDCDATA-DYNBEGIN = 'X'.
APPEND BDCDATA.
ENDFORM.
FORM BDC_FIELD USING FNAM FVAL.
CLEAR BDCDATA.
BDCDATA-FNAM = FNAM.
BDCDATA-FVAL = FVAL.
APPEND BDCDATA.
ENDFORM.
Develop a conversion program to upload the bank details from flat file to SAP system by using
BDC call transaction method through FI01 transaction. The flat file contains Bank county key,
bank key & bank name.
Steps to do the recording: -
Execute SHDB. Click on new recording in the application tool bar. Provide recording name (ZSFI01),
transaction code (FI01). Click on start recording. Provide bank country key, bank key. Enter. Provide the
bank name. Save. Save the recording.
Steps to develop the program from recording: -
Execute SHDB. Select the recording name. click on program in the application tool bar. Provide the
program name (ZENR_930AM_BDC5). Select the radio button transfer from recording. Enter. Provide
title. Select the status, application. Click on source code. Save in our own package.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_BANK,
By Mr.Sunil
BANKS TYPE BNKA-BANKS,
BANKL TYPE BNKA-BANKL,
BANKA TYPE BNKA-BANKA,
END OF TY_BANK.
DATA: WA_BANK TYPE TY_BANK,
IT_BANK TYPE TABLE OF TY_BANK.
START-OF-SELECTION.
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_BANK.
LOOP AT IT_BANK INTO WA_BANK.

perform bdc_dynpro using 'SAPMF02B' '0100'.
'BNKA-BANKL'.
'/00'.
perform bdc_field using 'BNKA-BANKS'
WA_BANK-BANKS.
perform bdc_field using 'BNKA-BANKL'
WA_BANK-BANKL.
perform bdc_dynpro using 'SAPMF02B' '0110'.
'BNKA-BANKA'.
'=UPDA'.
perform bdc_field using 'BNKA-BANKA'
WA_BANK-BANKA.
CALL TRANSACTION 'FI01' USING BDCDATA MODE 'A'.

REFRESH BDCDATA.
ENDLOOP.

CLEAR BDCDATA.
APPEND BDCDATA.
ENDFORM.

CLEAR BDCDATA.
By Mr.Sunil
APPEND BDCDATA.
ENDFORM.
Develop a conversion program to upload the vendor city from flat file to SAP system by using
BDC call transaction method through XK02 transaction. The flat file contains vendor numbers and
city.
Execute SHDB. Click on new recording in the application tool bar. Provide the recording name,
transaction code (XK02). Enter. Provide existing vendor number (V1011). Select the address checkbox.
Enter. Provide the city. Save.
Note: - When ever we are working with update transaction then we must remove the other than flat file
fields recording steps from recording by using minus (-) symbol in the application tool bar.
Here we remove the NAME1, SORTL, LAND1 steps.

TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_VC,
END OF TY_VC.
DATA: WA_VC TYPE TY_VC,
IT_VC TYPE TABLE OF TY_VC.
start-of-selection.
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_VC.
LOOP AT IT_VC INTO WA_VC.

'RF02K-D0110'.
'/00'.
WA_VC-LIFNR.
perform bdc_field using 'RF02K-D0110'
'X'.
'LFA1-ORT01'.
'=UPDA'.
perform bdc_field using 'LFA1-ORT01'
By Mr.Sunil
WA_VC-ORT01.
'IN'.
CALL TRANSACTION 'XK02' USING BDCDATA MODE 'A'.

REFRESH BDCDATA.
ENDLOOP.
CLEAR BDCDATA.
APPEND BDCDATA.
ENDFORM.

CLEAR BDCDATA.
APPEND BDCDATA.
ENDFORM.
Handle the error in call transaction method: -

1. By using FORMAT_MESSAGE function module
2. Handling the errors through SESSION method
FORMAT_MESSAGE is the function module which is used to handle the errors in call transaction
method. The input for the above function module is
1. Message id
2. Message number
3. Message1
4. Message2
5. Message3
6. Message4
7. language
The output for the above function module is Meaningful message.
Call transaction <TCODE> using <BDCDATA Internal table> mode A/N/E messages into
<BDCMSGCOLL Internal table>.
The call transaction method written the success or failure information into BDCMSGCOLL Internal table.
Some of the fields in BDCMSGCOLL Internal table: -
1. MSGID Message ID
2. MSGNR Message number
3. MSGV1 Message1
4. MSGV2 Message2
5. MSGV3 Message3
6. MSGV4 Message4
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - In the DDIC, we have one structure. i.e. BDCMSGCOLL, which contains above fields. So we
simply declare our internal table by referring BDCMSGCOLL structure.
Note: - When ever we are handling the errors in call transaction method then we must provide mode is
N.
using BDC call transaction method & also download the error messages (handling the errors). The
flat file contains vendor numbers, account groups, name & search term.
KTOKK TYPE LFA1-KTOKK,
END OF TY_VEN.
DATA: BEGIN OF WA_ERROR,
LNO TYPE SYTABIX,
MSG(100) TYPE C,
END OF WA_ERROR.
DATA IT_ERROR LIKE TABLE OF WA_ERROR.
DATA: WA_BMC LIKE BDCMSGCOLL,

IT_BMC LIKE TABLE OF WA_BMC.
DATA V_MSG(100) TYPE C.
start-of-selection.
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_VEN.

WA_ERROR-LNO = SY-TABIX.
'RF02K-KTOKK'.
'/00'.
WA_VEN-LIFNR.
WA_VEN-KTOKK.
'LFA1-LAND1'.
By Mr.Sunil
'=UPDA'.
WA_VEN-NAME1.
WA_VEN-SORTL.
'IN'.
CALL TRANSACTION 'XK01' USING BDCDATA MODE 'N' MESSAGES INTO
IT_BMC.
IF SY-SUBRC <> 0.
LOOP AT IT_BMC INTO WA_BMC.
CALL FUNCTION 'FORMAT_MESSAGE'

EXPORTING
ID = WA_BMC-MSGID
LANG = SY-LANGU
NO = WA_BMC-MSGNR
V1 = WA_BMC-MSGV1
V2 = WA_BMC-MSGV2
V3 = WA_BMC-MSGV3
V4 = WA_BMC-MSGV4
IMPORTING
MSG = V_MSG.
IF SY-SUBRC = 0.
WA_ERROR-MSG = V_MSG.
APPEND WA_ERROR TO IT_ERROR.
CLEAR WA_ERROR.
ENDIF.
ENDLOOP.
ENDIF.
REFRESH: BDCDATA, IT_BMC.
ENDLOOP.
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_ERROR.

CLEAR BDCDATA.
BDCDATA-DYNBEGIN = 'X'. H5050 --- BIGBAZAR ---
APPEND BDCDATA. H5051 004 CMR CMR
ENDFORM. H5052 --- RS BROTH RS
By Mr.Sunil
Handling the errors through session method: -
Call function BDC_OPEN_GROUP
GROUP = HE
KEEP = X
USER = SY-UNAME.
---
---
Call transaction XK01 using IT_BDCDATA mode N.
If SY-SUBRC < > 0.
XK01
IT_BDCDATA.
ENDIF.
REFRESH IT_BDCDATA.
ENDLOOP.
CALL FUNCTION BDC_CLOSE_GROUP.
After, we execute the program, we process the session HE through SM35 in background & observe the
error log.
By Mr.Sunil
END OF TY_VEN.
start-of-selection.
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_VEN.

EXPORTING
GROUP = 'DARLING3'
KEEP = 'X'
USER = SY-UNAME.

'RF02K-KTOKK'.
'/00'.
WA_VEN-LIFNR.
WA_VEN-KTOKK.
'LFA1-LAND1'.
'=UPDA'.
WA_VEN-NAME1.
WA_VEN-SORTL.
'IN'.
CALL TRANSACTION 'XK01' USING BDCDATA MODE 'N'.
IF SY-SUBRC <> 0.
By Mr.Sunil
EXPORTING
TCODE = 'XK01'
TABLES
ENDIF.
REFRESH BDCDATA.
ENDLOOP.
Session over view (SM35): -

Analysis: -
This is used to identify the number of transactions are available in the session and their status and also this
is used to identify the screens & fields information.
Process: -
This is used to process the session either in foreground or background or error mode.
Statistics: -
This is used to identify the quick information of the session. I.e. how many transactions are successfully
processed how many are deleted. How many are still to be process.
Log: -
This is used to identify the each & every step of entire session processing.
Recording:-
This is used to cal the SHDB transaction code.
Delete: -
This is used to delete the sessions from the session overview.
Lock: -
This is used to lock the session until a particular date.
Unlock: -
This is used to unlock the session which is already locked.
Syntax of concatenate: -
Concatenate <variable1> <variable2> ---- into <variable3> separated by <delimiter>.
Ex: -
Data A(10) type C value 'ENRICH'.
Data B(20) type C value 'TECH'.
Data C(30) type C.
Concatenate A B into C separated by ' '.
Write C.
O/P ENRICH TECH
Ex: -
Data A(2) type C.

Data R(20) type C.
A = 01.
Concatenate 'ENRICH(' A ')' into R.
Write R.
By Mr.Sunil
O/P ENRICH(1)
Note: - Concatenate is only possible for character data types (C, N, D, T) not for numeric data type (I, F,
P).
Syntax of Split: -
Split <variable1> at <delimiter> into <variable1> <variable2> - - - - - -
Ex: -
Data A(30) type C value 'ENRICH TECH'.
Data B(10) type C.
Data C(20) type C.
Split A at ' ' into B C.
Write:/ B, C.
O/P ENRICH TECH
Ex: -
Data V(30) type C value '1000, TCS, HYD'.

Data: V1(4) type C,
V2(4) type C,
V3(4) type C.
Split V at ',' into V1 V2 V3.
Write:/ V1, V2, V3.
O/P 1000 TCS HYD
Based on the given vendor numbers, display the vendor numbers, vendor names & cities as
shown in the below. If the user clicks on update button then we update the vendor cities of selected
checkbox by using BDC call transaction method through XK02 transaction method.

DATA V TYPE SYLINNO.
TABLES LFA1.
SELECT-OPTIONS S_LIFNR FOR LFA1-LIFNR.
DATA: A, B.
END OF TY_VEN.
DATA: BEGIN OF WA,
By Mr.Sunil
END OF WA.
DATA IT LIKE TABLE OF WA.
SELECT LIFNR NAME1 ORT01 FROM LFA1 INTO TABLE IT_VEN WHERE LIFNR IN
S_LIFNR.

WRITE:/ A AS CHECKBOX, WA_VEN-LIFNR, WA_VEN-NAME1, WA_VEN-ORT01 INPUT.
ENDLOOP.
V = SY-LINNO.
AT USER-COMMAND.
IF SY-UCOMM = 'UPD'.
DO V TIMES.
WA_VEN-LIFNR INTO WA-LIFNR
WA_VEN-ORT01 INTO WA-ORT01.
IF B = 'X'.
APPEND WA TO IT.
CLEAR WA.
ENDIF.
ENDDO.
LOOP AT IT INTO WA.

perform bdc_field using 'BDC_CURSOR' 'RF02K-LIFNR'.
perform bdc_field using 'BDC_OKCODE' '/00'.
perform bdc_field using 'RF02K-LIFNR' WA-LIFNR.
perform bdc_field using 'RF02K-D0110' 'X'.
perform bdc_field using 'BDC_CURSOR' 'LFA1-ORT01'.
perform bdc_field using 'BDC_OKCODE' '=UPDA'.
perform bdc_field using 'LFA1-ORT01' WA-ORT01.

REFRESH BDCDATA.
ENDLOOP.
ENDIF.

=============================================
ENDFORM.

==============================================
ENDFORM.
Note: - When ever we are working with conversion program if the flat file contains date field then we
must consider as char 10 in the data internal table if the flat file contains quantity & amount fields then we
must consider as char 15 in the data internal table.
By Mr.Sunil
Develop a conversion program to upload the cost center master data from flat file to SAP system
by using BDC call transaction method through KS01 transaction. The flat file contains controlling
area, cost center number, from date, to date, name, person responsible.
Execute SHDB. Click on new recording in the application toolbar. Provide the recording name (SKS01).
Provide the transaction code (KS01). Enter. Provide controlling area (6000), provide the cost center
(15440), provide the from date (26.01.2015), to date (31.01.2015). Enter. Provide the name (ENRICH
TECH), person responsible (venkat). Select the cost center category (5), hierarchical area 1000, business
area (0001), save. Enter. [CSKS (Cost center master data), CSKT (Cost center description table)].
Data: BDCDATA like BDCDATA OCCURS 0 WITH HEADERLINE.

Types: Begin of ty_cost,
KOKRS type CSKS-KOKRS,
KOSTL type CSKS-KOSTL,
VFD(10) type C,
VTD(10) type C,
KTEXT type CSKT-KTEXT,
VERAK type CSKS-VERAK,
End of ty_cost.
Data: wa_cost type ty_cost,
It_cost type table of ty_cost.
Start-of-selection.
Call function UPLOAD
Exporting
FILETYPE = DAT
Tables
DATA_TAB = IT_COST.
Loop at it_cost into wa_cost.
==========================
Perform bdc_field using CSKSZ-KOKRS WA_COST-KOKRS.
Perform bdc_field using CSKSZ-KOSTL WA_COST-KOSTL.
Perform bdc_field using CSXSZ-DATAB_ANFO WA_COS-VFD.
Perform bdc_field using CSKSZ-DATB1_ANFO WA_COST-VTD.
==========================
Perform bdc_field using CSKSZ-KTEXT WA_COST-KTEXT.
Perform bdc_field using CSKSZ-VERAK WA_COST-VERAK.
==========================
Call transaction KS01 using BDCDATA mode A.
Refresh BDCDATA.
Endloop.
Form BDC-DYNPRO using program DYNPRO.
==========================
Endform.
Form BDC_FIELD using FNAM FVAL.
==========================
Endform.
By Mr.Sunil
LFBK (Vendor Bank Table)
LFINR Vendor number
BANKS Bank County Key
BANKL Bank key
BANKN Account Number
KNBK (Customer Bank Table)
KUNNR Customer
BANKS Bank Country Key
BANKL Bank Key
BANKN Account number
Upload the vendor & vendor bank details from a single flat file to two internal tables. The
vendor & vendor bank details are differentiated with V & B. the vendor details are in the flat file
vendor numbers, names & search terms. In the flat file bank details are vendor numbers bank
country keys bank keys & bank names.
DATA V1.
END OF TY_VEN.

LIFNR TYPE LFBK-LIFNR,
BANKS TYPE LFBK-BANKS,
BANKL TYPE LFBK-BANKL,
BANKN TYPE LFBK-BANKN,
END OF TY_BANK.
DATA: BEGIN OF WA,

ROW(100) TYPE C,
END OF WA.

EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT.
LOOP AT IT INTO WA.
IF WA-ROW+0(1) = 'V'.
SPLIT WA-ROW AT ',' INTO V1 WA_VEN-LIFNR WA_VEN-NAME1 WA_VEN-SORTL.
By Mr.Sunil
APPEND WA_VEN TO IT_VEN.
CLEAR WA_VEN.
ELSE.
SPLIT WA-ROW AT ',' INTO V1
WA_BANK-LIFNR WA_BANK-BANKS WA_BANK-
BANKL WA_BANK-BANKN.
APPEND WA_BANK TO IT_BANK.
CLEAR WA_BANK.
ENDIF.
ENDLOOP.

WRITE:/ WA_VEN-LIFNR, WA_VEN-NAME1, WA_VEN-SORTL.
ENDLOOP.
ULINE.

WRITE:/ WA_BANK-LIFNR, WA_BANK-BANKS, WA_BANK-BANKL, WA_BANK-BANKN.
ENDLOOP.
BDC table control:-

When ever we upload the multiple records in a tabular format for a single transaction then its called bdc
table control.
When ever we upload the vendor bank details, customer bank details then we go for bdc table
control. Because one vendor having any number of bank details in a tabular format & customer also
having any number of bank details in a tabular format.
Vendor bank screen: -
By Mr.Sunil
Customer bank screen: -
Develop a conversion program to upload the vendor bank details from flat file to sap system by
using BDC call transaction method through XK01 transaction. Flat file contains vendor & vendor
bank details with separation at V and B. the vendor details are vendor number, name & search
terms. The bank details are vendor number, bank country key, bank key & account number.
Execute SHDB. Click on new recording in the application tool bar. Provide recording name
(SXK01), transaction code (XK01). Enter. Provide vendor number (H9080), account group (0004). Enter.
Provide the name (power grid). Search term (pg), country (IN). Enter. Third screen we no need to provide
information. Enter. In 4th screen provide the details.
Click on Save.
DATA V2 TYPE N.
DATA V_FNAM(20) TYPE C.
DATA V1.
END OF TY_VEN.

LIFNR TYPE LFBK-LIFNR,
BANKS TYPE LFBK-BANKS,
BANKL TYPE LFBK-BANKL,
BANKN TYPE LFBK-BANKN,
END OF TY_BANK.
By Mr.Sunil
DATA: BEGIN OF WA,

ROW(100) TYPE C,
END OF WA.
START-OF-SELECTION.
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT.
LOOP AT IT INTO WA.
IF WA-ROW+0(1) = 'V'.
SPLIT WA-ROW AT ',' INTO V1 WA_VEN-LIFNR WA_VEN-NAME1 WA_VEN-
SORTL.
CLEAR WA_VEN.
ELSE.
SPLIT WA-ROW AT ',' INTO V1 WA_BANK-LIFNR WA_BANK-BANKS WA_BANK-
BANKL WA_BANK-BANKN.
APPEND WA_BANK TO IT_BANK.
CLEAR WA_BANK.
ENDIF.
ENDLOOP.
* First screen
'RF02K-KTOKK'.
'/00'.
WA_VEN-LIFNR.
'0004'.
* SECOND SCREEN
'LFA1-LAND1'.
'/00'.
WA_VEN-NAME1.
WA_VEN-SORTL.
By Mr.Sunil
'IN'.
*THIRD SCREEN
'LFA1-KUNNR'.
'/00'.
* FOURTH SCREEN
'LFBK-BANKN(02)'.
'=UPDA'.
LOOP AT IT_BANK INTO WA_BANK WHERE LIFNR = WA_VEN-LIFNR.
V2 = V2 + 1.
CONCATENATE 'LFBK-BANKS(' V2 ')' INTO V_FNAM.
perform bdc_field using V_FNAM WA_BANK-BANKS.
CONCATENATE 'LFBK-BANKL(' V2 ')' INTO V_FNAM.
perform bdc_field using V_FNAM WA_BANK-BANKL.
CONCATENATE 'LFBK-BANKN(' V2 ')' INTO V_FNAM.
perform bdc_field using V_FNAM WA_BANK-BANKN.

ENDLOOP.
CLEAR V2.
REFRESH BDCDATA.
ENDLOOP.

CLEAR BDCDATA.
APPEND BDCDATA.
ENDFORM.

CLEAR BDCDATA.
APPEND BDCDATA.
ENDFORM.
By Mr.Sunil
Over view:
Data v2(2) type N.
Data v_fnam(20) type c.
Loop at it_ven into wa_ven.
-----
- - - - - 1st screen & field details
-----
-----
- - - - - 2nd screen & field details
-----
-----
- - - - - 3rd screen & field details
-----
-----
- - - - - 4th screen, OK_CODE & CURSOR details
-----
Loop at it_bank into wa_bank where lifnr = wa_ven-lifnr.
V2 = V2 + 1.
Concatenate LFBK-BANKS( V2 ) into V_FNAM WA_BANK-BANKS.
Concatenate LFBK-BANKL( V2 ) into V_FNAM WA_BANK-BANKL.
Concatenate LFBK-BANKN( V2 ) into V_FNAM WA_BANK-BANKN.
Endloop.
Clear V2.
V_FNAM
Call transaction XK01 using BDCDATA mode A.
Refresh BDCDATA. LFBK-BANKN(01)
Endloop.
Develop a conversion program to upload the customer bank details flat file to SAP system by
using XD01 transaction code. The flat file contains both customer & bank details with separation
of C & B. In the flat file customer details are customer numbers, names, search term, street. In the
flat file bank details are customer numbers, bank country key, bank key & account number.
Execute SHDB. Click on new recording. Provide recording name (SXD01_TBC), transaction code
(XD01). Enter. Provide the customer number (65432), account group (0004). Enter. Provide the name
(Coal India), search term (CI), street (Ameerpet), country (IN), language (EN). Enter. Third screen we no
need to provide any details. Enter. 4th screen we no need to enter any details. Enter. Provide the bank
details.
Crty Bank key Bank account

IN 121213 15151515
IN 121212 2525252525
Save. Click on save.
By Mr.Sunil
Loop at It_cus into wa_cus.
------
------ First screen & field details.
------
------
------ Second screen & field details.
------
------
------ Third screen & field details.
------
------
------ Fourth screen & field details.
------
------
------ Fifty screen & CURSOR, OK_CODE details.
------
Loop at it_bank into wa_bank where kunnr = wa_cus-kunnr.
V2 = V2 + 1.
Concatenate KNBK-BANKS( V2 ) into V_FNAM WA_BANK-BANKS.
Concatenate KNBK-BANKL( V2 ) into V_FNAM WA_BANK-BANKL
Concatenate KNBK-BANKN V2 ) into V_FNAM WA_BANK-BANKN
Endloop.
Clear V2.
Call transaction XD01 using BDCDATA mode A.
Refresh BDCDATA. C,65432,GMR,G,SR NAGAR
Endloop. C,65433,GVK,GV,BG
B,65432,IN,12121,1919191919
B,65433,IN,121212,2525151515
B,65433,IN,121213,1515152525
Note: - At the time of session processing through SM35 the following commands are used.
/n It skips the current transaction from session processing.
/BEND: - It skips the entire session processing.
/BDEL: - It deletes the current transaction from the session processing.
Reasons to choose call transaction method: -

1. My flat file contains fewer amounts of data (200 or 100)
2. My client requirement is immediate data base updation.
3. Call transaction method is faster.
By Mr.Sunil
Reasons to choose call Session method: -
1. My flat file contains huge amount of data (1000 of records)
2. My client wants to run the program in background (scheduling)
3. Session method generates an error log. That will be handle errors.
Steps to execute the session method in background: -

Method 1: -
Execute SM35. Select the session. Click on process. Select the radio button background. Click on process.
Method 2: -
By using RSBDCSUB Standard program, we can run the session method in background.
Note: - When ever we run the any conversion program in background then we must maintain the file in
the application server directly (SAP directory AL11).
Call transaction <TCODE> using <BDCDATA internal table> mode A/N/E messages into
<BDCDATA> update A/S.
UPLOAD: -
Upload is the function module which is used to browse the file as well as upload the data from file to
internal table. The input for the above function module is
1. File type DAT
2. Data internal table which is similar as file.

By Mr.Sunil
END OF TY_T001.
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_T001.
ENDLOOP.
GUI_UPLOAD: - Its the function module which is used to upload the data from file to internal table.
1. File name with extension.
2. Field separator = X.
3. Data internal table which is similar as file
Include ziit001.
CALL FUNCTION 'GUI_UPLOAD'
EXPORTING
FILENAME = 'C:\Users\Administrator\Desktop\DARLING.TXT'
HAS_FIELD_SEPARATOR = 'X'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_T001.

ENDLOOP.
Note: - Now a day upload function module is obsolete. So we use GUI_UPLOAD function module.
For the GUI_UPLOAD function module file name is fixed. This isnt allowed by client people and
functional people.
Instead of UPLOAD function module we use F4_FILENAME & GUI_UPLOAD function module.
F4_FILENAME is the function module which is used to browse the file and GUI_UPLOAD function
module is used to upload the data from file to internal table. The output for the F4_FILENAME is file
path or file name.
DATA V_FILE TYPE STRING.
INCLUDE ZIIT001.
PARAMETER P_FILE LIKE IBIPPARMS-PATH.
AT SELECTION-SCREEN ON VALUE-REQUEST FOR P_FILE.

CALL FUNCTION 'F4_FILENAME'
IMPORTING
FILE_NAME = P_FILE.
By Mr.Sunil
START-OF-SELECTION.
V_FILE = P_FILE.
EXPORTING
FILENAME = V_FILE
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_T001.
ENDLOOP.
Download: - Download is the function module which is used to browse the file as well as download the
data from internal table to file. The input for the above function module is
1. File type DAT
TABLES T001.
INCLUDE ZIIT001.
S_BUKRS.
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_T001.
GUI_DOWNLOAD: - Its the function module which is used to download the data from internal table to
file. The input for the above function module is
1. File name with extension.
2. Field separation
3. Data internal table which data we want to download
TABLES T001.
INCLUDE ZIIT001.
S_BUKRS.
CALL FUNCTION 'GUI_DOWNLOAD'
EXPORTING
FILENAME = 'C:\Users\Administrator\Desktop\T002.TXT'
WRITE_FIELD_SEPARATOR = 'X'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_T001.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - Now a day DOWNLOAD function module is absolute. Se we use GUI_DOWNLOAD
function module. In the GUI_DOWNLOAD function module the file name is fixed. This isnt allowed
by functional people.
Instead of DOWNLOAD we use F4_FILENAME function module with GUI_DOWNLOAD
function module.
INCLUDE ZIIT001.
PARAMETER P_FILE TYPE IBIPPARMS-PATH.
DATA V_FILE TYPE STRING.
AT SELECTION-SCREEN ON VALUE-REQUEST FOR P_FILE.

CALL FUNCTION 'F4_FILENAME'
IMPORTING
FILE_NAME = P_FILE.
START-OF-SELECTION.
SELECT BUKRS BUTXT ORT01 FROM T001 INTO TABLE IT_T001.
V_FILE = P_FILE.
EXPORTING
FILENAME = V_FILE
WRITE_FIELD_SEPARATOR = 'X'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_T001.
ALSM_EXCEL_TO_INTERNAL_TABLE is the function module which is used to upload the data

from XL Sheet to internal table. The input for the above function module is
1. File name with extension
2. Begin column
3. Begin row
4. End column
5. End row
The output for the above function module is an internal table which contains 3 fields (Row, Col, Value)
PARAMETER: P_BC TYPE I,

P_BR TYPE I,
P_EC TYPE I,
P_ER TYPE I.
INCLUDE ZIIT001.
DATA: IT TYPE TABLE OF ALSMEX_TABLINE,
WA LIKE LINE OF IT.
CALL FUNCTION 'ALSM_EXCEL_TO_INTERNAL_TABLE'
EXPORTING
FILENAME = 'C:\Users\Administrator\Desktop\88.XLS'
I_BEGIN_COL = P_BC
I_BEGIN_ROW = P_BR
I_END_COL = P_EC
I_END_ROW = P_ER
By Mr.Sunil
TABLES
INTERN = IT.
LOOP AT IT INTO WA.
WRITE:/ WA-ROW, WA-COL, WA-VALUE.
ENDLOOP.
ULINE.
LOOP AT IT INTO WA.
IF WA-COL = '0001'.
WA_T001-BUKRS = WA-VALUE.
ELSEIF WA-COL = '0002'.
WA_T001-BUTXT = WA-VALUE.
ELSEIF WA-COL = '0003'.
WA_T001-ORT01 = WA-VALUE.
ENDIF.
AT END OF ROW.
APPEND WA_T001 TO IT_T001.
ENDAT.
ENDLOOP.
ENDLOOP.
Application Server: -
Application server is the SAP directory. The transaction code for application server is AL11. In the
application server each file is called one data seg.
In the application server we cant create the file directly through program only we can create.
Note: - .Directory is the [.(DIR_TEMP)] is the default directory in the application server.
Steps to download the data into application server: -

1. Open the data set / file in write mode / output.
2. Loop at <data internal table> into <work area>.
Transfers the data from <work area> to data set / file.
Endloop.
3. Close the data set / file.
Syntax of open data set: -

Open data set <file name> in text / binary mode for output / input encoding default - - .
Steps to open the file in application server: -
Execute AL11. Double click on .(DIR_TEMP). Identify the file (SPT). Double click on it. And absorb the
data.
INCLUDE ZIIT001.
SELECT BUKRS BUTXT ORT01 FROM T001 INTO TABLE IT_T001 UP TO 10 ROWS.
* Download the data to application server
OPEN DATASET 'SPT' IN TEXT MODE FOR OUTPUT ENCODING DEFAULT.
TRANSFER WA_T001 TO 'SPT'.
ENDLOOP.
By Mr.Sunil
CLOSE DATASET 'SPT'.
Steps to upload the data from application server: -

1. Open the dataset / file in read mode
2. Do
Read the data set and placed into work area.
If sy-subrc = 0.
Append the data from work area to internal table.
Else.
Exit.
Endif.
Enddo.
3. Close the dataset / file
INCLUDE ZIIT001.
OPEN DATASET 'SPT' IN TEXT MODE FOR INPUT ENCODING DEFAULT.
DO.
READ DATASET 'SPT' INTO WA_T001.
IF SY-SUBRC = 0.
ELSE.
EXIT.
ENDIF.
ENDDO.
CLOSE DATASET 'SPT'.
* Display the output.
ENDLOOP.
Note: - When ever we develop the conversion program to schedule in background then file must be in
the application server.
In this case we need to develop one more separate program to upload the data from presentation
server & download into application server. In the conversion program instead of GUI upload we upload
the data from application server by using open data set and read dataset.
Interview questions on BDC: -
1. Why we go for BDC.
2. What are steps to work with BDC programming?
3. What are differences between DML commands & BDC?
4. What are differences between call transaction method & session method?
5. When we choose call transaction method.
6. When we choose Session method.
7. What are the types of update modes? (Synchronous & Asynchronous)
8. How we handle the errors in call transaction method
9. What are the function modules we used in session method?
10. How to process the session (SM35)
11. How we run the session in background (RSBDCSUB standard program).
By Mr.Sunil
12. How to do the recording (SHDB)
13. What is the last entry at screen? (BDC-OK_CODE)
14. What are the fields in BDC data structure / dynpro components?
15. What is the use /N, /BEND, /BDEL.
16. How we hold/lock the session until particular date.
17. Can we process multiple transactions at a time? (By using session)
18. When we maintain the file in application server.
19. What is transaction code for application server? (AL11)
20. What are components of BDCMSCOLL structure & what is the use (it hold the
Success / failure information).
21. Can we use call transaction method & session method in the same program (yes)
22. What is the use of FORMAT_MESSAGE function module (handle the errors)
By Mr.Sunil
CROSS APPLICATIONS
Cross application is the concept to exchange the data among the systems.
ALE is (Application Link Enabling) is an SAP technology to support cross application.
ALE uses IDOC to support the cross applications.
IDOC is the carrier to carry the data from one system to another system.
SAP can understand only the IDOC format, when it communicates with any other system.
Distributing the data: -
Irrespective of the receivers, the ABAPER job in sender system is to generate the Idoc.
The process of generating the Idoc is nothing but out bound process.
Irrespective of the senders, the abaper job in receiver system is to collect the data from Idoc.
The process of collecting the data from Idoc is nothing but in bound process.
Runtime components of Idoc: -
1. It generates a unique Idoc number, which is 16 digit.
2. It generates 3 types of records.
i. Control records
ii. Data records
iii. Status records
1. Control record : -
i. Control record specifies the sender as well as receiver information.
ii. It generates only one control record.
iii. This information will be saved on EDIDC table
2. Data records: -
i. It specify the data which is send by the senders system.
ii. It generates any number of data records.
iii. This information will be saved on EDIDD table.
3. Status records: -
i. It generates status codes for each and every stage of transferring the data.
ii. It generates any number of status records.
iii. This information will be saved on EDIDS table.
Status codes are
By Mr.Sunil
Outbound status (0-49)
Inbound status (50-75)
Note: - The linking between EDIC, EDIDD and EDIDS is the IDOC number.
Types of IDOCS Standard Idoc

1. BASIC type Custom Idoc
2. Extension Standard Idoc + Custom Idoc
Standard Idoc: -
If you want to send as well as receives the standard data base table information then we go for standard
idoc.
LFA1
LIFNR
NAME1
ORT01
Custom Idoc
If you want to send as well as receives the custom table information then we go for custom item.
Zhai
EID
ENAME
ESAL
Extension Idoc
If you want to send as well as receives the additional fields information of standard data base table along
with standard fields information then we go for extension Idoc.
LFA1
LIFNR
NAME1
ORT01
||
+
By Mr.Sunil
ZHAI
EID
ENAME
ESAL
Note: - IDOC is the collection of segments. Each segment is the collection of fields.
Characteristics of an IDOC: -
1. Name of the IDOC.
2. List of the segment
3. Hierarchy of the segments in the IDOC.
4. Optional (vs) mandatory for the segments
5. Provide parent & child relationship of the segments.
6. Each segment can carry up to 1000 bytes.
7. Provide the minimum and maximum number of repeations for the segment.
Communication between one system to another system is nothing but communication between one client
of sender system to another client of receiving system. Each participated system is called one logical
system.
Steps to establish the communication settings: -
1. Define logical system (SALE)
2. Assign client to logical system (SCC4)
3. Maintain RFC destination details (SM59)
Note: - In the real time communication settings are established by BASIS people.
If the receiver is available in following address & he wants vendor H7070 details.
Client : 810
User : SAPUSER
Password : india123
Logical system: SP810.
In this before sending the vendor details first we need to establish the communication settings from sender
to receiver system.
Steps to define logical system: -
By Mr.Sunil
Execute SALE. Expand basic settings. Expand logical systems. Execute define logical system. Enter.
Click on new entries in the application tool bar. Provide sender, receiver logical system name & short
description. Save.
SP800 Sender logical system
SP810 Receiver logical system
Steps to assign client to logical system: -
Execute SCC4. Click on change mode. Select the client. Click on details. Provide the logical system
name SP800. Click on save.
Steps to maintain RFC destination details: -
Execute SM59. Select the ABAP connections. Click on create. Provide RFC destination (SP810).
Provide short description (Sender to receiver). Click on logon & security tab. Provide the receive log on
details.
Client : 810
User : SAPUSER
PW Status : is initial
Password : india123.
Click on save. Click on connection test. Click on back. Click on remote logon in the application
tool bar.
Note: - The table is cross-client. It means what ever the changes are made in one client those are
automatically reflected into all other clients in same server.
Outbound process: -
By Mr.Sunil
Based on the given input one outbound program will triggered & fetch the application data from
the data base & generate the master IDOC.
Master IDOC is nothing but data in internal table. Master IDOC wont save anywhere in SAP.
ALE service layer reads the distribution model & identifies the interested receivers. Based on the
receivers it generates the communication IDOC.
Distribution model is the collection of senders, receivers, message type.
Message type is used to identify the type of the application (vendor, customer, material, . . .).
Communication IDOC is the physical IDOC which is receiver specific.
ALE communication layer dispatch these communication IDOC to their relevant receiver systems.
Note: - If you get the zero master IDOCs, the reason is the given input having no data in the data base.
Note: - If you get the zero communication IDOCs the reasons are
1. There is no interested receivers are available in distribution model.
2. Communication settings problem.
Steps to identify the transaction code based on short description: -

Execute SDMO. Provide short description (Send vendor). Execute. Then we identify the transaction
codes.
Some of the standard message types: -
TCODE MESSAGE TYPE IDOC TYPE SHORT DESCRIPTION
BD10 MATMAS MATMAS01
MATMAS02 Send Material
||
MATMAS05
BD11 MATMAS || Get Material
BD12 DEBMAS DEBMAS01
BEBMAS02 Send Customer
||
BDEMAS06
BD13 DEBMAS || Get customer
BD14 CREMAS CREMAS01
CREMAS02 Send Vendor
||
CREMAS05
BD15 CREMAS || Get Vendor
By Mr.Sunil
Steps to create distribution model: -
Execute BD64. Click on change mode. Click on create model view in the application tool bar. Provide
the short description (distribution), technical name (DBCM1). Enter. Select the description model which is
in the last. Click on add message type in the application tool bar. Provide sender (SP800), receiver
(SP810) and message type (CREMAS). Enter. Repeat the same step for all the receivers. Click on save.
Port number: -
Port number is used to specify the way of transferring the data. Types of ports are.
1. TRFC port ALE/IDOC
2. File port LSMW, EDI/IDOC
3. Internet port Web Apps
4. XML port Java
Steps to create the port number: -
Execute WE21. Select the transactional RFC. Click on create (F7). Enter. The system automatically
generates a port number (A000075). Provide short description (port number). Provide RFC destination
(SP810). Click on save.
Steps to create outbound partner profile: -

Execute WE20. Select the partner type LS. Click on create. Provide partner number (SP810). Click on
save. Click on create out bound parameter plus (+) button. Provide the message type (CREMAS). Provide
the port number (A000075). Select the radio button transfer IDOC immed. Select the basic type
(CREMAS05). Click on save.
Steps to send the vendor details: -

Execute BD14. Provide the vendor number (H7070). Provide the message type (CREMAS), target system
(SP810). Click on execute and absorb the master and communication IDOC s.
Steps to create vendor: -

Execute XK01. Provide the vendor number (H7070), Account group (0004). Enter. Provide the name
(GMR COR), search term (GMR), country (IN). Click on save.
Steps to check or test the IDOC: -

Execute WE02 or WE05. Provide the logical message (CREMAS), partner number (SP810). Execute.
& absorb the run time components (data control, status, data records).
Note: - After we get the status code 03, we execute RBDMOIND standard program. If the status code
03 turn to 12 then the IDOC is successfully reached to destination. If the status code remains 03, then the
IDOC is in the TRFC queue. If the status code turns to 11, then the IDOC is damaged in the queue.
Inbound process: -
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - Outbound program can be developed either through executable program or through function
module where as inbound program must be developed through functional module only because the
interface parameters are same for any message type (import, export, changing, - - -).
At the first time, before creating the inbound partner profile we do following things.
1. Define logical systems (this isnt required, if we are working with the same server).
2. Assign client to logical system.
Note: - Process code is used to identify the function module.
In the receiver system 810 client: -
Steps to assign client to logical system: -
Execute SCC4. Click on change mode. Enter. Select the client (810). Click on details. Provide
logical system (SP810). Save.
Steps to create inbound partner profile: -

Execute WE20. Select the partner type LS. Click on create (F5). Provide partner number
(SP800). Click on save. Click on create inbound parameter. Provide the message type (CREMAS). Select
the process code (CRE1). Click on save.
Steps to test / check the idoc: -

Execute WE02/05. Provide the message type (CREMAS), partner number (SP800). Execute.
Steps to reprocess the idoc: -

Execute BD87. Provide the idoc number (85001). Execute. select the error. Click on process.
Inbound process: -
After idoc reached to receiver system, then it goes to WE20 inbound partner profile & check the
message type. If the message type is available, then it goes to process code. Against the process code it
triggers the inbound program (function module). The inbound program collects the data from idoc &
By Mr.Sunil
placed into internal table. From the internal table the data is transferred to their application. From the
application the data is posted to their relevant data base tables.
Note: - At the time of creating the outbound partner profile if we select the mode of dispatch is collect
then we must execute RSEOUT00 standard program then only the collect idocs will be dispatched to
their relevant receiver system.
Note: - At the time of creating the inbound partner profile if you select the mode of posting is trigger by
background (collect) then we must execute RBDAPP01 standard program.
Then only the collect idocs will be posted to their relevant data base table.
Types of distributing the data: -

1. Send entire information
2. Send changes only (change partner technique)
3. Get entire information
Change pointer technique: -
Change pointer technique is used to send the changes of master data from sender to receiver system.
By Mr.Sunil
Process flow of change pointer technique: -
When ever the changes occurred in the master data the standard SAP itself prepare one change document.
ALE service layer invokes the SMD (Shared Master Data) SMD reads the distribution model & identifies
the interested receivers. If any receiver is available then it generates the change pointers for the change
document. These change pointers are available in BDCP table. The change pointer technique reads the
change pointers & generates as well as dispatch the idoc to the receiver system.
ALE configuration steps for change pointer technique: -
1. ALE Configuration steps for Idoc outbound.
Create distribution model (BD64) Create outbound partner profile (WE20)
2. Activate the change pointer technique (BD61)
3. Active the message type (BD50)
4. Generate as well as dispatch the IDOC (BD21)
Configure the ALE to send the changes of vendor master data from sender to receiver system
Steps to activate change pointer technique: -
Execute BD61. Select the change box change points activated. Click on save.
Steps to activate message type: -
Execute BD50. Click on position. Provide the message type (CREMAS). Enter. Select the
activate checkbox (CREMAS, CREMAS_SUSMM). Click on save.
Steps to change the vendor: -
Execute XK02. Provide vendor number (H7071). Select the address check box. Enter. Provide the title
(Company) change search to BIG instead of B. Click on save.
Steps to generate as well as dispatch for IDOC for change pointers: -
Execute BD21. Provide the message type (CREMAS). Execute.
Check the idoc in WE02 / WE05.
Note: - Change pointer technique always at senders system only for master data.
Steps to identify the old & new changes of any document: -
Execute SE11. Open the table CDHDR in display mode. Click on contents. Provide the object ID
as your document number (H7071). Execute. Identify the object class & changers.
By Mr.Sunil
Open the CDPOS table in SE11. Click on contents. Provide the object class (KRED) object ID (H7071)
changenr (592227). Execute & identify the old & new values of the document.
Some of the standard requesting message type: -
Application Message type Requesting Message type
VENDOR CREMAS CREFET
CUSTOMER DEBMAS DEBFET
MATERIAL MATMAS MATFET
Note: - ALEREQ01 is the IDOC type for any requesting message type.
Note: - EDIMSG is the standard data base table which contains all the message types, IDOC types
and requesting message types.
Getting entire information
Note: - Before configure the get entire information we must establish the communication settings from
receiver to sender.
Steps to Establish the communication settings from receiver to sender: -

1. Define the logical system it does not require if we are working with same server.
2. Assign client to logical system.
3. Maintain RFC destination details
By Mr.Sunil
By Mr.Sunil
By Mr.Sunil
In receiver system 810: -
Steps to maintain RFC destination details: -

Execute SM59. Select the ABAP connections. Click on create. Provide RFC destination (SP800). Provide
short description (Receiver to sender). Click on logon & security tab. Provide sender logon details.
Client : 800
User : sapuser
Password : india123.
Click on save. Click on connection text. Come back. Click on remote log on.

Execute BD64. Click on change mode. Click on create model view. Provide short description, technical
name. Enter. Select the distribution model which is in last. Click on add message type in the application
tool bar. Provide sender (SP810), Receiver (SP800), message type (CREFET). Enter. Click on save.
Steps to create port number: -

Execute WE21. Select the transactional RFC. Click on create. Enter. Provide short description, port
number, RFC destination (SP800). Click on save.

Execute WE20. Select partner (SP800). Click on create outbound parameter [(+) symbol]. Provide
message type (CREFET), port number (A000018). Click on transfer IDOC immediate. Select the basic
type (ALEREQ01). Save.
Steps to get the vendor: -

Execute BD15. Provide the vendor number which vendor you want (H8091). Message type (CREMAS).
Execute.
Steps to check the IDOC: -

Execute WE02. Provide the message type (CREFET), partner number (SP800). Execute.
In sender system 800 client: -

Execute WE20. Select the partner (SP810). Click on create inbound parameter. Provide the message type
(CREFET). Select process code (CREF). Save.
Steps to check the idoc: -

Execute WE05. Provide the message type (CREFET). Provide the partner number (SP810). Execute.
Note: - In the receiver requested data isnt available. Then we get the status 51. (No object for requested
Idoc selected for sending).
Note: - The name of the standard segment start with E. The name of the custom segment starts with
Z1. The definition name of the standard segment starts with EZ. The definition of custom segment
starts with Z2.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - The segment definition is useful when we communicate with non-SAP system. Based on the
segment definition only the middleware converters convert the senders format to receivers format.
Filtering technique: -
Filtering techniques are used to generate the idoc based on the conditions. Filtering techniques
are always at sender system.
There are 3 types of filtering techniques.
Idoc filtering: -
Idoc filtering is used to drop the idoc at run time. Idoc filtering conditions are placed or
maintained in distribution model.
Before generating the communication idocs ALE service layer reads the distribution model & identifies
the interested receivers. If any receiver is available then it checks the given input satisfies the filtering
conditions or not. If it satisfies the filtering condition then only it generates the communication idoc. Other
wise it wont generate any communication idoc.
Configure the ALE to send only semi finished products to the receiver system
In this object we provide the idoc filtering conditions in the distribution model.
Execute BD64. Click on change mode. Click on create model view in the application tool bar.
Provide the short description & technical name (DBMATMAS). Enter. Select the distribution model
which is in last. Click on add message type. Provide sender, receiver, and message type (MATMAS).
Enter. Expand the distribution model until No filter set. Double click on it. Click on create filter group in
the bottom. Expand the data filtering. Expand the filter group. Double click on our requirement (material
type). Click on insert row button (+). Select the value (HALB). Enter. Click on ok. Save the distribution.
Create outbound parameter profile WE20.
Steps to send the material: -
By Mr.Sunil
Execute BD10. Provide the material number (100-110), message type (MATMAS), logical system
(SA810). Execute. Here 100 110 is a raw material. So it wont generate any communication idoc.
Segment filtering: -
Its used to drop the segments permanently to the particular receiver system. The transaction code for
segment filtering is BD56.
Note: - WE30 is the transaction code to create as well as display the idoc.
Note: - WE31 is the transaction code to create as well as display the segment.
Note: - When ever we are working with segment filtering then we must create dummy partner profile
for sender system itself.
Steps to create dummy partner profile for sender itself: -

Execute WE20. select the partner type LS. Click on create. Provide the partner number SP800.
Save.
Configure the segment filtering to drop the E1LFA1A segment information permanently to the
SP810 receiver.
Steps to work with segment filtering: -

Execute BD56. Provide the message type. Click on new entries (F5) in the application tool bar.
Provide the sender type (LS) sender (SP800). Receiver type (LS), Receiver (SP810) segment type
(E1LFA1A). Repeat the same steps for all which are dropped. Click on save.
Reduced Idoc: -
Reduced idoc is used to drop the segments as well as fields permanently to the particular receiver
system. We cant drop the mandatory segments as well as mandatory fields which are in green colour. The
transaction code for reduced idoc is BD53.
In the reduced idoc we create the new message type based on the existing message type. Based on
the new message type we configure the ALE. (Create distribution model, outbound partner profile).
Steps to work with reduced idoc: -
Execute BD53. Provide the reduced message type (DEBMAS). Click on create. Provide the
reference message type (DEBMAS). Enter. Provide short description (Reduced message of customer).
Select the required segments by placing the cursor on the segment. Click on select button in the
application tool bar. Double click on the segment. Select the required fields. Click on select. Enter. Repeat
the same steps for all other segments. Click on save. Based on this new message type (ZSDEBMAS) we
create the distribution model & outbound partner profile.
By Mr.Sunil
Against vendor supplies the where house department create a GR [Goods Receipt] with MIGO
transaction & 101 moment type. Against GR the Finance people physically verify the stock & prepare the
invoice receipt (IR). Against IR document the account payable department pay the amount to the vendor
with deducts of TDS amount. After few days the vendor asks the form 16 to the tax department of the
company. When ever the tax department or Finance department generate the form 16 then need to enter
the LR number. Vehicle number, transporter name etc. This information is not captured in the entire MM
life cycle. Here design one screen with those fields & attached to MIGO transaction by using BADI.
When ever the where house people create the GR then they also maintain these additional screen
information. These information stored in separated Ztable. If you want to send or receive this Ztable
information then we go for custom idoc.
Each batch has their own characteristics (Classification) that information is maintained in separate
ZTABLE. If you want to send as well as receive that ZTABLE information then we go for
custom idoc.
If you want to open the batch classification details then execute MSC3N. Provide the material,
plant & batch. Click on enter. Click on classification tab. Identify the classification details.
MCHA is the standard data base table which contains material batch details.
Configure the ALE to send as well as receives the GR additional information which is
stored in the following table.
By Mr.Sunil
ALE Configuration steps for custom idoc
outbound: -
1. Create the segments (WE31).
2. Create the IDOC (WE30).
3. Create the Message type (WE81)
4. Link the message type to idoc type (WE82).
5. Create the port number (WE21).
6. Create the outbound partner profile (WE20)
7. Distribution model isnt required if we pass
control record information in the program (Sender,
Receiver, Message type - - -).
Steps to create segment: -

Execute WE31. Provide the segment name (Z1SGRS1).
Click on create. Provide short description. Provide field
names, data elements.
Save the segment. Repeat the steps for all the segments.
Note: - When ever we create the segment then

automatically an equality structure is create in the data dictionary & also segment definition is create.
Steps to create the IDOC: -
Execute WE30. Provide the IDOC name (ZS930GRI). Click on create. Provide short description. Enter.
Select the IDOC name. Click on create segment. Provide the segment name. If the segment is mandatory
then select the check box. Provide minimum & maximum number f repetitions (1 & 99). Enter. Repeat the
same steps for all the segments in the IDOC. Click on save.
Steps to create Message type: -
Execute WE81. Click on change mode. Enter. Click on new entries in the application tool bar. Provide
message type (S930GRMAS), short description (GR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MESSAGE
TYPE). Save.
Steps to link the message type to idoc type: -
Execute WE82. Click on change mode. Click on new entries. Provide the message type (S930GRMAS),
basic type (ZS930GRI) & release (700). Save.
Steps to identify the release: -
By Mr.Sunil
Execute SE11. Open the data base table EDIMSG. Click on contents. Execute. Select the released filed
& click on sort descending order. Identify the latest released.
Steps to create port number: -
Execute WE21. Select the transactional RFC. Click on create. Select the radio button own port name.
Provide the name (S930GRP). Enter. Provide short description. Provide RFC destination (SP810).
Execute WE20. Select the partner if its already exist. Click on create outbound parameter. Provide the
message type (S930GRMAS), provide the port number (S930GRP). Select the radio button transfer
immediate. Select basic type. Save.
Steps to develop the custom Idoc outbound program: -
1. Design the selection-screen as shown in the below.
2. Generate the master IDOC (Based on the given input, we fetch the application data from data base and
placed into internal table).
3. Collect the control record information (Sender, Receiver, Message type, Idoc type, - -).
4. Generate as well as dispatch the communication Idoc.
Steps to identify the field name & data element of message type & logical system: -
Execute BD14 or any known transaction. Place the cursor on message type input field. Click on F1.
Click o technical information. Identify the data element (EID_MESTYP) & field name (MSGTYP). Place
the cursor on target system input field. Click on F1. Click on technical information. Identify the data
element (LOGSYS) & field.
Step 1: -
Tables ZS930GR.
Select-options S_GRNO for ZS930GR-GRNO.
Parameter: P_MESTYP type EDI_MESTYPE obligatory,
P_LOGSYS type LOGSYS.
By Mr.Sunil
Step 2: -
Generate the master IDOC is nothing but fill an internal table which contains two fields.
Note: - In the data dictionary we have one structure or a table I.e. EDIDD which contains the above
fields. So we simply declare our internal table by referring EDIDD structure or table.
Note: - When ever we are working with custom idoc then we must declare 3 internal tables. One is for
data. One is for control & one is for communication & also need to declare one work area & internal table
for each segment in the idoc.
Procedure to fill master idoc: -
Based on the given input well fetch the data from data base & fill the each segment internal table. Loop
the each segment internal data. Fill the master idoc.
Data: WA_DATA like EDIDD,

IT_DATA like table of WA_DATA.
Data: WA_SEG1 like Z1SGRS1,
IT_SEG1 like table of WA_SEG1.
Select GRNO GRYEAR LRNO VNO TNAME from ZS930GR into table IT_SEG1 where GRNO in
S_GRNO.
Loop at IT_SEG1 into WA_SEG1.
WA_DATA-SEGNAM = Z1SGRS1.
WA_DATA-SDATA = WA_SEG1.
Append WA_DATA to IT_DATA.
Clear WA_DATA.
Endloop.
By Mr.Sunil
Step 3: -
Collect the control record information is nothing but fill an internal table which contains following fields.
SNDPRT Sender Partner Type
SNDPRN Sender Partner Number
RCVPRT Receiver Partner Type
RCVPRN Receiver Partner Number
RCVPOR Receiver Port Number
DOCTYP IDOC Number
MESTYP Message type
In the dictionary we have one structure or a table that is EDIDC which contains above fields. So we
simply declare our internal table by referring EDIDC structure.
Data: WA_CONT like EDIDC,
IT_CONT like table of WA_CONT.
WA_CONT-SNDPRT = LS.
WA_CONT-SNDPRN = SP800.
WA_CONT-RCVPRT = LS.
WA_CONT-RCVPRN = SP810.
WA_CONT-RCVPOR = S930GRP.
WA_CONT-DOCTYP = ZS930GRI.
WA_CONT-MESTYP = S930GRMAS.
Append WA_CONT to IT_CONT.
Repeat the same steps for all the receivers.
Step 4: -
For each receiver in the control record internal table we need to generate as well as dispatch the
communication idoc.
Note: - MASTER_IDOC_DISTRIBUTE is the function module which is used to generate as well as

dispatch the communication idoc. The input for the above function module is control record work area,
data internal table. The output for the above function module is communication idoc internal table.
*Declare communication idoc internal table
Data: WA_COMM like EDIDC,
IT_COMM like table of WA_COMM.
* For each receiver generate & dispatch communication idoc.
Loop at it_cont into wa_cont.
Call function MASTER_IDOC_DISTRIBUTE
EXPORTING
MASTER_IDOC_CONTROL = WA_CONT
TABLES
COMMUNICATION_IDOC_CONTROL = IT_COMM
MASTER_IDOC_DATA = IT_DATA.
Commit work.
Endloop.
* Release the idocs for queue.
Call function DEQUEUE_ALL.
By Mr.Sunil
*Display the communication idoc to know the status.
Call function REUSE_ALV_GRID_DISPLAY
EXPORTING
I_STRUCTURE_NAME = EDIDC.
TABLE
T_OUTTAB = IT_COMM.
Steps to create TCODE: -
Execute SE93. Provide transaction code (ZS930GRS). Click on create. Provide short description. Select
the radio button program and selection screen. Enter. Provide the program name
(ZENRICH_930AM_CUS_IDOC_OB). Select the GUI checkboxes. Save.
ALE configuration steps for custom IDOC inbound: -

1. Create the segments (WE31).
2. Create the IDOC (WE30).
3. Create the message type (WE81).
4. Link the message type to idoc type (WE82).
5. Create the function module (SE37).
Note: - In the real time we never create our own function module. We always copy the existing function
module because interface programs are same for any message type (import, export, - - ).
6. Link the message type to function module & Idoc (WE57).
7. Create the mode of posting (BD51).
8. Create the process code (WE42).
9. Link the process code to function module (WE42).
10. Create inbound partner profile (WE20).
In receiver system 810 client: -

Steps to identify the existing function module: - Execute WE42. Click on position. Provide the known
process code (CRE1). Double click on process code. Identify the identification as function module
(IDOC_INPUT_CREDITOR).
Execute SE37. In the menu bar click on go to function groups create group. Provide function
group name (ZS930FGI). Provide short description (function group for idoc). Click on save.
Steps to activate the function group: -
By Mr.Sunil
In the menu bar click on environment Inactive objects. Expand the function group under local object.
Select the function group. Right click on it. Click on activate. Enter.
Steps to copy the function module:- Execute SE37. Click on copy in the application tool bar. Provide
the from function module (IDOC_INPUT_CREDITOR), to function module
(ZS930_IDOC_INPUT_GRTOR) & function group (ZS930FGI). Click on copy. Open our function
module in change mode (ZS930_IDOC_INPUT_GRTOR). Click on source code tab. Remove the code
until end function. Save, check, activate the function module.
Steps to link the message type to function module & idoc: -
Execute WE57. Click on change mode, click on new entries in the application tool bar. Provide the
function module name (ZS930_IDOC_INPUT_GRTOR). Select function type is (function module).
Provide Basic type (ZS930GRI), message type is (S930GRMAS). Select the direction is inbound. Save.
Steps to create mode of posting: -
Execute BD51. Click on new entries. Provide the function module name (ZS930_INPUT_GRTOR),
select the input type 0. Click on save.
Steps to create process code as well as link the provide code to function module: -
Execute WE42. Click on change mode. Click on new entries in the application tool bar. Provide the
process code (ZGRP), short description (process code), provide identification as function module
(ZS930_IDOC_INPUT_GRTOR). Select the radio button processing type as processing by function
module. Click on save. Enter. Select the function module from the drop down
(ZS930_IDOC_INPUT_GRTOR), save.
Execute WE20. Select the partner SP800. Click on create inbound parameter. Provide the message type
(S930GRMAS), process code (ZGRP), save. After the sender sends the idoc then it goes to receiver
system & later it goes to inbound partner WE20. In the inbound partner profile it check the
S930GRMAS message type is available or not. Its available. So it goes to process code ZGRP.
Against the process code it triggers the ZS930_IDOC_INPUT_GRTOR function module & stores the
sender sending information in idoc data internal table. Here our business logic is read the segments & their
information from IDOC_DATA internal table & posted to their respective data base tables.
Function module: ZS930_DOC_INPUT_GRTOR.
Data: wa_data like line of idoc_data,
Wa_reseg1 like z1sgrs1,
Wa like zs930gr,
Wa_stat like line of idoc_status.
Loop at idoc_data into wa_data.
If wa_data-segnam = Z1SGRS1.
Wa_rseg1 = wa_data-sdata.
Move-corresponding wa_rseg1 to wa.
Insert zs930gr from wa.
If sy-subrc = 0.
Wa_stat-docnum = wa_data-docnum.
Wa_stat-status = 53.
Append wa_stat to idoc_status.
Else.
By Mr.Sunil
Endif.
Endif.
Endloop.
Steps to test the inbound program by using inbound test tool: -

Execute WE19. Select the radio button via message type. Provide message type (S930GRMAS). Click
on execute. Double click on the segment. Provide the sample data (300001, 2014, LR98765, AP04 4304,
SANDEEP). Enter. Click on inbound function module in the application tool bar. Select the check box call
in debugging mode. Select the radio button in four ground. Enter. In the menu bar click on debugging
classic debugger. Continuously click on F5 button, absorb the process flow.
In sender system 800 client
Steps to send or generate IDOC through test transaction: -
Execute WE19, select the Radio button via message type. Provide the message type. Execute. Double
click on the segment provide sample data. (60000, 2015, LR2222, AP20222, PAVAN). Enter. In the menu
bar click on edit control record. Provide receiver port (S930GRP), partner number (SP810), port type
(LS), sender partner number (SP800), partner type (LS). Enter. In the menu bar click on IDOC test
outbound idoc. Enter.
Configure the ALE to send as well as receives the employee training details as shown in the
below.
By Mr.Sunil
Segment name: Z1ETS1
Idoc name : ZETI
Message type : SETMAS
Port number : ETPORT
* Design the selection screen
* Tables ZS930ET.
Select-options S_EID for ZS930ET-EID.
Parameter: P_MESTYP type EDI_MESTYP obligatory,
P_LOGSYS type LOGSYS.
Data: WA_DATA like EDIDD,
IT_DATA like table of WA_DATA.
Data: WA_SEG1 like Z1SGRS1,
IT_SEG1 like table of WA_SEG1.
Select EID EWM ETM ENAME ETD from ZS930ET into table IT_SEG1 where EID in S_EID.
Loop at IT_SEG1 into WA_SEG1.
WA_DATA-SEGNAM = Z1ETS1.
WA_DATA-SDATA = WA_SEG1.
Append WA_DATA to IT_DATA.
Clear WA_DATA.
Endloop.
Data: WA_CONT like EDIDC,

IT_CONT like table of WA_CONT.
WA_CONT-SNDPRT = LS.
WA_CONT-SNDPRN = SP800.
WA_CONT-RCVPRT = LS.
WA_CONT-RCVPRN = SP810.
WA_CONT-RCVPOR = ETPORT.
WA_CONT-DOCTYP = ZETI.
WA_CONT-MESTYP = P_MESTYPE.
Append WA_CONT to IT_CONT.
*Declare communication idoc internal table

Data: WA_COMM like EDIDC,
IT_COMM like table of WA_COMM.
* For each receiver generate & dispatch communication idoc.
Loop at IT_CONT into WA_CONT.
Call function MASTER_IDOC_DISTRIBUTE
EXPORTING
By Mr.Sunil
MASTER_IDOC_CONTROL = WA_CONT
TABLES
COMMUNICATION_IDOC_CONTROL = IT_COMM
MASTER_IDOC_DATA = IT_DATA.
Commit work.
Endloop.
* Release the idocs for queue.
Call function DEQUEUE_ALL.
*Display the communication idoc to now the status.

Call function REUSE_ALV_GRID_DISPLAY
EXPORTING
I_STRUCTURE_NAME = EDIDC.
TABLE
T_OUTTAB = IT_COMM.
In receiver system 810 client: -
Function Module ZS930_IDOC_INPUT_ETTOR.
Process code ET1.
Process flow: -
After IDOC reached to receiver system then it goes inbound partner profile WE20 & check the message
type SETMAS is available or not. Its available. So it goes to process code ET1. Against this process
code it triggers the function module. In the function module tables tab we have IDOC_DATA internal
table is available in that the sender data is stored.
Stored login: -
We read the data from IDOC_DATA internal table & posted the data into their data base tables.
Data: WA_DATA like line of IDOC_DATA,
WA_RESEG1 likeZ1ETS1,
WA like ZS930ET,
WA_STAT like line of IDOC_STATUS.
Loop at IDOC_DATA into WA_DATA.
If WA_DATA-SEGNAM = Z1ET1.
WA_RSEG1 = WA_DATA-SDATA.
Move-corresponding WA_RSEG1 to WA.
Insert ZS930ET from WA.
If SY-SUBRC = 0.
WA_STAT-DOCNUM = WA_DATA-DOCNUM.
WA_STAT-STATUS = 53.
Append WA_STAT to IDOC_STATUS.
Else.
WA_STAT-DOCNUM = WA_DATA-DOCNUM.
WA_STAT-STATUS = 51.
Append WA_STAT to IDOC_STATUS.
Endif.
Endif.
Endloop.
By Mr.Sunil
Extension idoc: -
Its the collection of standard idoc + custom segment. As per client requirement if we add the CST number
(Central Sales Tax), LST Number (Local Sales Tax), PAN Number to the LFA1table through append
structure. If you want to send as well as receives the custom fields information along with standard field
information then we go for extension IDOC.
ALE Configuration steps for extension IDOC outbound: -

1. Create the additional segments (WE31)
2. Create the extension IDOC (WE30)
3. Link the message type to extension IDOC (WE82)
4. Create the port number (WE21)
5. Create the outbound partner profile (WE20)
6. Create the distribution model (BD64)
By Mr.Sunil
Before configure the ALE the following fields are added to LFA1 table through append structure.
Field Data element Data type Length
CSTNO ZENCSTNO CHAR 10
LSTNO ZENLSTNO CHAR 10
PANNO ZENPANNO CHAR 10
Steps to create additional segments: -
Execute WE31. Provide the segment name (Z1930VS1). Click on create. Provide short description.
Provide the field names as well as data elements.
1 CSTNO ZENLSTNO
2 LSTNO ZENLSTNO
3 PANNO ZENPANNO
Save, repeat the same steps for all segments.
Steps to create extension idoc: -
Execute WE30. Provide the extension idoc name (Z930EI). Select the radio button extension. Click on
create. Provide the linked basic type (CREMAS05). Provide short description (Vendor extension idoc).
Enter. Select the any one f the segment (E1LFA1M) (Reference segment), click on create segment. Enter.
Provide the segment type (Z1930VS1). Provide minimum (1), maximum (99). Enter. Save.
Steps to link the message type to extension idoc: -
Execute WE82. Click on change mode. Enter. Click on new entries in the application tool bar. Provide the
message type (CREMAS), basic type (CREMAS05), extension (Z930EI), release (700). Click on save.
Create the port number.
Steps to create outbound partner profile:-
Execute WE20. Select the partner if the message type is already available then select message type. Click
on detail. Provide the extension. Click on save.
If the message type isnt available then click on create outbound parameter. Provide the message type
(CREMAS), port number (A000075). Select the radio button transfer idoc immediate. Provide the basic
type (CREMAS05), extension (Z930EI). Save.
Create distribution model.
Note: - Developing a extension idoc outbound program is nothing but fill the additional segment
information only. The standard segments are filled by standard program.
Here we add the filling of additional segments information to the standard program BD14.
Adding some additional functionality to the standard functionality without disturbing the standard
functionality is always through enhancements.
By Mr.Sunil
USER EXIT: - User exits are used to adding some additional functionality to the standard functionality is
always through sub routines (form, end form).
CUSTOMER EXIT: - Its used to adding some additional functionality to the standard functionality is
always through function modules.
Note: - Customer exit is either menu exit or screen exit or function exit or filed exit.
MENU EXIT: - Its used to adding some additional menus to the standard program.
SCREEN EXIT: - Its used to adding some additional sub screens to the standard program.
FUNCTION EXIT: - Function exit play a major role in the real time. Because when ever we are working
with menu exit & screen exit & their functionality is implemented through function exit.
FIELD EXIT: - Its used to perform the additional validations on the field. Now a days field exits are
outdated.
In this extension idoc we identify the right function exit to add the filling of additional segments
logic to the standard program BD14. If you want to identify the function exit, first we need to identify
the customer exit. Because function exit is key part of customer exit.
Note: - Customer exit always identified through package of the transaction code.
Steps to identify the package of transaction: -
Execute SE93. Provide the transaction code (BD14) for which transaction function we need to identify
the package. Click on display. Identify the package (CGV).
Steps to identify the customer exit based on the package: -
Execute SMOD. Click on find function key. Provide the package (CGV). Click on execute. Identify the
customer exits (VSV00002).
VSV00002 means VSV00001 as well as VSV00002.
Steps to identify the function exit based on the custom exit: -
Execute SMOD. Provide the enhancement as customer exit name. Click on display. Click on
components in the application tool bar. Read the short description of each & every function exit & identify
the right function exit.
Note: - Some times we cant identify the right function exit based on the short description. So we
always identify the right function exit through break points.
Note: - Outbound exit will be triggered after filling of each & every standard segment.
Note: - Customer exit is always implemented through project i.e. CMOD transaction.
Steps to identify the right function ext based on the break point: -
Execute CMOD. Provide the project name (Z930VE). Click on create. Provide short description. Click
on save. Click on enhancement assignments in the application tool bar. Provide the enhancement as
customer exit names. Enter. Save. Click on components in the application tool bar. Double click on each
function exit. Place the cursor on include. Click on set / delete session break point. Activate. Back.
Click on change mode. Click on activate. Click on back. Activate the project. Now execute BD14.
Provide the input (S9090), message type, target system. Execute. Based on the given input outbound
program will be triggered & fetch the application data from database & fill the first standard segment.
After filling the each & every standard segment it goes to the right place then the cursor will stop at right
place due to break point & identify the right ext.
FUNCTION EXIT_SAPLKD01_001.
Syntax rules of an IDOC: -
1. The data for the segment must exist, if it specified as mandatory.
By Mr.Sunil
2. We shouldnt exceed maximum number of repetitions for the segment.
3. The data for the segments must exist in the same physical sequence of the segments in the idoc.
4. The data for the child segment cant exist without having the data in parent segment.
Project: Z930VE
FUNCTION EXIT: EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
Data: wa_data like line of IDOC_DATA,

Wa_seg1 like Z1930VS1,
It_seg1 like table of wa_seg1,
Wa like E1LFA1M.
If segment-name = E1LFA1M.
Read table idoc_data into wa_data index 1.
Wa = wa_data-sdata.
Select CSTNO LSTNO PANNO from LFA1 into table it_seg1 where lifnr = wa_lifnr.
Loop at it_seg1 into wa_seg1.
Wa_data-segnam = Z1930VS1.
Wa_data-sdata = wa_seg1.
Append wa_data to idoc_data.
Endloop.
Endif.
IDOC_CIMTYPE = Z930EI.
Steps to send the vendor: -

Execute BD14. Provide vendor number (S9090), message type (CREMAS), target system (SP810).
Execute. Now it sends the standard segment information & custom segment information. Go to WE05/02
to absorb the all the segments.
Extend idoc inbound: -
Writing an extension idoc inbound is nothing but read & post the additional segment information only.
The standard segments are read & posted by standard function module.
ALE configuration steps for extension IDOC inbound: -
1. Create the additional settings (WE31).
2. Create the extension idoc (WE30)
3. Link the message type to extension idoc (WE82)
5. Create inbound partner profile (WE20).
Steps to link the message type to function module and extension idoc: -
By Mr.Sunil
Execute WE57. Click on change mode. Enter. Click on new entries in the application tool bar. Provide
function module name IDOC_INPUT_CREDITOR. Select the function type as function module. Provide
basic type as CREMAS05, extension as Z930EI, message type as CREMAS. Select the direction is
inbound. Save.
Create inbound partner profile: -
Note: - Inbound exit will be triggered after it reaches the each & every custom segment. Outbound exit
is 1. Inbound exit is 2.
Here inbound is 1 & inbound exit is 2.
Procedure: -
After IDOC reached to receiver system then it goes to inbound partner profile WE20. & check the
message type CREMAS is available or not. CREMAS message type is available. So it goes to process
code CRE1. Against the process code, it identifies or triggers the inbound function module
IDOC_INPUT_CREDITOR. This function module collects the first segment data E1LFA1M & Posted to
data base. After it goes to 2nd segment Z1930VS1. This is the custom segment. So it goes to inbound ext.
in this exit we develop the logic of custom segments data reading & posted to data base.
Project: Z930VE
EXIT NAME: EXIT_SAPLKD02_001.
Data: wa_data like line of idoc_data,
Wa_rseg1 like z1930vs1,
Rwa like e1lfa1m,
Wa_stat like line of idoc_status.
Loop at idoc_data into wa_data.
If wa_data-segnam = E1LFA1M.
Rwa = wa_data-sdata.
Elseif wa_data-segnam = E1LFA1M.
Wa_rseg1 = wa_data-sdata.
Update lfa1 set CSTNO = wa_rseg1-cstno
LSTNO = wa_rseg1-lstno
PANNO = wa_rseg1-panno
Where LIFNR = rwa-lifnr.
If sy-ucomm = 0.
Else.
Endif.
Endif.
Endloop.
Serialization: -
Serialization is used to send as well as receive the collected message type information in a sequence.
EX: -
Material contains classification. I.e. first you need to send material & then classification.
If you send classification first then it waits until material is sent.
By Mr.Sunil
Create the serialization to send the material (MATMAS) & CLFMAS information.
Note: - CLFMAS Material classification

ALE configuration steps for serialization outbound: -
1. Create the serialization group (SALE)
2. Create the distribution model with related message types and SERDAT message type.
3. Create the outbound partner profile with related message types & SERDAT message type.
Steps to create serialization group: -
Execute SALE. Expand modeling & implementing business process. Expand master data distribution.
Expand serialization for sending & receiving data. Expand serialization using message type. Expand
define serialization groups. Click on new entries in the application tool bar. Provide the serialization group
(S930SG), short description. Click on save, (warning). Enter. Select the serialization group. Double click
on assignment of logical message to serial group. Click on new entries. Provide the message type
sequence number
MATMAS 1
CLFMAS 2
Sender Receiver Message type Click on save. Enter.
SP800 SP810 MATMAS Create the distribution model with
SP800 SP810 CLFMAS MATMAS CLFMAS and
SP800 SP810 SERDAT SERDAT: -
Execute BD64. Change, create model view.
Click on filter model display.

SP800
SP810
MATMAS
Select that one delete.
Similar for CLFMAS, SERDAT.
Create the outbound partner profile with MATMAS CLFMAS SERDAT message type: -
Execute WE20 LS SP810 Create outbound
CLFMAS PORTNUMBER
BASIC type CLFMAS02
SERDAT, Port number, Basic type.
SDMO (for identifying the transaction based on short description)
BD93 send classification.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - Whenever we send the material details through BD10 & classification details through
BD93 then the system check the serialization sequence & sent to the receiver system in same server.
ALE configuration steps for serialization inbound: -

1. Create the serialization group (SALE)
2. Create the inbound partner profile with related message types and SERDAT message type
(WE20).
Working with status codes / error handling in idocs: -
Note: - WE47 is the transaction code which contains all the status codes & their short description.
Outbound status codes: -
Status code 03 (Data passed to port ok). After we get the status 03, we execute RBDMOIND
standard program. If the status code 03 turns 12 then the idoc s successfully reached to destination.
If the status code 03 remains 03 same, then the idoc is in the TRFC (TRFC) port.
If the status code 03 turned to 11 then the idoc is damaged in the TRFC port.
Status code 30 (Idoc ready for dispatch): -
If the status code remains 30 then must check mode of dispatch in the outbound partner profile
(WE20). If the mode of dispatch is collect then we must execute RSEOUT00 standard program.
Then only the collect idoc will be departed to their relevant receiver systems.
If the mode of dispatch is immediate that is due to traffic. Itll reach with in 5 minutes.
Status code 29 (error in ALE server): -
An entry in the outbound table is missed (ABAPer job)
Outbound partner profile isnt available
Data miss matched (functional people job)
Ex: The given company 1000 isnt available
Synchronization and configuration program (BASIS people job)
Status code 26 (error during syntax check the idoc): -
When ever we arent follow the syntax rules, then we get the syntax error i.e. 26.
Status code 42 (idoc was created by best transaction: -
When ever we generate the idoc through test transaction WE19 then we get the status code 42.
Status code 01 (idoc generated): -
When ever the communication idoc is generated then we get the status code 01.
Note: - Status code 00 only used in R/2 system not in R/3 system.
Status code 64 (idoc ready to be transferred to application): -
If the status code remains 64 then must check the mode of posting in the inbound partner profile
(WE20). If the mode of posting is trigger by background or collects then we must execute the
RBDAPP01 standard program then only the collect IDOCS will be posted to their relevant data base
tables. If the mode of posting is trigger immediate thats due to traffic.
Status code 51 (Application document not posted): -
Data mismatched (functional people)
Ex:- The given country IN is not defined
Synchronization & Configuration problem (BASIS people job)
Status code 56 (idoc with error added):-
By Mr.Sunil
An ALE in the inbound table isnt found (ABAPer job)
(Inbound partner profile is not available)
Status code 53 (Application document posted):-
When ever the data is posted from the application to their relevant data base table successfully then
we get the status code 53.
Status code 50 (idoc added): -
When ever the idoc reached to receiver system then we get the status code 50.
Status code 62(Idoc passed to application):-
After idoc reached to receiver system then the inbound function module collect the data from idoc &
transferred to particular application if its success then we get the status code 62.
Status code 74 (Idoc was created by test transaction): -
When ever we test the inbound program through inbound test tool WE19 then we get the status code
74 instead of 50.
Archiving idoc: -
Archiving idocs are used to move or transverse the idocs information from SAP system to temporary
file in the presentation server. This is used to improve the performance of the system. Before
archiving the idocs the BASIS people create the physical file path in the presentation server &
logical file path in the SAP system & link the logical file path to physical file path through file
transaction.
Note: - We cant archive the error idocs which status code is 29 & 51 directly. First we need to
convert the error status code through some other status codes by using RC1_IDOC_SET_STATUS
standard group. Later we archive the idoc.
Steps to convert the idoc status code: -
Execute SE38. Provide the program name. RC1_IDOC_SET_STATUS. Click on execute. Provide
the idoc number. Old status code (51). New status code (68). Remove the check box test. Execute.
29 into 31
51 into 68
Steps to archive the idocs:-
Execute SARA. Provide the archive idoc is provide is IDOC. Click on enter. Click on write. Click
on maintain. Provide the variant name (ZSV1). Click on create. Select the radio button for all
selection view. Enter. Provide the inputs as per client requirement. Click on attributes. Provide the
short description. Save. Click on back. Click on start data. Click on immediate or provide date &
time save. Here the idocs are transferred or archived into physical file in the presentation server
which is created by BASIS people.
Note: - RSEXARCA is the standard program which is used to archive the IDOCS.
Note: - RSEXARCD is the standard program which is used delete the archive idoc.
Note: - RSEXARCL is the standard program which is used reload the archive idocs.
Note: - WE11 is the transaction code which is used to delete the idocs.
Steps to download the idoc information: -
Execute IDOC transaction. Select the radio button analyse idoc field values. Execute (F8). Provide
the idoc number (798746). Select the checkbox Also output empty fields. Execute. In the menu bar
click on system list save local file. Select the radio button spread sheet. Enter. Browse the
file. Save. Generate.
Working with transactional data: -
By Mr.Sunil
By using message control technique we can send the transactional data. When ever the functional
people or end user create & save the transactional data then it automatically generate as well as
dispatch the idoc.
ALE configuration steps for transactional data: -
1. Provide the output medium as ALE for the application
2.
Configure the ALE to send as well as receives the purchase order information
Steps to provide output medium as ALE for purchase order application: -
Execute NACE. Select the purchase order application (EF). Click on output types. Select the
output type which is provided by functional people. Double click on processing routines in the left
panel & absorb the medium. If the ALE medium isnt available, click on change mode, select the
EDI medium. Click on copy in the application toolbar. Select the transaction medium as
Distribution (ALE) instead of EDI. Click on enter.
Create the distribution model.
Steps to create outbound partner profile with message control information:-

Execute WE20. Select the partner. Click on create outbound parameter. Provide the message type
(ORDERS), port number (A000075). Select the radio button Transfer IDOC immediate, select the
basic type (ORDERS05). Click on message control tab, click on insert row (+) button. Select the
application (EF), select the message type (NEU). Select the process code (ME10).
If you want to send the changes also then click on insert row (+) button once again. Provide the
application, same message type, same process code. Select the check box change message. Click on
save. After completion of configuration the function people or end user perform the following
activities.
Execute ME21N. Create the purchase order. Click on messages in the application tool bar. Provide
the output type NEU, medium as ALE, partner type as LS & provide partner number. Click on
further data in the application tool bar. Enter & select the dispatch time is send immediately (when
saving the application). Click on back. Save. Then automatically one idoc is generated & dispatched
to receiver system.
ALE configuration steps for transactional data for inbound: -
1. Create
Steps to create inbound partner profile in receiver system: -
By Mr.Sunil
Execute WE20. Select the partner. Click on create inbound parameter. Select the message type
ORDERSP. Select the process code (ORDR). Click on save.
Note: - If you want to send the purchase order details to vendor then we must create outbound partner
profile under partner type LI (in WE20). If you want to send the sales order details to the customer then
you must create outbound partner profile under partner type KU. If you want to send the payment details
to the bank then we must create outbound partner profile under partner type B.
By Mr.Sunil
OOABAP
Different types of programming structures
1. Unstructured Programming
2. Procedural Programming
3. Object Oriented Programming
1. Unstructured programming: -
The entire program contains only one mail.
The same set of statements is placed in multiple locations of the same program.
Its very difficult to maintain if the program becomes very large.
2. Procedural programming: -
The entire program is splitted into smaller programs.
The same set of statements is placed in a procedure (Subroutines or Function Module) & later we
call the same procedure from different locations of the same program.
All the subroutines & function modules can access the global declarations.
It take little bit extra time to enhance the existing functionality.
3. Object Oriented Programming: -
The entire program is visualized in terms of class & objects
All the methods cant access the global declarations.
It takes very less time to enhance the existing functionality.
Key features of object oriented programming: -
1. Better programming structure
2. Most stress on data security & access
3. Reduce the redundancy of code
4. Data abstraction & encapsulation.
5. Inheritance and polymorphism
Class and Object: -
Class is the blueprint or template of an object. Object is the real one.
EX: - If you want to build a form house then we take a plan from engineer to build the form house. Its
nothing but class. Based on the plan constructed house is an object.
Note: - Based on one class we can create any number of objects.
There are two types of classes.
1. Local Class
2. Global class
Differences between Local & Global classes
A class contains two sections.

1. Class Definition
By Mr.Sunil
2. Class implementation
Class definition: -
Class definition is nothing but declaring the all the components of the class & any one of the visibility
section.
Components of a class: -
1. Attributes
2. Methods
3. Events
4. Interfaces
Attributes: - Attributes are used to declare the variables, work areas, internal tables which are needed to
implement the logics.
Methods: - Method is the collection of statements which perform the particular activity.
Events: - Events are used to handle the methods of some other class.
Interface: - Interface is the collection of methods which are defined & not implemented.
There are three types of visibility sections.

1. Public Section
2. Protected Section
3. Private Section
1. Public Section: - We can access the public components within the class as well as outside the class.
2. Protected section: - We can access the protected components within the class as well as derived or
child class.
3. Private section: - We can access the private components within the class only.
Note: - In ABAP we havent default visibility section.
Syntax of class definition: -
Class <Class name> definition.
----
---- components of class
----
Endclass.
Class Implementation: -
Class implementation is nothing but implementing the methods which are defined in the class definition.
Syntax of class implementation: -
Class <class name> implementation.
Method <method1>
----
----
----
Endmethod.
Method <method1>
----
----
----
Endmethod.
| |
| |
By Mr.Sunil
Endclass.
Note: - We can access the components of the class is always through class object.
Syntax of creating the object for the class: -
This is two step procedure.
1. Create the reference to the class
2. Create the object based on reference
Syntax of creating the reference to the class:-
Data <reference name> type ref to <class name>
Syntax of creating the object base on reference: -

Create object <reference name>.
Note: - Class object is always created under start-of-selection event only.
Syntax of declaring the method: -
Methods <method name> importing <IV1> type <DT>
<IV2> type <DT>
| |
Exporting <EV1> type <DT>
<EV2> type <DT>
| |
| |
Changing <CV1> type <DT>
<CV2> type <DT>
| |
Syntax of implementing the method: -
If the method is declared in class
Syntax
Method <method name>.
----
---- logic
----
Endmethod.
If the method is declared in interface.
Syntax
Method <interface>~<method>.
----
---- logic
Endmethod.
Syntax of calling the method: -
Call method <object name of the class> -> <method name> exporting
<IV1> = <Value1>
<IV2> = <Value2>
Importing
<EV1> = <variable1>
<EV2> = <Variable2>
| |
| |
<object name of the class> -> <method name> (Exporting
By Mr.Sunil
-----
-----
Importing
-----
- - - - -)
Perform the addition of two numbers by using OOABAP.
Parameter: P1 type I,
P2 type I. Start-of-selection.
Class C1 definition. Data RC1 type REF to C1.
Public section. Create object RC1.
Data: A type I, Call method RC1->Add1 exporting
B type I, M = P1
C type I. N = P2.
Methods: Add1 importing M type I N type I,
Call method RC1->Display.
Display.
Enclass.
Class C1 implementation. C = A + B.
Method Add1. Endmethod.
A = M. Method display.
B = N. Write C.
=== Endmethod.
Endclass.
Based on the given company code, display the comp code, comp name, city by using OOABAP.
END OF WA_T001.
CLASS C1 DEFINITION.
PUBLIC SECTION.
METHODS: GET_DATA IMPORTING
I_BUKRS TYPE T001-BUKRS,
DISPLAY.
ENDCLASS.
CLASS C1 IMPLEMENTATION.
METHOD GET_DATA.
= I_BUKRS.
ENDMETHOD.
METHOD: DISPLAY.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
START-OF-SELECTION.
DATA RC1 TYPE REF TO C1.
CREATE OBJECT RC1.
RC1->GET_DATA( EXPORTING I_BUKRS = P_BUKRS ).
By Mr.Sunil
CALL METHOD RC1->DISPLAY.
Each class contains two types of components

1. Instance components.
2. Static components
Differences between Instance & Static
PUBLIC SECTION.
DATA A TYPE I VALUE '20'.
DATA B TYPE I VALUE '30'.
ENDCLASS.
START-OF-SELECTION.
CREATE OBJECT RC1.
WRITE RC1->A.
WRITE RC1->B.
WRITE C1=>B.
Manually filling the company code, company name & city internal tables by using OOABAP.
END OF TY_T001.
By Mr.Sunil
PUBLIC SECTION.
METHODS: GET_DATA IMPORTING
I_BUKRS TYPE BUKRS
I_BUTXT TYPE BUTXT
I_ORT01 TYPE ORT01.
ENDCLASS.
METHOD GET_DATA.
WA_T001-BUKRS = I_BUKRS.
WA_T001-BUTXT = I_BUTXT.
WA_T001-ORT01 = I_ORT01.
CLEAR WA_T001.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
START-OF-SELECTION.
CREATE OBJECT RC1.
CALL METHOD RC1->GET_DATA
EXPORTING
I_BUKRS = '1000'
I_BUTXT = 'HCL'
I_ORT01 = 'HYD'.
EXPORTING
I_BUKRS = '2000'
I_BUTXT = 'IBM'
I_ORT01 = 'CHE'.
WRITE:/ WA_T001-BUKRS,WA_T001-BUTXT,WA_T001-ORT01.
ENDLOOP.
Inheritance: - Inheritance is used to create a new class based on existing class. The new class is called
child class / derived class / sub class. The existing class is called super class / parent class.
The sub class can access the all the components at super class which are defined under public or
protection section only not under the private section. Through super class object we can access the
components of the super class only. Through sub class object we can access the components of sub class
as well as super class also.
Syntax of defining the subclass: -
Class <sub class name> definition inheriting from <super class name>.
Public / protected / private section.
---
--- components.
---
Endclass.
By Mr.Sunil
Based on given company code display the company code, company name & cit by using
OOABAP which inheritance concept.
END OF WA_T001.
PUBLIC SECTION.
METHODS GET_DATA IMPORTING
I_BUKRS TYPE BUKRS.
ENDCLASS.
METHOD GET_DATA.
= I_BUKRS.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
CLASS C2 DEFINITION INHERITING FROM C1.
PUBLIC SECTION.
METHODS DISPLAY.
ENDCLASS.
METHOD DISPLAY.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
START-OF-SELECTION.
DATA: RC1 TYPE REF TO C1,
RC2 TYPE REF TO C2.
CREATE OBJECT: RC1, RC2.
EXPORTING
I_BUKRS = P_BUKRS.
Develop a Global class & method to display the all purchasing document details based on the
given purchasing document number.
Execute SE24. Provide the object type as class name (ZENRICH_10AM_GC1). Click on create. Enter.
Provide short description. Click on save click on local object. Provide the method name
(GET_PO_DETAILS). Select the level (INSTANCE Method). Select the visibility as public, provide short
description. Click on parameters.
Parameter Type Typing message Associated type
I_EBELN IMPORTING TYPE EKKO-EBELN
E_WA EXPORTING TYPE EKKO
By Mr.Sunil
Click on save. Click on code icon beside exceptions. Click on signature in the application tool bar &
identifies the input output parameters & implement the logic.
METHOD GET_PO_DETAILS.
SELECT SINGLE * FROM EKKO INTO E_WA WHERE EBELN = I_EBLEN.
ENDMETHOD.
Save, check, activate the method. Click on back. Repeat the same steps for all other methods. Save, check,
activate the class.
Steps to create the object for Global class: -
Place the cursor in the program where we want to create the object. Click on pattern in the application tool
bar. Select the radio button ABAP objects patterns. Enter. Select the radio button create object. Provide
the instance name as reference name (RGC). Provide the Global class name (ZENRICH_10AM_GC1).
Enter.
Note: - Constructer is the one special type of method I the class we no need to call the constructer
extensity by using call method when ever we create the object for the class then automatically constructer
will be triggered & asked the input output parameters.
Steps to call the Global method: -
Place the cursor where we want to call the method in the program. Click on pattern in the application tool
bar. Select the ABAP objects patterns. Enter. Select the radio button call method. Provide the instance
name as reference name (RGC). Provide the class name (ZSunil_10AM_GC1), method name
(GET_PO_DETAILS). Enter.
PARAMETER P_EBELN TYPE EKKO-EBELN.

DATA: WA_EKKO LIKE EKKO,
IT_EKKO LIKE TABLE OF WA_EKKO.
* CREATE THE REFERENCE TO THE GLOBAL CLASS.
DATA RGC TYPE REF TO ZENRICH_10AM_GC1.
* CREATE THE OBJECT.
START-OF-SELECTION.
CREATE OBJECT RGC.
CALL METHOD RGC->GET_PO_DETAILS
EXPORTING
I_EBELN = P_EBELN
IMPORTING
E_WA = WA_EKKO.
APPEND WA_EKKO TO IT_EKKO.
EXPORTING
I_STRUCTURE_NAME = 'EKKO'
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = IT_EKKO.
Note: - If you want to declare the WA with some of the fields in the global method & class then we
must create one structure with those fields in the data dictionary & after we refer the structure in global
method & class.
By Mr.Sunil
Note: - If you want to declare the IT with some of the fields in the global & method & class then in data
dictionary &later we refer the table type in the global class & method.
Note: - If you want to declare the select-options in global class & method then we must create one table
type with sign, option, low, high in the data dictionary & later we refer the table type in the global method
& class.
Based on the given sales document number, display the sales document number, document date
& customer number by using global class & method.
In this object we create one structure with VBELN, AUDAT, KUNNR & later we refer the
structure in the global method.
Structure : ZENRICH_10AM_GCS
VBELN VBELN_VA
AUDAT AUDAT
KUNNR KUNAG
Global class: ZENRICH_10AM_GC2

Method : GET_SO_DETAILS
I_VBELN IMPORTING TYPE VBAK-VBELN
E_WA EXPORTING TYPE ZENRICH_10AM_GCS
Code: -
SELECT SINGLE VBELN AUDAT KUNNR FROM VBAK INTO E_WA WHERE VBELN =
I_VBELN.
PARAMETER P_VBELN TYPE VBAK-VBELN.

DATA WA_VBAK TYPE ZENRICH_10AM_GCS.
* Create the reference
* Create the object
START-OF-SELECTION.
CREATE OBJECT RGC.
* Call the method
CALL METHOD RGC->GET_SO_DETAILS
EXPORTING
I_VBELN = P_VBELN
IMPORTING
E_WA = WA_VBAK.
WRITE:/ WA_VBAK-VBELN, WA_VBAK-AUDAT, WA_VBAK-KUNNR.
Based on the given material numbers, display the material numbers, material types, plant
numbers, plant descriptions by using global class & method.
In this object we create two table types one is for select-options, one is for display the output.
Creation of table type is two step procedure.
1. Create the structure with those fields.
2. Based on the structure we create the table type.
Structure: ZENRICH_10AM_GCSI
By Mr.Sunil
Sign Char 1
Option Char 2
Low Char 18
High Char 18
Table type name: ZENRICH_10AM_TTI.
Line type : ZENRICH_10AM_GCS0.
MATNR MATNR
MTART MTART
WERKS WERKS_D
NAME1 NAME1
Table type: ZENRICH_10AM_TTO

Line type: ZENRICH_10AM_GCS0
Class name: ZENRICH_10AM_GC3
Method : GET_MAT_DETAILS
I_SMATNR Importing type ZENRICH_10AM_TTI
E_IT Exporting type ZENRICH_10AM_TTO
Code: -
SELECT MARA~MATNR MARA~MTART MARC~WERKS T001W~NAME1 INTO TABLE E_IT
FROM MARA INNER JOIN MARC ON MARA~MATNR = MARC~MATNR INNER JOIN T001W
ON MARC~WERKS = T001W~WERKS WHERE MARA~MATNR IN I_SMATNR.
TABLES MARA.
SELECT-OPTIONS S_MATNR FOR MARA-MATNR.
DATA IT_FINAL TYPE ZENRICH_10AM_TTO.
* Create the reference to the class
* Create the object
START-OF-SELECTION.
CREATE OBJECT RGC.
* Call the method
CALL METHOD RGC->GET_MAT_DETAILS
EXPORTING
I_SMATNR = S_MATNR[]
IMPORTING
E_IT = IT_FINAL.
EXPORTING
I_STRUCTURE_NAME = 'ZENRICH_10AM_GCSO'
TABLES
Based on the given company code, display the vendors, vendor company details (BUKRS,
LIFNR, AKONT) by using global class and method
Steps to create the global class method: -
Execute SE24. Provide the class name (ZENRICH_10AM_GC4). Click on create. Enter. Provide short
description. Enter. Click on types tab. Provide the type name.
By Mr.Sunil
Type name : TY_LFB1
Visibility : Public
Select the visibility and click on back (against type). Click on yes. Remove the types. Declare the data
types.
Types: Begin of ty_lfb1,
Bukrs type lfb1-bukrs,
Lifnr type lfb1-lifnr,
Akont type lfb1-akont,
End of ty_lfb1.
Types TY_T_LFB1 type table of ty_lfb1.
Save, check, activate. Click on back. Click on methods tab. Provide the method name (GET_VENDOR).
Select the level is (Instance method). Select the visibility is public. Provide description. Click on
parameters tab.

I_bukrs importing type lfb1-bukrs
E_it exporting type ty_t_lfb1
Click on save. Click on code.
Select bukrs lifnr akont from lfb1 into table e_it where bukrs = i_bukrs.
Save, check, activate the method. Click on back. Save, check, activate the class.
By Mr.Sunil
OOPS ALV
When ever we are working with OPPS ALV, then we must design one custom screen other than 1000
and draw the custom control screen element. In that we display the ALV output.
CL_GUI_CUSTOM_CONTAINER: - The Global class which refers the custom control screen element.
CL_GUI_ALV_GRID: - The global class which refers the ALV Grid.
SET_TABLE_FOR_FIRST_DISPLAY: - This is the Global method under grid class which is used to
display the output in an OOPS ALV. The input for the above method is two internal tables.
2. Field catalog internal table
If you want to call this method then we must create object for gird class. When ever we create the
object for gird class then automatically one constructor is triggered and asks the input as object name of
container class.
When ever we create the object for container class then automatically one constructor is triggered and asks
the input as container name.
Note: - When ever we are working with OOPS ALV then we must design one custom screen
Steps to work with OPPS ALV:-
1. Create the selection-screen / input fields.
2. Declare the data internal table and field catalog
internal table
3. Create the reference to the container and grid class
start-of-selection.
PBO of the screen: -
1. Design the back button
2. Create the object to the container and gird class
3. Fill the data internal table
4. Fill the field catalog
5. Call the SET_TABLE_FOR_FIRST_DISPLAY method
PAI of the screen
1. Logic of back button.
By Mr.Sunil
Some of the fields in field catalog: -
1. Field name Name of the field
2. Col_pos Column position
3. Coltext Column heading
4. Emphasize Color
5. Outputlen Length of the displayed field
6. No-zero Remove the leading zeros
7. No-sign Remove the leading sign
8 No-out Hide the displayed field
9. Hotspot Handle symbol
10. Edit Changeable mode
11. Do_sum Calculate the total
Based on the given purchasing document numbers to display the all the purchasing document
header details by using OOPS ALV.
REPORT ZOOPS7.
TABLES EKKO.
DATA IT LIKE TABLE OF EKKO.
* Create the reference to the container and grid
DATA RC TYPE REF TO CL_GUI_CUSTOM_CONTAINER.
DATA RG TYPE REF TO CL_GUI_ALV_GRID.
START-OF-SELECTION.
CALL SCREEN '2000'.
SET PF-STATUS 'STATUS'.
* Create the object for container and grid
CREATE OBJECT RC
EXPORTING
CONTAINER_NAME = 'CC'.
CREATE OBJECT RG
EXPORTING
I_PARENT = RC.
SELECT * FROM EKKO INTO TABLE IT WHERE EBELN IN S_EBELN.
CALL METHOD RG->SET_TABLE_FOR_FIRST_DISPLAY
EXPORTING
I_STRUCTURE_NAME = 'EKKO'
CHANGING
IT_OUTTAB = IT.
ENDMODULE.
LEAVE TO SCREEN 0.
By Mr.Sunil
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
Flow logic of 2000 screen

MODULE STATUS_2000.
Based on the given customer numbers to display the customer numbers, names & cities by using
OOPS ALV and also display the customer numbers with green color, name with hotspot, city with
edit.
TABLES KNA1.
SELECT-OPTIONS S_KUNNR FOR KNA1-KUNNR.
END OF TY_KNA1.
DATA: WA_KNA1 TYPE TY_KNA1,
IT_KNA1 TYPE TABLE OF TY_KNA1.
By Mr.Sunil
DATA: IT_FCAT TYPE LVC_T_FCAT,
* Create the references
DATA: RC TYPE REF TO CL_GUI_CUSTOM_CONTAINER,
RG TYPE REF TO CL_GUI_ALV_GRID.
START-OF-SELECTION.
CALL SCREEN '2000'.
CREATE OBJECT RC
EXPORTING
CREATE OBJECT RG
EXPORTING
I_PARENT = RC.
SELECT KUNNR NAME1 ORT01 FROM KNA1 INTO TABLE IT_KNA1 WHERE KUNNR IN
S_KUNNR.
WA_FCAT-COLTEXT = 'CUSTOMER'.
WA_FCAT-NO_ZERO = 'X'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'NAME1'.
WA_FCAT-COLTEXT = 'CUST.NAME'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'ORT01'.
WA_FCAT-COLTEXT = 'CITY'.
WA_FCAT-EDIT = 'X'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
CHANGING
IT_OUTTAB = IT_KNA1
IT_FIELDCATALOG = IT_FCAT.
ENDMODULE.
LEAVE TO SCREEN 0.
By Mr.Sunil
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
Based on the given sales order umbers, display the
sales document header details (VBELN, AUDAT,
KUNNR) & sales doc item details (VBELN, POSNR,
KWMENG, MEINS, NETWR) side by side by using
OOPS ALV.
TABLES VBAK.
SELECT-OPTIONS S_VBELN FOR VBAK-VBELN.
END OF TY_VBAK.
TYPES: BEGIN OF TY_VBAP,
VBELN TYPE VBAP-VBELN,
POSNR TYPE VBAP-POSNR,
KWMENG TYPE VBAP-KWMENG,
MEINS TYPE VBAP-MEINS,
END OF TY_VBAP.
DATA: WA_VBAP TYPE TY_VBAP,
IT_VBAP TYPE TABLE OF TY_VBAP.
DATA: IT_FCAT1 TYPE LVC_T_FCAT,
DATA: IT_FCAT2 TYPE LVC_T_FCAT,
* Create the references
DATA: RC1 TYPE REF TO CL_GUI_CUSTOM_CONTAINER,
RG1 TYPE REF TO CL_GUI_ALV_GRID.
DATA: RC2 TYPE REF TO CL_GUI_CUSTOM_CONTAINER,
RG2 TYPE REF TO CL_GUI_ALV_GRID.
START-OF-SELECTION.
CALL SCREEN '2000'.
CREATE OBJECT RC1
EXPORTING
CONTAINER_NAME = 'CC1'.
CREATE OBJECT RG1
EXPORTING
I_PARENT = RC1.
CREATE OBJECT RC2
EXPORTING
By Mr.Sunil
CONTAINER_NAME = 'CC2'.
CREATE OBJECT RG2
EXPORTING
I_PARENT = RC2.
* Filling the data internal tables
SELECT VBELN AUDAT KUNNR FROM VBAK INTO TABLE IT_VBAK WHERE VBELN IN
S_VBELN.
SELECT VBELN POSNR KWMENG MEINS NETWR FROM VBAP INTO TABLE IT_VBAP
WHERE VBELN IN S_VBELN.
* Filling the field catalogs
WA_FCAT1-FIELDNAME = 'VBELN'.
WA_FCAT1-COLTEXT = 'SALES.DOC'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT1.
WA_FCAT1-FIELDNAME = 'AUDAT'.
WA_FCAT1-COLTEXT = 'DOC.DATE'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT1.
WA_FCAT1-FIELDNAME = 'KUNNR'.
WA_FCAT1-COLTEXT = 'CUSTOMER'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT1.
WA_FCAT2-FIELDNAME = 'VBELN'.
WA_FCAT2-COLTEXT = 'SALES.DOC'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT2.
WA_FCAT2-FIELDNAME = 'POSNR'.
WA_FCAT2-COLTEXT = 'ITEM'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT2.
WA_FCAT2-FIELDNAME = 'KWMENG'.
WA_FCAT2-COLTEXT = 'QTY'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT2.
WA_FCAT2-FIELDNAME = 'MEINS'.
WA_FCAT2-COLTEXT = 'UOM'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT2.
WA_FCAT2-FIELDNAME = 'NETWR'.
By Mr.Sunil
WA_FCAT2-COLTEXT = 'PRICE'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT2.
CALL METHOD RG1->SET_TABLE_FOR_FIRST_DISPLAY
CHANGING
IT_OUTTAB = IT_VBAK
IT_FIELDCATALOG = IT_FCAT1.
CALL METHOD RG2->SET_TABLE_FOR_FIRST_DISPLAY
CHANGING
IT_OUTTAB = IT_VBAP
IT_FIELDCATALOG = IT_FCAT2.
ENDMODULE.
LEAVE TO SCREEN 0.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
Some of the fields in layout work area: -

1. CWIDTH_OPT Compress the displayed fields.
2. ZEBRA Stripped pat urn
3. INFO_FNAME color field
Note: - In the DDIC we have one structure. That is LVC_S_LAYO which contains above fields. So
we simply declare our layout work area by referring LVC_S_LAYO.
Based on the given purchasing document numbers, display the document numbers,
item numbers, quantity, UOM & net price & also display the item details in a yellow color if the
amount is more than 1000 by using OOPS ALV.
Steps to work with row color: -
1. Declare the additional color field in the data internal table, which is char & length is 4.
2. Fill the data internal table based on given input
3. Modify the color field based on client requirement
4. pass the color field name into layout work area (INFO, FNAME field)
5. Fill the field catalog
6. Display the output by using SET_TABLE_FOR_FIRST_DISPLAY method by passing data
internal table, field catalog internal table, layout work area.
TABLES EKPO.
CF(4) TYPE C,
WA_EKKO-CF =
By Mr.Sunil
C310.
[email protected] Modify it_ekpo from Page 288
wa_ekpo transporting
CF where netpr > 1000.
END OF TY_EKPO.
* Declare the layout work area
DATA WA_LAYOUT TYPE LVC_S_LAYO.
* Create the reference
START-OF-SELECTION.
CALL SCREEN '2000'.
* Create the object
CREATE OBJECT RC
EXPORTING
CREATE OBJECT RG
EXPORTING
I_PARENT = RC.
* Modify the color field.
WA_EKPO-CF = 'C310'.
MODIFY IT_EKPO FROM WA_EKPO TRANSPORTING CF WHERE NETPR > 1000.
* Pass the color field into layout work area.
WA_LAYOUT-INFO_FNAME = 'CF'.
WA_FCAT-COLTEXT = 'PUR.DOC'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'EBELP'.
WA_FCAT-COLTEXT = 'ITEM'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'MENGE'.
WA_FCAT-COLTEXT = 'QTY'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'MEINS'.
By Mr.Sunil
WA_FCAT-COLTEXT = 'UNITS'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-FIELDNAME = 'NETPR'.
WA_FCAT-COLTEXT = 'PRICE'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.

EXPORTING
CHANGING
IT_OUTTAB = IT_EKPO
ENDMODULE.
LEAVE TO SCREEN 0.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
Working with events: -

Events are raised as well as handled within the class & also handle through some other class by using
methods. Events have only exporting parameters. It doesnt contain importing parameters.
Note: - When ever we are working with events then we must register the events before call the methods.
Syntax of declaring the events: -
Events <event name> exporting <EP1> <EP2> - - -
Syntax of raise the event:-
Raise <event name>
Syntax of declaring event handler method: -
Methods <event handler method name> for event <event name> of <class name>.
Which class contains events
Syntax of register the events: -
SET handler <object name of class>-><event handler method> for <object name of class>
Which class contains event declaration
Which class contains event handler method
Based on the given customer number, display the customer number, name, city by using
OOABAP & also print the error if the input is invalid by using events.
PARAMETER P_KUNNR TYPE KNA1-KUNNR.

DATA: BEGIN OF WA_KNA1,
By Mr.Sunil
END OF WA_KNA1.
PUBLIC SECTION.
METHODS: GET_DATA IMPORTING I_KUNNR TYPE KNA1-KUNNR,
DISPLAY.
EVENTS NODATA.
ENDCLASS.
METHOD GET_DATA.
SELECT SINGLE KUNNR NAME1 ORT01 FROM KNA1 INTO WA_KNA1 WHERE KUNNR
= P_KUNNR.
IF SY-SUBRC <> 0.
RAISE EVENT NODATA.
ENDIF.
ENDMETHOD.
METHOD DISPLAY.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
PUBLIC SECTION.
METHODS EHM FOR EVENT NODATA OF C1.
ENDCLASS.
METHOD EHM.
MESSAGE E000(ZHAI11) WITH 'INVALID CUSTOMER'.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
START-OF-SELECTION.
DATA: RC1 TYPE REF TO C1,
RC2 TYPE REF TO C2.
CREATE OBJECT: RC1, RC2.
SET HANDLER RC2->EHM FOR RC1.
EXPORTING
I_KUNNR = P_KUNNR.
Some of the events in OOPS ALV: -

1. PRINT_TOP_OF_PAGE
2. PRINT_TOP_OF_LIST
3. PRINT_END_OF_PAGE
4. PRINT_END_OF_LIST
5. DOUBLE_CLICK
By Mr.Sunil
PRINT_TOP_OF_PAGE: - Its an event which is triggered at the top of each page.
PRINT_TOP_OF_LIST: - Its an event which is triggered at the end of the displayed output list.
PRINT_END_OF_PAGE: - Its an event which is triggered at the end of each page.
PRINT_END_OF_LIST: - Its an event which is triggered at the end of displayed output list.
DOUBLE_CLICK: - Its an event which is triggered at the time of user clicks on any record of any list. It
export two parameters (E_ROW, E_COLUMN).
E_ROW contains index number of selected record.
E_COLUMN contains field name which is clicked by the user.
Based on the given sales document numbers & dates, display the sales document numbers,
document dates & customer numbers by using OOPS ALV& also display the TOP_OF_PAGE as
These are sales order details. TOP_OF_LIST as ENRICH Technologies.
TABLES VBAK.
SELECT-OPTIONS: S_VBELN FOR VBAK-VBELN,
S_AUDAT FOR VBAK-AUDAT NO-EXTENSION.
END OF TY_VBAK.
PUBLIC SECTION.
METHODS: EHTL FOR EVENT PRINT_TOP_OF_LIST OF CL_GUI_ALV_GRID,
EHTP FOR EVENT PRINT_TOP_OF_PAGE OF CL_GUI_ALV_GRID.
By Mr.Sunil
ENDCLASS.
METHOD EHTL.
WRITE:/ 'ENRICH TEHCNOLOGIES'.
ENDMETHOD.
METHOD EHTP.
WRITE:/ 'THESE ARE SO DETAILS'.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
* Create the reference to the container & grid
START-OF-SELECTION.
CREATE OBJECT RC
EXPORTING
CREATE OBJECT RG
EXPORTING
I_PARENT = RC.
S_VBELN AND AUDAT IN S_AUDAT.
* Fill the field catalog
WA_FCAT-COLTEXT = 'SALES.DOC'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-COLTEXT = 'DOC.DATE'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
* Create the reference & object for local class
CREATE OBJECT RC2.
* Register the events.
SET HANDLER RC2->EHTL FOR RG.
SET HANDLER RC2->EHTP FOR RG.
CHANGING
By Mr.Sunil
IT_OUTTAB = IT_VBAK
ENDMODULE.
LEAVE TO SCREEN 0.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
Note: - LVC_FIELDCATALOG_MERGE is the function module which is used to fill the field catalog
internal table. The input for the above function module is data structure which data we want to display
(Based on the displayed fields we create structure in SE11). The output for the above function module is
field catalog internal table. Instead of passing the structure to the merge function module we can directly
pass the structure to SET_TABLE_FOR_FIRST_DISPLAY method. So we cant use merge function
module to prepare the field data
Call transaction <TCODE>.
Syntax of set the value before calling the transaction: -
Set parameter id <idname> field <value>.
Steps to identify the parameter id: -
Execute required transaction (XK03). Place the cursor on input field. Click on F1. clickon technical
information. Identify the parameter id.
Parameter p_lifnr type lfa1-lifnr,
Set parameter id LIF field p_lifnr.
Call transaction XK03.
Syntax of get the current document which is opened: -
Get parameter id <ID NAME> field variable.
EX: -
Data V type EKKO, EBELN.
Get parameter id BES field V.
Write V.
GET & SET are called SAP memory. IMPORT, EXPORT, CHANGING, - - are called ABAP memory.
Based on the given sales document numbers, display the sales document numbers, document
dates & customer numbers by using OOPS ALV. If the user clicks on any sales document number
only then we display the sales order details through VA03 transaction. If the user clicks on any
customer number only then we display the customers details through XD03 transaction.
TABLES VBAK.
SELECT-OPTIONS S_VBELN FOR VBAK-VBELN.
END OF TY_VBAK.
By Mr.Sunil

PUBLIC SECTION.
METHODS EHDC FOR EVENT DOUBLE_CLICK OF CL_GUI_ALV_GRID
IMPORTING E_ROW E_COLUMN.
ENDCLASS.
METHOD EHDC.
READ TABLE IT_VBAK INTO WA_VBAK INDEX E_ROW-INDEX.
IF E_COLUMN-FIELDNAME = 'VBELN'.
SET PARAMETER ID 'AUN' FIELD WA_VBAK-VBELN.
CALL TRANSACTION 'VA03'.
ELSEIF E_COLUMN-FIELDNAME = 'KUNNR'.
SET PARAMETER ID 'KUN' FIELD WA_VBAK-KUNNR.
CALL TRANSACTION 'XD03'.
ENDIF.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
START-OF-SELECTION.
CALL SCREEN 2000.

SET PF-STATUS 'HAI'.
CREATE OBJECT RC
EXPORTING
CREATE OBJECT RG
EXPORTING
I_PARENT = RC.
S_VBELN.
WA_FCAT-COLTEXT = 'SALES.DOC'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
WA_FCAT-COLTEXT = 'DATE'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
By Mr.Sunil
CLEAR WA_FCAT.
CREATE OBJECT RC2.
SET HANDLER RC2->EHDC FOR RG.

CHANGING
IT_OUTTAB = IT_VBAK
ENDMODULE.

LEAVE TO SCREEN 0.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
By Mr.Sunil
Working with OOPS BDC
1. Do the recording
2. Prepare the file
3. Upload the data from file to internal table / BDC program
4. For each record in the internal table collect the screen and field details.
5. For each record in internal table, call the transaction.
Note: - In this OOPS BDC we need to declare 3 methods.
1. Upload data.
2. Fill screen details
3. Fill field details
Syntax of declaring the method for upload data: -
Methods <method name> importing <file name> type string.
Syntax of implementation: -
Method <method name>
Call function GUI_UPLOAD
<Field name>
X
<Data IT>
Endmethod.
Declaring the fill screen method: -
Methods fill_screen importing
I_prog type bdc_prog
I_dynpro type bdc_dynr
I_dynbegin type bdc_start.
Implementation
Method fill_screen.
Wa_bdcdata-program = i_prog.
Wa_bdcdata-dynpro = i_dynpro.
Wa_bdcdata-dynbegin = i_dynbegin
Append wa_bdcdata to it_bdcdata.
Clear wa_bdcdata.
Declaring the fill field method: -
Method fill_field importing
I_fnam type fnam____4
I_fval type c.
Implementation
Method fill_field.
Wa_bdcdata-fam = i_fnam.
Wa_bdcdata-fval = i_fval.
Append wa_bdcdata to it_bdcdata.
Clear wa_bdcdata.
Endmethod.
Develop a conversion program to upload the bank details from flat file to SAP system by using
BDC call transaction method by using OOPS ABAP.
The flat file contains bank country key, bank key & bank name.
Steps to do the recording:-
By Mr.Sunil
Execute SHDB. Click on new recording in the application tool bar. Provide the recording name,
transaction code (FI01). Enter. Provide country (IN), bank key (554141). Enter. Provide the bank name
(HDFC Bank). Save.
REPORT ZOOABAPBDC.
BANKS TYPE BNKA-BANKS,
BANKL TYPE BNKA-BANKL,
BANKA TYPE BNKA-BANKA,
END OF TY_BANK.


PUBLIC SECTION.
METHODS: UPLOAD_DATA IMPORTING I_FILE TYPE STRING,

FILL_SCREEN IMPORTING
I_PROG TYPE BDC_PROG
I_DYNPRO TYPE BDC_DYNR
I_DYNBEGIN TYPE BDC_START,
FILL_FIELD IMPORTING
I_FNAM TYPE FNAM_____4
I_FVAL TYPE C.
ENDCLASS.
METHOD UPLOAD_DATA.
EXPORTING
FILENAME = I_FILE
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_BANK.
ENDMETHOD.
METHOD FILL_SCREEN.
WA_BDCDATA-PROGRAM = I_PROG.
WA_BDCDATA-DYNPRO = I_DYNPRO.
WA_BDCDATA-DYNBEGIN = I_DYNBEGIN.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
ENDMETHOD.
By Mr.Sunil
METHOD FILL_FIELD.
WA_BDCDATA-FNAM = I_FNAM.
WA_BDCDATA-FVAL = I_FVAL.
CLEAR WA_BDCDATA.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
START-OF-SELECTION.
CREATE OBJECT RC1.
CALL METHOD RC1->UPLOAD_DATA
EXPORTING
I_FILE = 'C:\Users\Administrator\Desktop\22.TXT'.
CALL METHOD RC1->FILL_SCREEN

EXPORTING
I_PROG = 'SAPMF02B'
I_DYNPRO = '0100'
I_DYNBEGIN = 'X'.
CALL METHOD RC1->FILL_FIELD

EXPORTING
I_FNAM = 'BDC_CURSOR'
I_FVAL = 'BNKA-BANKL'.

EXPORTING
I_FNAM = 'BDC_OKCODE'
I_FVAL = '/00'.

EXPORTING
I_FNAM = 'BNKA-BANKS'
I_FVAL = WA_BANK-BANKS.

EXPORTING
I_FNAM = 'BNKA-BANKL'
I_FVAL = WA_BANK-BANKL.
CALL METHOD RC1->FILL_SCREEN

EXPORTING
I_PROG = 'SAPMF02B'
I_DYNPRO = '0110'
By Mr.Sunil
I_DYNBEGIN = 'X'.

EXPORTING
I_FNAM = 'BDC_CURSOR'
I_FVAL = 'BNKA-BANKA'.

EXPORTING
I_FNAM = 'BDC_OKCODE'
I_FVAL = '=UPDA'.

EXPORTING
I_FNAM = 'BNKA-BANKA'
I_FVAL = WA_BANK-BANKA.
CALL TRANSACTION 'FI01' USING IT_BDCDATA MODE 'A'.

REFRESH IT_BDCDATA.
ENDLOOP.
Interface: -Interface is the collection of methods which are defined not implemented. These are
implemented through class implementation. Interfaces are reusable components. We can declare the same
interface in any number of classes under public section only. Interface components are always access
through object.
We cant create the interface object directly. First we create the interface reference & later assign
the class object to interface reference. Then automatically interface object is created.
Syntax of declaring the interface: -
Interface <interface name>
----
- - - - method declaration
----
Endinterface.
Syntax of access the interface in class definition: -
Interfaces <interface name>.
Based on the given company code, display the customers under company details (BUKRS
KUNNR AKONT) by using OOABAP with interface concept.
REPORT ZOOPS1199.
PARAMETER P_BUKRS TYPE KNB1-BUKRS.
INTERFACE IF1.
METHODS DISPLAY.
ENDINTERFACE.
CLASS C1 definition.
PUBLIC SECTION.
By Mr.Sunil
END OF TY_KNB1.
METHODS: GET_DATA IMPORTING I_BUKRS TYPE BUKRS.
INTERFACES IF1.
ENDCLASS.
METHOD GET_DATA.
SELECT BUKRS KUNNR AKONT FROM KNB1 INTO TABLE IT_KNB1 WHERE BUKRS =
I_BUKRS.
ENDMETHOD.
METHOD IF1~DISPLAY.
ENDLOOP.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
START-OF-SELECTION.
DATA RFC1 TYPE REF TO IF1.
CREATE OBJECT RC1.
RFC1 = RC1.
EXPORTING
I_BUKRS = P_BUKRS.
CALL METHOD RFC1->DISPLAY.
There are two types of interfaces like a class.

1. Local class
2. Global class
Abstract class: -
If the class isnt fully implemented then the class is called abstract class or if the class contains at least one
abstract method then the class is called abstract class. These abstract methods are implemented through
derived class or child class.
We cant create the object for abstract class.
Based on the given company code, display the company code, company name, city by using
OOABAP with abstract class concept.
REPORT ZOOPS1100.
INCLUDE ZIIT001.
CLASS C1 DEFINITION ABSTRACT.
PUBLIC SECTION.
METHODS: GET_DATA IMPORTING I_BUKRS TYPE BUKRS,
DISPLAY ABSTRACT.
By Mr.Sunil
ENDCLASS.
METHOD GET_DATA.
= I_BUKRS.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
CLASS C2 DEFINITION INHERITING FROM C1.
PUBLIC SECTION.
METHODS DISPLAY REDEFINITION.
ENDCLASS.
METHOD DISPLAY.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
START-OF-SELECTION.
CREATE OBJECT RC2.
EXPORTING
I_BUKRS = P_BUKRS.
Deferred class: -
If you want to access the class before declaring & implementing the class then we must specify the class
as deferred.
Syntax
Class <class name> definition deferred.
Ex: - class c1 definition deferred.
Friend class:-
Through friends class we can access the private components of some other class.
REPORT ZOOABAP1111.
class c2 definition deferred.
class c1 definition friends c2.
public section.
methods M1.
private section.
methods M2.
endclass.
class c1 implementation.
method M1.
write 'ENRICH Technologies'.
endmethod.
method M2.
write:/ 'S.R Nagar, Hyderabad'.
endmethod.
By Mr.Sunil
endclass.
class c2 definition.
public section.
methods M3.
endclass.
class c2 implementation.
method M3.
data rc1 type ref to c1.
CREATE OBJECT rc1.
CALL METHOD rc1->M1.
endmethod.
endclass.
start-of-selection.
data rc2 type ref to c2.
CREATE OBJECT rc2.
By Mr.Sunil
BAPI
(Business Application Programming Interface)
BAPI's are used to connecting from SAP to SAP as well as SAP to NON-SAP.
BAPI's are defined as an API method (Application Programming

Interface) of SAP objects. These methods & their objects are stored as
well maintained in BOR (Business Object Repository). BOR taking
care about version change management (when ever the version is
changed if any changes required in BAPI those changes is done by
BOR).
BAPI's are also called as one of the remote enable function module.
Some of the important points related to BAPI: -

1) BAPI mustn't contain call transaction.
2) BAPI mustn't invoke commit work instead of commit work we call the BAPI-
TRANSACTION_COMMIT function module.
3) BAPI structure mustn't contains includes.
4) There is o functional dependences between any two BAPI's.
5) BAPI never calls to terminate the program. Whenever an error occurred in BAPI it written those
errors through written parameter.
6) BAPI must not contain dialogue programs.
By Mr.Sunil
7) BAPI mustn't contain Submit reports.
Steps to create our own custom BAPI
1. Create the BAPI structure (SE11)
2. Create the BAPI function module (SE37)
1. Which is remote enable.
2. Must contains RETURN parameter
3. All parameters are pass by value
3. Create the object and methods for BAPI function module (SW01)
4. Release the object and method (SW01).
Develop a custom BAPI to display the purchasing doc number, doc date & vendor number based
on the given purchasing doc number.
Steps to create the BAPI structure: -
Execute SE11. Select the radio button data type. Provide the BAPI structure name (ZBAPI_10AM_STR).
Click on create. Select the radio button structure. Enter. Provide short description (BAPI Structure).
Provide the component & component type.
EBELN EBELN
BEDAT BEDAT
LIFNR LIFNR
Save in own package. Check, activate.
Execute SE37. In the menu bar click on goto function groups create group. Provide the function
group name (ZBAPI_10AM_FG), short description. Save in our own package.
Steps to activate the function group: -
In the menu bar click on environment inactive objects. Expand the function group under transportable
objects. Select the function group. Right click activate. Enter.
Steps to create function module: -
Execute SE37. Provide the function module name. Click on create. Provide the function group
(ZBAPI_10AM_FG), short description. Enter. Click on attributes tab. Select the radio button remote-
enabled module. Click on import tab.
Import
Parameter type associated type pass by value
I_EBELN TYPE ZBAPI_10AM_STR-EBELN
Export
Parameter type associated type pass by value
E_WA TYPE ZBAPI_10AM_STR
RETURN TYPE BAPI_RET2
Source code
Select single ebeln bedat lifnr from ekko into wa_ekko where ebeln = i_ebeln.
Save, check, activate. Click on back. In the menu bar click on function module. Release -> Release.
Function module is released.
Steps to release the object & method for BAPI function module: -
Execute SW01. Provide the object name (ZBAPI_10AM). Click on create. Provide the object name
(ZBAPI_10AM). Click on create. Provide the same to all. Select the application (M). Enter. Click on
enter. Save in our package. Place the cursor on methods. In the menu bar click on utilities. API methods
Add method. Provide function module name (ZBAPI_10AM_FM). Click on enter. Click on next step
(CTRL + SHIFT + F11). Click on next. Click on yes. Click on save.
Steps to release the object & method: -
By Mr.Sunil
Place the cursor on object (ZBAPI_10AM). In the menu bar click on edit change release status
object type to modeled (to implemented, to release also). Select the method. In the menu bar, click on
edit change release status object type component to modeled (to implemented, to released also).
Click on generate (CTRL + F3).
Steps to check BAPI is available or not in BOR:-
Execute BAPI transaction. Click on alphabetical tab & absorb our BAPI.
Note: - In the real time we never create our own custom BAPIs. We always use existing BAPIs.
Note: - In the real time we always use the BAPIs like conversion program or report.
Steps to identify the standard BAPIs: -
Method 1:-
Execute SE93. Provide the related transaction code (ME23N). Click on display. Click on display object
list (CTRL + SHIFT + F5) in the application tool bar. Expand the package. Expand the business
engineering. Expand the business object types. Double click on our required business object. Expand the
method. Double click on our required method (Get details). Click on ABAP tab. Identify the BAPI name
(BAPI_PO_GETDETAIL).
Method 2:-
Execute BAPI transaction. Click on hierarchical tab. Expand the module. Expand the application (sales).
Expand the object. Double click on method. Identify the BAPI in right side.
Method 3:-
By using BAPI methods we can identify the standard BAPI.
Some of the BAPI methods are
1. Get list ()
2. Get details ()
3. Get status ()
4. Existence check ()
5. Create ()
6. Change ()
7. Delete ()
Steps to identify the BAPI based on BAPI method name: -
Execute SE37. Provide BAPI <Method name>. Click on F4. We get the list of BAPIs related to that
method & identify our required method.
Note: - When ever we are working with crate, change, delete BAPIs, then we must committed the data
base by using BAPI_TRANSACTION_COMMIT function module. Other wise the data base isnt
updated.
Steps to create cost center group manually: -
Execute KSH1. Provide the Controlling area (6000). Enter. Provide the cost center group name (ZENG).
Enter. Provide short description. Click on cost center in the application tool bar. Provide the from to (1000
3000), (5000 7000) cost centers. Enter. Click on save.
Create the cost center group by using BAPI.
BAPI: - BAPI_COSTCENTERGROUP_CREATE
PARAMETER P_CAREA LIKE BAPICO_GROUP-CO_AREA.
DATA WA_RETURN LIKE BAPIRET2.
DATA: IT_HNODE LIKE TABLE OF BAPISET_HIER,
WA_HNODE LIKE LINE OF IT_HNODE.
DATA: IT_HVAL LIKE TABLE OF BAPI1112_VALUES,
By Mr.Sunil
WA_HVAL LIKE LINE OF IT_HVAL.
WA_HNODE-GROUPNAME = 'ZENG'.
WA_HNODE-HIERLEVEL = '0'.
WA_HNODE-VALCOUNT = '2'.
WA_HNODE-DESCRIPT = 'COSTCENTER GROUP1'.
APPEND WA_HNODE TO IT_HNODE.
WA_HVAL-VALFROM = '0000001000'.
WA_HVAL-VALTO = '0000002000'.
APPEND WA_HVAL TO IT_HVAL.
WA_HVAL-VALFROM = '0000003000'.
WA_HVAL-VALTO = '0000004000'.
APPEND WA_HVAL TO IT_HVAL.
CALL FUNCTION 'BAPI_COSTCENTERGROUP_CREATE'
EXPORTING
CONTROLLINGAREAIMP = P_CAREA
IMPORTING
RETURN = WA_RETURN
TABLES
HIERARCHYNODES = IT_HNODE
HIERARCHYVALUES = IT_HVAL.
CALL FUNCTION 'BAPI_TRANSACTION_COMMIT'.

IF WA_RETURN IS INITIAL.
WRITE 'COSTCENTER GROUP CREATED'.
ELSE.
WRITE WA_RETURN-MESSAGE.
ENDIF.
Steps to create the bank details manually: -
Execute FI01. Provide bank country key (IN). Bank key (15151619). Enter. Provide the bank name
(HDFC Bank). Save.
Create the bank details by using BAPI.
BAPI NAME: BAPI_BANK_CREATE
PARAMETER P_CTRY LIKE BAPI1011_KEY-BANK_CTRY.
DATA WA_ADD LIKE BAPI1011_ADDRESS.
WA_ADD-BANK_NAME = 'PANJAB BANK'.
WA_ADD-REGION = '01'.
WA_ADD-STREET = 'AMEERPET'.
WA_ADD-CITY = 'HYD'.
CALL FUNCTION 'BAPI_BANK_CREATE'
EXPORTING
BANK_CTRY = P_CTRY
BANK_KEY = '15161718'
BANK_ADDRESS = WA_ADD
IMPORTING
RETURN = WA_RETURN.
By Mr.Sunil
WRITE 'BANK CREATED'.
ELSE.
ENDIF.
Update the bank city & street using BAPI.

Steps to update the bank details manually: -
Execute FI02. provide bank country key (IN), bank key (112233). Enter. Provide the street (SR Nagar),
city (HYD). Save.
PARAMETER: P_CTRY LIKE BAPI1011_KEY-BANK_CTRY,

P_BKEY LIKE BAPI1011_KEY-BANK_KEY.
DATA: WA_ADD LIKE BAPI1011_ADDRESS,
WA_ADDX LIKE BAPI1011_ADDRESSX.
WA_ADD-STREET = 'MOOSAPET'.
WA_ADD-CITY = 'HYD'.
WA_ADDX-STREET = 'X'.
WA_ADDX-CITY = 'X'.
CALL FUNCTION 'BAPI_BANK_CHANGE'
EXPORTING
BANKCOUNTRY = P_CTRY
BANKKEY = P_BKEY
BANK_ADDRESSX = WA_ADDX
IMPORTING
RETURN = WA_RETURN.

WRITE / 'BANK UPDATED'.
ELSE.
ENDIF.
Develop a conversion program to update the bank city & street from flat file to sap system by
using BAPI. The flat file contains bank country key, bank key, street & city.
DATA: BEGIN OF WA_BANK,
BCTRY LIKE BAPI1011_KEY-BANK_CTRY,
BKEY LIKE BAPI1011_KEY-BANK_KEY,
STREET TYPE STRAS_GP,
CITY TYPE ORT01_GP,
END OF WA_BANK.
DATA IT_BANK LIKE TABLE OF WA_BANK.
DATA: WA_ADD LIKE BAPI1011_ADDRESS,
WA_ADDX LIKE BAPI1011_ADDRESSX,
WA_RETURN LIKE BAPIRET2.
By Mr.Sunil
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_BANK.
WA_ADD-STREET = WA_BANK-STREET.
WA_ADD-CITY = WA_BANK-CITY.
WA_ADDX-STREET = 'X'.
WA_ADDX-CITY = 'X'.
CALL FUNCTION 'BAPI_BANK_CHANGE'
EXPORTING
BANKCOUNTRY = WA_BANK-BCTRY
BANKKEY = WA_BANK-BKEY
BANK_ADDRESSX = WA_ADDX
IMPORTING
RETURN = WA_RETURN.
WRITE / 'BANK UPDATED'.
ELSE.
ENDIF.
ENDLOOP.
Application of BAPI
BAPIs are used to connected with R/3 to new SAP components BI/BW, APO, CRM, SCM etc.
BAPIs are used to connect with R/3 to internet by using IACS (Internet Application Components).
BAPIs are used to connect with distributed system with help of ALE.
BAPIs are used to connect with VB as a front end to R/3 system.
BAPIs are used to connect with R/3 to business partners own developments that is vendor portals,
customer portals etc.
BAPIs are used to connect with SAP to legacy system.
BAPIs are used to connect with SAP to non-sap system.
Upload the Bank details from flat file to SAP system by using BAPI
DATA: BEGIN OF WA_BANK,

BCTRY LIKE BAPI1011_KEY-BANK_CTRY,
BKEY LIKE BAPI1011_KEY-BANK_KEY.
INCLUDE STRUCTURE BAPI1011_ADDRESS.
DATA END OF WA_BANK.
DATA IT_BANK LIKE TABLE OF WA_BANK.
DATA WA_ADD LIKE BAPI1011_ADDRESS.
EXPORTING
FILETYPE = 'DAT'
By Mr.Sunil
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_BANK.
MOVE-CORRESPONDING WA_BANK TO WA_ADD.
CALL FUNCTION 'BAPI_BANK_CREATE'
EXPORTING
BANK_CTRY = WA_BANK-BCTRY
BANK_KEY = WA_BANK-BKEY
IMPORTING
RETURN = WA_RETURN.
WRITE / 'BANK CREATED'.
ELSE.
WRITE / WA_RETURN-MESSAGE.
ENDIF.
ENDLOOP.
Based on the given comp code vendor number & date, display the vendor open item details
by using BAPI.
PARAMETER: P_BUKRS LIKE BAPI3008_1-COMP_CODE,
P_KUNNR LIKE BAPI3008_1-VENDOR,
P_DAT LIKE BAPI3008-KEY_DATE.
DATA WA_RETURN LIKE BAPIRETURN.
DATA T_OT LIKE TABLE OF BAPI3008_2.
CALL FUNCTION 'BAPI_AP_ACC_GETOPENITEMS'
EXPORTING
COMPANYCODE = P_BUKRS
VENDOR = P_KUNNR
KEYDATE = P_DAT
IMPORTING
RETURN = WA_RETURN
TABLES
LINEITEMS = T_OT.
EXPORTING
I_STRUCTURE_NAME = 'BAPI3008_2'
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = T_OT.
ELSE.
ENDIF.
Based on the given company code, customer number, from date & to date display the
customer cleared items by using BAPI.
PARAMETER: P_BUKRS LIKE BAPI3007_1-COMP_CODE,
P_KUNNR LIKE BAPI3007_1-CUSTOMER,
P_FD LIKE BAPI3007-FROM_DATE,
By Mr.Sunil
P_TD LIKE BAPI3007-TO_DATE.
DATA WA_RETURN LIKE BAPIRETURN.
DATA T_CI LIKE TABLE OF BAPI3007_2.
CALL FUNCTION 'BAPI_AR_ACC_GETBALANCEDITEMS'
EXPORTING
COMPANYCODE = P_BUKRS
CUSTOMER = P_KUNNR
DATE_FROM = P_FD
DATE_TO = P_TD
IMPORTING
RETURN = WA_RETURN
TABLES
LINEITEMS = T_CI.
EXPORTING
I_STRUCTURE_NAME = 'BAPI3007_2'
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = T_CI.
ELSE.
ENDIF.
Based on the given purchasing document number display the purchasing document item
details & history details by using BAPI.
BAPI: BAPI_PO_GETDETAIL
PARAMETER P_EBELN LIKE BAPIEKKO-PO_NUMBER.
DATA: IT_ITEMS LIKE TABLE OF BAPIEKPO,
WA_ITEMS LIKE LINE OF IT_ITEMS.
DATA: IT_HIS LIKE TABLE OF BAPIEKBE,
WA_HIS LIKE LINE OF IT_HIS.
DATA: IT_RETURN LIKE TABLE OF BAPIRETURN,
WA_RETURN LIKE LINE OF IT_RETURN.
CALL FUNCTION 'BAPI_PO_GETDETAIL'
EXPORTING
PURCHASEORDER = P_EBELN
ITEMS = 'X'
HISTORY = 'X'
TABLES
PO_ITEMS = IT_ITEMS
PO_ITEM_HISTORY = IT_HIS
RETURN = IT_RETURN.
IF IT_RETURN IS INITIAL.
LOOP AT IT_ITEMS INTO WA_ITEMS.
WRITE:/ WA_ITEMS-PO_NUMBER, WA_ITEMS-PO_ITEM.
ENDLOOP.
ULINE.
LOOP AT IT_HIS INTO WA_HIS.
By Mr.Sunil
WRITE:/ WA_HIS-MAT_DOC, WA_HIS-DOC_YEAR.
ENDLOOP.
ELSE.
LOOP AT IT_RETURN INTO WA_RETURN.
WRITE:/ WA_RETURN-MESSAGE.
ENDLOOP.
ENDIF.
Based on the given purchasing document numbers, display the purchasing document item,
service & history details by using BAPI.
REPORT ZBAPI993.
TYPE-POOLS SLIS.
DATA V1 LIKE BAPIEKKO-PO_NUMBER.
DATA: BEGIN OF WA,
END OF WA.
DATA: IT_ITEMS LIKE TABLE OF BAPIEKPO,

WA_ITEMS LIKE LINE OF IT_ITEMS,
IT_ITEMS1 LIKE IT_ITEMS.
DATA: IT_HIS LIKE TABLE OF BAPIEKBE,
WA_HIS LIKE LINE OF IT_HIS,
IT_HIS1 LIKE IT_HIS.
DATA: IT_SER LIKE TABLE OF BAPIESLL,
WA_SER LIKE LINE OF IT_SER,
IT_SER1 LIKE IT_SER.
DATA: IT_RETURN LIKE TABLE OF BAPIRETURN,
WA_RETURN LIKE LINE OF IT_RETURN,
IT_RETURN1 LIKE IT_RETURN,
WA_RETURN1 LIKE LINE OF IT_RETURN1.

DATA: IT_EVENT1 TYPE SLIS_T_EVENT,

IT_EVENT2 TYPE SLIS_T_EVENT,
IT_EVENT3 TYPE SLIS_T_EVENT.
DATA: WA_LAYOUT1 TYPE SLIS_LAYOUT_ALV,

WA_LAYOUT2 TYPE SLIS_LAYOUT_ALV,
WA_LAYOUT3 TYPE SLIS_LAYOUT_ALV.
By Mr.Sunil
SELECT EBELN FROM EKKO INTO TABLE IT WHERE EBELN IN S_EBELN.
LOOP AT IT INTO WA.

CALL FUNCTION 'BAPI_PO_GETDETAIL'
EXPORTING
PURCHASEORDER = WA-EBELN
ITEMS = 'X'
HISTORY = 'X'
SERVICES = 'X'
TABLES
PO_ITEMS = IT_ITEMS
PO_ITEM_HISTORY = IT_HIS
PO_ITEM_SERVICES = IT_SER.
APPEND LINES OF IT_ITEMS TO IT_ITEMS1.
APPEND LINES OF IT_HIS TO IT_HIS1.
APPEND LINES OF IT_SER TO IT_SER1.
APPEND LINES OF IT_RETURN TO IT_RETURN1.
ENDLOOP.
IF IT_RETURN IS INITIAL.
WA_FCAT1-FIELDNAME = 'PO_NUMBER'.
WA_FCAT1-SELTEXT_M = 'PO NUMBER'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT1.
WA_FCAT1-FIELDNAME = 'PO_ITEM'.
WA_FCAT1-SELTEXT_M = 'ITEM NUMBER'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT1.
WA_FCAT2-FIELDNAME = 'MAT_DOC'.
WA_FCAT2-SELTEXT_M = 'MATERIAL DOCUMENT'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT2.
WA_FCAT2-FIELDNAME = 'DOC_YEAR'.
WA_FCAT2-SELTEXT_M = 'DOCUMENT YEAR'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT2.
WA_FCAT3-FIELDNAME = 'PCKG_NO'.
WA_FCAT3-SELTEXT_M = 'PACKAGE NUMBER'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT3.
By Mr.Sunil
WA_FCAT3-FIELDNAME = 'SUBPCKG_NO'.
WA_FCAT3-SELTEXT_M = 'SUB PACKAGE NUMBER'.
CLEAR WA_FCAT3.
CALL FUNCTION 'REUSE_ALV_BLOCK_LIST_INIT'

EXPORTING
I_CALLBACK_PROGRAM = SY-CPROG.
EXPORTING
I_TABNAME = 'IT_ITEMS1'
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = IT_ITEMS1.
EXPORTING
I_TABNAME = 'IT_HIS1'
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = IT_HIS1.
EXPORTING
I_TABNAME = 'IT_SER1'
TABLES
T_OUTTAB = IT_SER1.
CALL FUNCTION 'REUSE_ALV_BLOCK_LIST_DISPLAY'.
ELSE.
LOOP AT IT_RETURN1 INTO WA_RETURN1.
WRITE:/ WA_RETURN1-MESSAGE.
ENDLOOP.
ENDIF.
Enhanced BAPIs: -
Based on the client requirement if you add additional fields to the standard data base table. If you want to
update these fields information by using BAPI then we go for BAPI enhanced.
Steps to work with enhanced BAPI: -

Open the BPI n SE37 & identify the extension in parameter & double click on their associated type & add
our additional fields to the structure by using append structure.
By Mr.Sunil
At the time of calling the BAPI we need to pass the additional fields information. Those
information is automatically updated into standard data base table.
If you want get the additional fields information through BAPI then we add these additional fields
to the extension out parameter in the BAPI.
Note: - BAPI is used to connecting from SAP to SAP as well as SAP to NON SAP. Where as RFC is
used to connecting from SAP-SAP only.
By Mr.Sunil
BADI (Business ADD-INS)
BADIs are used to adding some additional functionality to standard functionality without disturbing the
standard functionality. BADIs are introduced from 4.6C version on wards. BADI contains 2 sections.
1. BADI Definition
2. BADI Implementation
Each BADI definition contains one adapter class and interface. Adapter class taking care the version
change management (When ever the version is changed if any changes required in the BADI those are
done by adapter class). Interface is the collection of methods which are defined not implemented. Those
are implemented through BADI implementation based on client requirement.
The transaction code for BADI definition is SE18.
BADI Implementation: - BADI Implementation is nothing but implementing the methods which are
defined in BADI definition. The transaction code for BADI implementation is SE19.
Differences between Customer exit (Enhancement) and BADI.
Customer Exit (Enhancement) BADI
1. We can implement the customer exit only 1. We can implement the same BADI any
once. number of times.
2. Customer exit is the procedural approach. 2. BADIs are object oriented approach. So it
So it takes some extra time to enhancing. takes very less time to enhancing.
3. In the screen exit the screen number is fixed 3. In the screen BADI we provide our own
which is provide by SAP. screen number.
4. By using CMOD transaction we can 4. By using SE19 transaction we can
implement the customer exit. implement the BADI.
Note: - In the real time we never create our own BADI. We always use existing BADIs.
Some of the scenario: -
Scenario 1: -
In the real time MDM (Master Data Management) people create the vendor and customer XK01 &
XD01 & later they maintain the key information in a excel sheet at end of the month they take a printout.
They put a sign & their respective people also put a sign. This is required for audit companies. We
implement a BADI to maintain the key information in a excel sheet at the time of create & save the vendor
& customer.
Scenario 2: -
At the time of creating the vendor and customer some times MDM people provide the incorrect recon
account and cash management group. To avoid this we implement the BADI to preset the recon account
and cash management group based on given company code.
Scenario 3: -
At the time of creating the vendor and customer some times MDM people provide the invalid terms of
payment to avoid this we implement the BADI to preset the terms of payment based on the purchase
organization or sales organization.
By Mr.Sunil
Scenario 4: -
Against the vendor supplies, the warehouse department create a goods receipt with MIGO transaction 101
movement type. Against GR the finance people physically verify the stock & prepares the IR document.
Against IR document the account payable department pay the amount to the vendor with declaration of
previous amount. After few days the vendor asks the Form 16A to finance people at the time of generating
form 16. The finance department must provide LR Number, Vehicle number, Transport name. These
information isnt captured in the entire MM life cycle. Here we implement the BADI to attach additional
subscreen which contains above fields to MIGO transaction.
Scenario 5: -
The warehouse people issue the
goods against cost center by using MIGO
or MB1A transaction code with 201
movement type. Some times they entered
invalid cost center. To avoid this we
implement the BADI to thrown an error
message if they pass invalid cost center or
cost center not belongs to that plant.
By Mr.Sunil
Steps to identify the standard BAPIs: -
Method 1: -
Execute SE24. Provide the object type as CL_EXITHANDLER. Click on display. Double click on
GET_INSTANCE method. Place the break-point on first call method. Now we execute our required
transaction (which transaction BADIs we want) in a separate session. Execute XK01. Enter. In the menu
bar click on debugger switch to classic debugger. Provide the field name as EXIT_NAME. Enter.
Identify the BADI (VENDOR_ADD_DATA). Continuously click on F8 button. Identify the all the BADIs
& maintained in Excel sheet. After delete the break point. Now open the each & every BADI in SE18.
(BADI Name: VENDOR_ADD_DATA). Click on display. Click on interface tab. Double click on each &
every method. Identify the input, output parameters. In the menu bar click on goto documentation to
component. Read the documentation if it satisfies our requirement then we implement this method through
SE19.
Note: - In the real time we always identify the BADIs with the help of functional people.
Method 2: -
Execute SE93. Provide transaction code (XK01). Click on display. Click on display object list (Ctrl +
Shift + F5). Expand the package in the left panel (FBK). Expand the enhancements. Expand the classic
BADIs definition. Identify the all the BADIs. Open the each and every BADI in SE18. Click on interface
tab. Double click on each method. Identify the input, output parameters. In the menu bar click on goto
documentation to component. Read the documentation. If it satisfies client requirement then we
implement this method through SE19.
Method 3: -
Execute SPRO. Click on SAP Reference IMG. Expand the Logics-General (If we want to customer or
vendor BADIs). Expand the business partners. Expand the vendors. Expand the control. Expand the
adoption of customers own master data fields. Identify the BADIes. OR click on find function key.
Provide the search term as BADI. Enter. Identify the all BADIs.
Implement the BADI to maintain the key information in an excel sheet at the time of create &
save the vendor. The key information is vendor number, company code, account group, name,
search term, street, city, postal code, country, created by, created date.
BADI Name : VENDOR_ADD_DATA
Method Name: CHECK_ALL_DATA
Steps to implement the BADI: -
Execute SE19. Select the Classic BADI Radio button in the implementation block. Provide BADI name
(VENDOR_ADD_DATA). Click on create implementation. Provide implementation name
(ZS10AM_VEN_IMP). Enter. Provide short description (Maintain key info in excel sheet). Click on save.
Enter. Click on create enhancement implementation. Provide the same implementation name
(ZS10AM_VEN_IMP). Provide short description (Maintain key info in an excel sheet). Enter. Save in
local object. Select the implementation name. Enter. Click on interface tab. Double click on
CHECK_ALL_DATA method. Click on signature. Identify the input output parameters & implement the
logic. Save, check, activate the method. Click on back. Save, check, activate the BADI.
TYPES : BEGIN OF TY_VEN,
BUKRS TYPE LFB1-BUKRS,
STRAS TYPE LFA1-STRAS,
By Mr.Sunil
PSTLZ TYPE LFA1-PSTLZ,
LAND1 TYPE LFA1-LAND1,
CBY TYPE SYUNAME,
CDT(10) TYPE C,
END OF TY_VEN.
WA_VEN-LIFNR = I_LFA1-LIFNR.
WA_VEN-BUKRS = I_LFB1-BUKRS.
WA_VEN-KTOKK = I_LFA1-KTOKK.
WA_VEN-NAME1 = I_LFA1-NAME1.
WA_VEN-SORTL = I_LFA1-SORTL.
WA_VEN-STRAS = I_LFA1-STRAS.
WA_VEN-ORT01 = I_LFA1-ORT01.
WA_VEN-PSTLZ = I_LFA1-PSTLZ.
WA_VEN-LAND1 = I_LFA1-LAND1.
WA_VEN-CBY = SY-UNAME.
WA_VEN-CDT = SY-DATUM.
CLEAR WA_VEN.
EXPORTING
FILENAME = 'C:\Users\Administrator\Desktop\HAI.XLS'
APPEND = 'X'
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_VEN.
REFRESH IT_VEN.
Implement the BADI to preset the Recon Account & cash management group based on the given
company code
AKONT Recon Account
FDGRV Cash Management Group
When ever we are working with Preset BADIs then we must create one Z table with preset fields and
based on which we want to preset the values and later the table data is updated by functional people.
Based on this table data we preset the values. In this object we must create one Z table with the
following fields.
1. MANDT Client Input field
2. BUKRS Company code (Based on this, we preset the values)
3. AKONT Recon Account
4. FDGRV Cash Management
And later this table data is provide by functional people based on this data we preset the values.
Table name: ZS10AM_PCV
By Mr.Sunil
BADI Name: VENDOR_ADD_DATA
Method: PRESET_VALUES_CCODE
Implement the BADI through SE19.
DATA WA TYPE ZS10AM_PCV.
SELECT SINGLE * FROM ZS10AM_PCV INTO WA WHERE BUKRS = E_LFB1-
BUKRS.
IF SY-SUBRC = 0.
E_LFB1-AKONT = WA-AKONT.
E_LFB1-FDGRV = WA-FDGRV.
ENDIF.
Steps to identify the all the implementations of BADI: -

Execute SE18. Provide the BADI name (VENDOR_ADD_DATA). Click on display. In the menu bar
click on implementation Display. Identify the all the implementations of BADI. Yellow color Badis are
active and Blue color Badis are inactive.
Implement the BADI to preset terms of payment based o purchase organization.
In this object we must create one Z table with the following fields.
1. MANDT Client
2. EKORG Purchase organization (Input field)
3. ZTERM Terms of Payment (Preset field)
Table Name: (ZS10AM_PPV)
BADI Name: VENDOR_ADD_DATA

Method : PRESET_VALUES_PORG
Implement the BADI through SE19.
DATA WA TYPE ZS10AM_PPV.
SELECT SINGLE * FROM ZS10AM_PPV INTO WA WHERE EKORG = E_LFM1-EKORG.
IF SY-SUBRC = 0.
E_LFM1-ZTERM = WA-ZTERM.
ENDIF.
Steps to work with Screen BADI: -

1. The Screen fields are added to standard data base table through standard data base table through
Append structure or create a table with screen fields.
2. Based on this table fields we create the Module Pool program & sub screen.
3. This module pool program and sub screen is attached to standard transaction code by using Badi.
Add the following subscreen to the MIGO transaction by using BADI

Here we add the above fields to EKBE table through
Append structure or we create the Z table with these
fields based on this table fields. We create the module pool
program and subscreen.
This screen and program is attached to MIGO
By Mr.Sunil
transaction by using BADI.
Steps to create module pool program & screen: -
Execute SE38. Provide the program name (ZS10AM_MIGO_SCREEN). Click on create. Provide title.
Select type as module pool. Save. Click on local object. Click on display object list. Select the program in
left panel. Right click create screen. Provide screen number (2222). Provide short description. Select
the radio button sub screen. Click on save. Click on layout. Click on dictionary or program fields (F6).
Provide the table name which table contains these fields. Select the required fields. Enter. Save, check,
activate the screen. Click on back. Double click on the program. Right click activate.
BADI Name: MB_MIGO_BADI
Method Name: PBO_BETAIL
Badi is implemented through SE19.
E_CPROG = 'ZSCREEN990'.
E_DYNNR = '2222'.
E_HEADING = 'GR ADITIONAL SCREEN'.
Now we execute MIGO transaction and absorb the additional screen in the tab.
Filter BADI: -
Filter Badi is used to implement the same BADI multiple times with different conditions. If we want to
implement the BADI based on country specific then we go for filter BADI.
When ever we are working with cost center and profit center related BADIS then we must provide
filter type as controlling area.
When ever we are working with GL Account related BADIs then we must provide filter type as
chart-of-accounts.
When ever we are working with vendor & customer screen BADIs then we must provide filter
type as screen group.
Steps to attach the additional subscreen to the vendor and customer: -
1. Create the screen-group
2. Activate the screen group
3. Attach the program & subscreen to the screen group.
Steps to attach the additional subscreen to the vendor and customer
In this object the above screen fields are added to LFA1 table through append structure or create a Z
table with these fields. Based on these table fields we create a Module Pool Program & design a
subscreen. This program & subscreen is attached to screen group.
The following fields are added to LFA1 table through append structure.
CSTNO ZENCSTNO CHAR 10
LSTNO ZENCSTNO CHAR 10
PANNO ZENPANNO CHAR 10
Based on these fields we create the module pool program & subscreen.
Module Pool Program: ZS10AM_XK01_SCREEN.

Screen: 1011
Steps to create screen group: -
Execute SPRO. Click on SAP reference IMG. Expand logistics General. Expand business partner.
Expand vendors. Expand control. Expand adoption of customers own master data fields. Execute prepare
modification free enhancement of vendor master data. Enter. Click on new entries. Provide the screen
group (SP, short description (Screen group). Save. Select the screen group. Double click on label tab
By Mr.Sunil
pages. Click on new entries and application tool bar. Provide the number (111), function code (SPF),
description (Tax details). Save, back to initial group.
Steps to activate the screen group: -
Execute processing at Master data enhancement. Select any one of the implementation. Click on create
(F5). Provide implementation name (ZS10AM_ASGROUP). Enter. Provide short description. Save. Click
on create enhancement implementation. Provide the same implementation name (ZS10AM_ASGROUP).
Short description. Enter. Select the implementation name. Enter. Click on interface tab. Double click on
check_add_on_activate method. Click on signature in the application tool bar. Identify the input output
parameters and implement the logic.
If I_SCREEN_GROUP = SP.
E_ADD_ON_ACTIVE = X.
Endif.
Save, check, activate the method. Click on back. Save, check, activate the BADI.
Steps to attach program & subscreen to screen group: -
Execute customer subscreens. Select any one of the implementation. Click on create. Provide the
implementation name (ZS10AM_ASCREEN). Enter. Provide short description. Click on attributes tab.
Click on insert row (Plus button +). Provide the screen group (SP). Click on save. Click on create.
Enhancement implementation. Provide the same implementation name (ZS10AM_ASCREEN), short
description. Enter. Select the implementation name. enter. Click on interface tab. Double click on
GET_TAXI_SCREEN method. Click on signature in the application tool bar. Identify the input output
parameters & implement the logic.
If I_TAXI_FCODE = SPF.
E_SCREEN = 1011.
E_PROGRAM = ZS10AM_XK01_SCREEN.
E_HEADERSCREEN_LAYOUT = .
Endif.
Save, check, activate the method. Click on back. Save, check, activate the BADI.
Steps to check whether the screen is added to vendor transaction or not: -
Execute XK01. Provide the vendor number, account group. Enter and absorb the screen group in the
application tool bar.
Implement the BADI to throw an error message if they pass invalid cost center at the time of
goods issue against cost center.
In the real time they issue the goods against cost center in two ways.
1. MIGO transaction code with 201 movement type
2. MB1A transaction with 201 movement type
In the client first four digit of cost center is plant number.
1. BWART Movement type
2. KOSTL Cost Center
3. WERKS Plant
Logic: -
If BWART = 201.
If WERKS <> KOSTL + 0(4).
MESSAGE E000 (ZMESSAGE1) WITH COST CENTER ISNT BELONGS TO THIS PLANT.
ENDIF.
ENDIF.
By Mr.Sunil
MIGO Transaction with 201 movement type
BADI Name : MB_MIGO_BADI
Method Name: PUBLISH_MATERIAL_ITEM
IF LS_GOITEM-BWART = '201'.
IF LS_GOITEM-WERKS <> LS_GOITEM-KOSTL+0(4).
MESSAGE E000(ZMESSAGE1) WITH 'CONSTOER IS NOT BELONGS TO THIS
PLANT'.
ENDIF.
ENDIF.
MB1A WITH 201 Movement type
BADI Name : MB_QUAN_CHECK_BADI
Method Name: CHECK_ITEM_DATA
IF IS_MSEG-BWART = '201'.
IF IS_MSEG-WERKS <> IS_MSEG-KOSTL+0(4).
MESSAGE E000(ZMESSAGE1) WITH 'CONSTOER IS NOT BELONGS TO THIS
PLANT'.
ENDIF.
ENDIF.
Enhancement Spot: -
Enhancement Spot is the collection of BADI definitions. If you want to create a BADI then first we create
the enhancement spot. In that we create the BADI definition.
Note: - We cant create the transaction code for enhancement.
USER EXIT: - User exit is nothing but adding some additional functionality to the standard functionality
is always through sub routines (form, end form). In the real time most of the times we use user exits in SD
Some of the scenarios in user exit
Scenario 1: -
In real time if we maintain the key information of the sales order in a separate Z table at the time of
creating sales order. At the time of cancel the sales order then we must remove the sales order key
information from the Z table by using user exit.
Program Name: MV45AFZZ
User Exit: USEREXIT_DELETE_DOCUMENT
Scenario 2: -
In the real time SD functional consultant provide the number ranges for sales order, delivery & billing
document. Based on the sales organization & company we split the number ranges into smaller ranges by
using user exit.
By Mr.Sunil
User Exit: USEREXIT_NUMBER_RANGE
Scenario 3: -
As per client requirement if we add some additional fields to standard SD tables if you want to assign
these fields values at the time of creating the sales documents then we use user exit.
User Exit: USEREXIT_MOVE_FIELD_TO_VBAK
Scenario 4: -
In the real time at the time of creating the sales order some times the end user select the same tax
conditions more than once. To avoid this by using user exit.
User exit Name: USEREXIT_SAVE_DOCUMENT_PREPARE
Steps to identify the user exit: -
Execute SPRO. Click on SAP reference IMG. Expand sales and distribution. Expand system modification.
Expand user exits. Expand user exits in sales. Click on documentation of user exits in sales document
processing.
Delete the sales order key information from the Z table at the time of cancel the sales document
by using user exit.
Steps to implement the user exit: -
Execute SE38. Provide the program name MV45AZZ. Click on display. Click on find function key.
Provide the user exit name (USEREXIT_DELETE Document). Enter. Double click on form or user exit.
identify the place where we implement the logic. Click on enhance ( ) symbol in the application tool bar.
In the menu bar click on edit enhancement operations show implicit enhancement options. Itll
provide yellow line for all the forms. Select our user exit yellow line. Right click enhancement
implementation create. Click on code. Click on create enhancement implementation. Provide the
implementation name (ZS10AM_UEI), short description (Delete sales document). Enter. Save in our own
package or local object. Select the implementation name. enter. Provide the logic.
Delete from ZS10AM_SKI where VBELN = VBAK-VBELN. Save, check, activate.
Split the sales order number ranges into smaller ranger based on the sales organization.
When ever we are working with number ranger ranges then we must create one Z table which contains
based on which fields we want to split the number ranges and from value, to value and current value.
Table: ZS10NR
USEREXIT_NUMBER_RANGE: -
Data WA like ZS10NR.
Select single * from ZS10NR into WA where VKORG = VBAK-VKORG and BUKRS_VF = VBAK-
BUKRS_VF.
USEREXIT_SAVE_DOCUMENT: -
Update ZS10NR set CVAL = VBAK-VBELN where VKORG = VBAK-VKORG and BUKRS_VF =
VBAK-BUKRS_VF.
Enhancement frame work: -

Enhancement frame work is the collection of implicit enhancement & explicit enhancement. Now-a-days
user exits are called implicit enhancements. In the old version if you want to implement the user exits then
By Mr.Sunil
we must provide the access key (access key is provided by BASIS people). Now-a-days we implement the
user exits through implicit enhancement.
Customer exits: -
Customer exit is nothing but adding some additional functionality to the standard functionality is always
through function module. Customer exit is either menu exit or screen exit or function exit or field exit.
Note: - Customer exits are always identified through package of transaction.

Steps to implement the customer exit: -
Identify the package at the transaction (SE93). Based on the package identify the customer exits (SMOD
transaction). Identify the right customer exit based on the short description or break point. Implement the
customer exit through project (CMOD transaction).
Menu exit: - Menu exits are used to adding some additional menus to the standard GUI. Menu exits are
not possible for all transaction codes.
Some of the standard transaction codes which contains menu exit: -

VX11: - Create financial document
CO01: - Create production order
MC94: - Change flexible LIS planning
Implement the menu exit for the standard transaction VX11.

Steps to identify the package: -
Execute SE93. Provide the transaction code VX11. Click on display. Identify the package (VEI).
Steps to identify the customer exits based on package: -
Execute SMOD. Click on find function key. Provide the package (VEI). Execute. Identify the all the
customer exits.
Steps to identify the right customer exit which contains menu exit: -
Double click on each customer exit & identify the right customer exit which contains the menu exit.
Exit Name: RVEXAKK2
Steps to open the documentation: -
Execute SMOD. Provide the customer exit in the enhancement. Select the radio button documentation.
Display. Read the documentation.
Steps to implement the customer exit: -
Execute CMOD. Provide the project name (ZS10AMME) [any name]. Click on create. Provide short
description. Save. Click on enhancement assignment. Provide the enhancement name as customer exit
name (RVEXAKK2). Enter. Click on save. Click on components. Back to initial screen. Select the radio
button components. Click on change. Double click on each menu exit. Provide the short description (Go to
SE16). Second button is Go to SE11. Enter. Double click on function exit. Double click on include.
Implement the logic.
If SUCOMM = +CS1.
CALL TRANSACTION SE16.
ELSEIF SUCOMM = +CS2.
CALL TRANSACTION SE11.
ENDIF.
Save, check, activate the include. Back, activate the function module. Back. Activate the components.
Back. Activate the project.
By Mr.Sunil
Steps to verify the menu exit: -
Execute VX11. select the financial document. Category (revocable), type (01), company code (1000).
Enter. In the menu bar click on environment Go to SE16.
By Mr.Sunil
LSMW LSMW
(Legacy Systems Migration Workbench)
LSMW is used to upload the data from file to SAP system.
Differences between LSMW and BDC

LSMW BDC
1. LSMW is purely designed for functional 1) BDC is designed for technical people who
people who dont do much coding. knows much coding.
2. In LSMW Mapping is done by system itself. 2) In BDC mapping is done by technical people
3. LSMW offers 4 techniques 3) BDC offers two techniques
a) Direct input recording a) Call Transaction Method
b) Batch input recording b) Session Method
c) BAPI
d) IDOC
4. In LSMW the flat file must be .TXT file. 4) In BDC the flat file is either .TXT file or
5. LSMW is only possible for standard Excel sheet.
transaction code. 5) BDC is possible for any transaction code.
Note: - The transaction code for LSMW is LSMW.
At the time of creating the LSMW we need to provide project (Module name), sub project (application),
object (task).
using LSMW (Batch input recording method). The flat file contains vendor numbers, names and
search terms.
Steps to work with LSMW: -
Execute LSMW. Provide the project name (ZSMM), sub project name (ZSVEN) object name (ZSVC).
Click on create in the application tool bar. Provide short description of project. Enter. Provide short
description of sub project. Enter. Provide short description of object. Enter. Click on execute.
STEP 1 Maintain object attributes: Click on execute (Ctrl + F8). Click on change mode. Select the
radio button Batch Input Recording. Click on over view icon in the right side. Place the cursor on
recordings. Click on create recording. Provide the recording name & short description. Enter. Provide the
transaction code (XK01). Enter. Provide the vendor number (H2020), account group (0004). Click on
enter. Provide the name (BIG C), search terms (BC), country (KW). Save. Click on default all in the
application tool bar. Save. Back, come back. Provide the recording name (SXK01). Save, back.
STEP 2 Maintain source structures: Click on execute. Click on change mode. Place the cursor on
source structure. Click on create structure. Provide source structure is internal table name and provide
short description. Enter. Save, back.
STEP 3 Maintain source fields: Click on execute. Click on change mode. Place the cursor on internal
table name. Click on change mode. Click on table Maintaince icon in the application tool bar. Provide
field names. (Data types & lengths which is similar as file).
LIFNR C 10 VENDOR
NAME1 C 35 NAME
SORTL C 10 SEARCH TERM
Save, back. Save, back.
STEP 4 Maintain structure relations: Click on execute. Click on change mode. Save, back.
By Mr.Sunil
STEP 5 Main field mapping and conversion rules: Click on execute. Click on change mode. Select the
each field. If the field is coming from flat file then click on source field. Otherwise click on rule in the
application tool bar. Select the radio button constant. Enter. Provide the constant value. Save, back.
STEP 6 Specify files: Click on execute. Click on change mode. Select the legacy data on the PC
(Frontend). Click on create or adding on top. Browse the filename. Provide short description. Select the
delimiter is comma, enter. Save, back.
STEP 7 Assign files: Click on execute. Click on change mode. Save, back.
STEP 8 Read data: Click on execute. Click on execute. Back, click on back.
STEP 9 Display read data: Click on execute. Enter. Click on back.
STEP 10 Convert data: Click on execute. Click on execute. Back, click on back.
STEP 11 Display converted data: Click on execute. Enter. Back.
STEP 12 Create batch input session: Click on execute. Select the check box keep. Execute. Enter.
STEP 13 Run batch input session: Click on execute. Select the session name. Process. Click on process.
Next on wards the end user execute the same LSMW from 6th step on wards for each flat file.
Steps to create the request number to LSMW: - In the menu bar click on extras Generate change
request. Click on create request. Provide the short description. Enter.
Develop a conversion program to upload the vendor master data from flat flie to SAP system by
using LSMW. (Direct input method). The flat file contains vendor numbers, names & search terms.
Steps: Execute LSMW. Provide project name, sub project name & object name. Provide short description.
Execute.
STEP 1 Main Object Attributes: Click on execute. Click on change mode. Select the radio button.
Standard batch/ direct input method. Select the object (0040), select the method (0001) [standard]. Save,
back.
STEP Maintain Structure Relations: Click on execute. Click on change mode. Select our required
structure & click on relationship. Here we establish the relationship to BLA1. Save. Back.
STEP Maintain field mapping and conversion rules: Click on execute. Click on change mode. Select
the transaction code field. Click on rule. Select the constant. Enter. Provide the transaction code (XK01).
Enter. Provide the rest of the mandatory (LIFNR, NAME1, SORTL are link from source field & KTOKK,
LAND1 are link from Rule). Save, back.
Rest of the steps are same as previous method.
Events in LSMS:
By Mr.Sunil
1. Global Data
2. Begin_of_processing
3. Begin_of_transaction
4. End_of_transaction
5. End_of_processing
Global data: - Its an event which is used to declare the variables, work areas & internal tables which are
needed to implement the logics.
Begin_of_processing: - Its an event which triggered at the time of entire flat file processing start.
Begin_of_transaction: - Its an event which is triggered at the time of each record processing start.
End_of_transaction: - Its an event which is triggered after completion of each record processing.
End_of_processing: - Its an event which is triggered after completion of entire flat file processing.
Note: - LSMW events are available in 5th step. That field mapping & conversion rules.
Develop a conversion program to update the vendor city from flat file to SAP system by using
LSMW (batch input recording method). Through XK02 transaction. The flat file contains vendor
numbers & cities & also download the error vendor which arent created.
Execute LSMW. Provide the project name, sub project name, object name. Click on create. Provide short
descriptions. Execute Maintain object attributes. Execute. Change mode. Select the radio button batch
input recording. Click on over view icon in the right side. Select the recording. Click on create. Provide
the recording name (SXK02). Short description. Enter. Provide transaction code (XK02). Enter. Provide
the vendor which is already created. Select the address check box. Enter & update the city. Click on save.
Click on default all.
Note: - When ever we are working with update transaction then we must remove the other than flat file
fields recording steps from recording.
Here we remove the NAME1, SORTL, LAND1 recording steps by using ( - ) screen field in the
application tool bar. Save, back. Click on back. Provide the recording name. Save, back.
In main field mapping and conversion rules: execute. Click on change mode. Provide the mapping.
(LIFNR ORT01 from source field, D0110 from rule constant as X). Click on layout (Ctrl + F7) in the
application tool bar. Select the Global data definitions, Processing time check boxes. Enter. Then we get
the events. Double click on global data. Declare the work area & internal tables.
Data: Begin of wa_error,
LIFNR type lfa1-lifnr,
End of wa_error.
Data it_error like table of wa_error.
Data V type lfa1-lifnr.
Click on save. Check, back. Click on save. Double click on begin of transaction. Implement validation
logic.
Select single lifnr from lfa1 into V where lifnr = itab1-lifnr.
If sy-subrc <> 0.
Wa_error-lifnr = itab1-lifnr.
Append wa_error to it_error.
Skip_transaction.
Endif.
Save, check, back. Double click on end of processing.
By Mr.Sunil
Call function GUI_DOWNLOAD
EXPORTING
FILE NAME = C:\VIDYA.TXT
WRITE_FIELD_SEPERATOR = X
TABLES
DATA_TAB = IT_ERROR.
Save, check, back. Save, back. Rest of the steps are same as previous one.
Note: - When ever we are working with BAPI methods & idoc methods then we must create a file port
in WE21 transaction. In the real time file ports are provided by BASIS people.
Note: - In the LSMW BAPI and Idocs methods acts like inbound.
Steps to create file port: - Execute WE21. Expand the file. Select the SUBSYSTEM file port. Click on
copy in the application tool bar. Provide the to port (SPT). Enter. Select the check box Unicode format in
system settings. Click on save.
Develop a conversion program to upload bank details from flat file to SAP system by using
LSMW (BAPI method) the flat file contains bank country key, bank key & bank name.
STEPS Execute LSMW. Provide project name (ZSFI), sub project name (ZSBAN), object name (ZSBC).
Click on create. Provide short description. In the menu bar click on settings IDOC inbound processing.
Provide the file port (SPT). Partner type (LS), partner number (SP800). Click on activate idoc inbound
processing. Click on yes. Save, back, execute.
Maintain object attributes: -Execute. Click on change mode. Select the radio button BAPI. Select the
business object of Bank (BUS1011), method (Create), save, back.
STEP Start idoc generation: execute, click on execute.
STEP Start IDOC processing: Execute. Click on Execute & absorb the status. If the status is 53, its
success.
Develop a conversion program to upload customer master data from flat file to SAP system by
using LSMW (Idoc method). The flat file contains customer number, names, search terms & street.
STEP Execute LSMW. Provide project (ZSSD), subproject (ZSCUS), object. Click on create. Provide
short descriptions. In the menu bar click on settings idoc inbound processing. Provide the file port
(SPT), partner type (LS), partner number (SP800). Click on activate Idoc inbound processing. Click on
back. Execute.
STEP Maintain object attributes: Execute. Click on change mode. Select the radio button IDOC. Provide
the message type (DEBMAS), idoc type (DEBMAS06). Save, back.
By Mr.Sunil

Abap Material ENRICH IT

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Abap Material ENRICH IT

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Abap Material ENRICH IT

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAP: - System Applications and Products in Data Processing

ABAP: - Advanced Business Application Programming language

Role of an ABAPer in real time:-

Reports Interfaces Conversions Enhancement Forms Work flow

In SAP ABAP each task is called one object.

Enhancements: - Enhancements are used to adding some additional

Forms: - Forms are used to design the business documents such

Work flow: - Work flow is used to automate the exist business

Phases of implementation project:-

Real time system landscape:-

The source code of an ABAP

Operators: - In ABAP weve 3 types of operators.

Relational or Logical Operator:-

Variables: - Variable is the name given to the

Syntax of Integer (I):-

Syntax of Time (T):-

Steps to up the server in our own PC: -

Parameter is the keyword which accepts the input at runtime.

Note: - Obligatory is the keyword to provide input field is as mandatory.

Creating the db table by using DDIC in two ways: -

APPL 0 Master data class

Size category: - It determines the space require for the table.

Steps to create the table by using direct method: -

Field Key Data type Length Short Description

Eid CHAR 10 Employee ID

Steps to provide the data to the table directly: -

Field Key Init Data Element

Domain: - Domain is the collection of data types & lengths.

Create the following employee table by using top down approach.

Steps to establish the foreign key relation: -

Field Data type

Create the following material table.

Steps to provide the reference fields: -

Field Data element Data type Reference table Reference field

Field Data element Data type Reference table Reference field

Steps to establish the foreign key relation: -

DDIC Data base

DDIC Data base

Note: - Joins arent possible for Clustered & Pooled tables

Field name key Data type Length

Steps to adjust the data base: -

Steps to create secondary index: -

Some of filed names in T001:

Some of field names in

Some of the field names in

Steps to create the structure: -

Steps to create our own package: -

Data : Begin of <structure / table>,

Backend picture of SAP ABAP: -

Data <internal table> like table of <work area>.

Syntax of accessing the fields from work area :-

<work area name> - <file name>

Data: Begin of WA,

T001 (company codes) KNA1 (customer master table)

Syntax to select query: -

Display the customer numbers, customer names, cities & countries.

Syntax of declaring the field: -

Differences between parameter & select-options: -

Types of Internal Table: -